Home

Avaya IP Phones User's Manual

1. 184 Procedure 29 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2007 185 Procedure 30 Replacing an IP Phone 2007 LL e 186 Procedure 31 Removing an IP Phone 2007 from service 186 Procedure 32 Connecting the IP Phone KEM to an IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 iocsos esie ris yer Ri 197 Procedure 33 Preinstallation checklist lesrse 224 Procedure 34 Installing an IP Softphone 2050 for the first time 225 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 22 of 630 List of procedures Procedure 35 Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on the PC new installation sleseeeeeeeenerse 227 Procedure 36 Upgrading the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC 228 Procedure 37 Uninstalling the IP Softphone 2050 Version 1 228 Procedure 38 Uninstalling the IP Softphone 2050 Version 2 229 Procedure 39 Installing the Accessibility Interface 229 Procedure 40 Installing the Windows QoS Packet Scheduler for Windows POW 225229E3sebiyada i aha de Edi bE SEES e E 230 Procedure 41 Changing the TN of an existing IP Softphone 2050 231 Procedure 42 Removing an IP Softphone 2050 from service 232 Procedure 43 Starting MVC 2050 oc iscctisstresaseisesaveracas 246 Procedure 44 Synchronizing a PDA with a desktop PC using ActiveSync leeeeees 247 Procedure 45 Installing MVC 2050
2. Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 223 of 630 Table 23 IP Softphone 2050 soft keys Part 2 of 2 Prompt Response Description Key 19 CFW Call Forward key NUL Removes function or feature from key Key 20 RGA Ring Again key NUL Removes function or feature from key Key 21 PRK Call Park key NUL Removes function or feature from key Key 22 RNP Ringing Number pickup key NUL Removes function or feature from key Key 23 SCU Speed Call User SSU System Speed Call User SCC Speed Call Controller SSC System Speed Call Controller NUL Removes function or feature from key Key 24 PRS Privacy Release key NUL Removes function or feature from key Key 25 CHG Charge Account key NUL Removes function or feature from key Key 26 CPN Calling Party Number key NUL Removes function or feature from key Keys 27 31 Reserved IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 224 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Operating parameters The operating parameters for the IP Softphone 2050 are as follows The minimum recommended system hardware for the IP Softphone 2050 application is Pentium compatible CPU 200 megahertz MHz or higher 128 megabytes MB RAM or higher for Microsoft Windows 2000 256 MB RAM or higher for Windows XP 55 MB free hard drive space all languages 800 by 600 resolution monitor 16 bit color Universal Serial Bus USB port version 1 1 or 2 0 USB Audio Kit For info
3. the LAN Ethernet port supports 10 100BT Mbps Full Duplex mode the PC Ethernet port supports 10 100BT Mbps Full Duplex mode automatic network configuration through DHCP For more information about automatic network configuration see Table 38 IP Phone 1110 IP parameters on page 326 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 310 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP media encryption For more information about SRTP media encryption see Features overview on page 493 802 1Q VLAN and 802 1p priority support industry standards for managing bandwidth usage full VLAN capability including a manageable integrated switch in the IP Phone for VLAN and priority tagging for PC and IP Phone traffic VLAN filtering which allows the IP Phone to only see Voice VLAN traffic The integrated switch will pass DATA VLAN traffic to the PC Ethernet port This prevents the Data VLAN broadcast traffic from reaching the IP Phone For more information see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 and Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 802 1x Port based network access control industry standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP over a LAN For more information about 802 1x
4. Getting Started card IP Phone 2001 Ethergray with Icon keycaps NTDU90AA16 A0533387 IP Phone 2001 Ethergray with English text label keycaps NTDU90BA16 A0533388 IP Phone 2001 Charcoal with Icon keycaps NTDU90AA70 A0053389 IP Phone 2001 Charcoal with English text label keycaps NTDU90BA70 A0533390 IP Phone 2001 Charcoal with Bezel with Icon keycaps NTDU90AB70 IP Phone 2001 Charcoal with Bezel with Icon keycaps RoHS NTDU90AC7OE6 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 50 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Table 4 IP Phone 2001 components list Part 2 of 2 IP Phone 2001 Charcoal with Bezel with English text label NTDU90BB70 keycaps IP Phone 2001 Charcoal with Bezel with English text label NTDU90BC70E6 keycaps RoHS Replacement parts 7 ft Cat5 Ethernet Cable A0648375 Handset Ethergray A0788874 Handset Charcoal A0758634 Handset cord Ethergray for IP Phone 2004 and IP Phone 2001 A088682 Handset cord Charcoal for IP Phone 2004 and IP Phone 2001 N0000764 IP Phone 2001 2002 2004 Power Adapters Power transformer 117 120 VAC 50 60 Hz North America A0619627 Power transformer 3 prong AC to AC direct plug in 8W 240 A0656598 VAC 50Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Ireland and UK Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 230 VAC 50 60 A0619635 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Europe Power transformer 2 prong wall plug direct plug in
5. IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 554 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities For detailed information about the NAT Traversal feature see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 For information about accessing NAT information from an IP Phone see Set IP Information on page 555 IMPORTANT Nortel recommends partial DHCP configuration for IP Phones residing behind a NAT router unless the NAT router supports special configuration of the DHCP server For more information see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 General Information The General Information menu displays information about the IP Phone To access the General Information menu press Services gt Telephone Options gt Set Information gt General Information The General Information menu displays the following information about the IP Phone e Hardware ID Terminal Type e Release Number e Manufacturer Code e Color Code e Set TN e Registered TN e EEPROM Data Validity e Set IP Information Note For further information about the Set IP Information menu option see Set IP Information on page 555 e Ethernet Information 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 555 of 630 Note For further information about the Ethernet Information menu option see e Server Information Note For further information about th
6. IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 600 of 630 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology If pairing is still unsuccessful pair the phone to another wireless headset or contact the headset vendor 6 When the name of your headset appears in the Found box press the Stop soft key or wait for the search to finish When the search is complete the message Search Completed Found Device s appears 7 Choose one of the following e f your headset is displayed as the first item in the Found combo box proceed to step 8 e f your headset is not displayed as the first item in the Found combo box select your headset from the list as follows a Pressthe Right navigation key one or more times to highlight the Found combo box Press the Enter key to start the edit mode b Pressthe Down navigation key to open the list Press the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight your headset c Press the Enter key to select the headset and close the list Press the Enter key to exit edit mode 8 Press the Right navigation key one or more times to highlight the Pair button next to the Pair Device item and press the Enter key a A dialog box appears with the prompt Enter PIN b Usethetelephone dialpad to enter the Bluetooth wireless technology headset PIN and press the Enter key Check your headset s documentation to find its PIN sometimes called a passkey Typically this value is 0000 9 Choose one of
7. Note 1 f a call is presented while the user is manipulating an option the IP Phone 2004 rings and the DN key flashes However the screen display is not updated with Caller ID information The programming text is not disturbed Note 2 The user can originate a call using Autodial or Last Number Redial while manipulating an option However the display is not updated with the dialed digits or the Caller ID and Autodial and Last Number Redial intercept the dialpad Supported features The IP Phone 2004 supports the following telephony features six programmable line DN feature keys self labeled four soft keys self labeled providing access to a maximum of nine features Note Functions for the soft keys are configured in LD 11 volume control bar for adjusting ringer speaker handset and headset volume six specialized feature keys Quit Directory Message Inbox Shift Outbox Services Copy six call processing fixed keys Mute IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 80 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Handsfree Goodbye Expand to PC Headset Hold e Call Duration Timer e ability to change the user defined feature key labels e Corporate Directory Personal Directory e Redial List e Callers List e Password Administration e Virtual Office e Branch Office e Active Call Failover Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download The IP Phone 2004 suppor
8. The IP Phone 2001 can support a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes in P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 2001 saves the configuration and then reboots The IP Phone 2001 searches for the connect server When the connection is complete proceed to step 8 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description Password IP Phone Installer Password You are not prompted to enter the IP Phone Installer Password if it has not been configured in your system Node The node ID TN The TN or VTN IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 68 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 The IP Phone 2001 registers with the TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When the download is complete the IP Phone 2001 resets Note The Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The current system date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear 9 Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display 10 Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more info
9. is soon 248 Procedure 46 Removing MVC 2050 from your PDA 249 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 List of procedures Page 23 of 630 Procedure 47 Enabling Auto Create lesse 251 Procedure 48 Configuring the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 279 Procedure 49 Installing the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 for the first time using manual configuration 283 Procedure 50 Installing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 for the first time using DHCP 289 Procedure 51 Enable Full Duplex mode 295 Procedure 52 Checking Ethernet Statistics 296 Procedure 53 Changing the TN of an existing IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 297 Procedure 54 Replacing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 298 Procedure 55 Removing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 HOM Service coolonc mc Liz ne c x u ERG wEESSME 298 Procedure 56 Connecting an extension microphone to the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 299 Procedure 57 Configuring the IP Phone 1110 317 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 24 of 630 List of procedures Procedure 58 Installing the IP Phone 1110 for the first time using manual configuration 325 Procedure 59 Installing an IP Phone 1110 for the first time Going DHL sic2ice se pceewechstuostedesiicseseus 332 Procedure 6
10. Bluetooth wireless technology on page 591 Upgrade the IP Phone 1150E firmware IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 470 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E 44 45 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight TFTP IP combo box The IP Phone 1150E supports remote firmware upgrades through a TFTP process and an automated UFTP process The method to upgrade the firmware depends on the following Call Server software e For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 the TFTP Server is required to download the current firmware Enter the TFTP Server IP address at the prompt e For CS 1000 Release 4 5 and later use either a TFTP Server to upgrade the firmware at the prompt accept the default entry of 0 0 0 0 or UFTP to download the current firmware For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 For Succession Release 3 0 and CS 1000 Release 4 0 the IP Phone 1150E searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in 1150e cfg is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone 1150E reboots Note The Enhanced UNIStim firmware download is only supported on CS 1000 Release 4 5 or later The Enhanced UNIStim firmware download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new
11. IP Phone 2002 keys and functions Part 2 of 2 Expand to PC Goodbye Hold Headset Mute Volume control bar Handsfree key Function The Expand to PC key is used to access external server applications such as External Application Server XAS Press the Goodbye key to terminate an active call Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the line DN key beside the flashing LCD to return to the caller on hold Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to switch a call from the handset or Handsfree to the headset Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to a two way conversation The Mute key applies to Handsfree Handset and Headset microphones The Mute LED flashes when the Mute option is in use Use the volume control bar to adjust the volume of the handset headset speaker ringer and Handsfree feature Press the right side of the rocker bar to increase volume press the left side to decrease volume Press the Handsfree key to activate the Handsfree feature The LED lights to indicate when handsfree is active IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 118 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Services menu Table 11 shows the Services menu Table 11 Services menu Services key Press the Services key to access the following items Telephone Options Volume Adjustment Contrast
12. IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 394 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Note 1 If a call is presented while the user is manipulating an option the IP Phone 1140E rings and the DN key flashes However the screen display is not updated with Caller ID information The programming text is not disturbed Note 2 The user can originate a call using Autodial or Last Number Redial while manipulating an option However the display is not updated with the dialed digits or the Caller ID and Autodial and Last Number Redial intercept the dialpad Local Tools menu Table 46 shows the Local Tools menu Table 46 Local Tools menu Press the Services key twice to access the Local Tools menu The following items appear in the Local Tools menu 1 Preferences 1 Display Settings 2 Languages 3 Bluetooth Setup 2 Local Diagnostics 1 IP Set amp DHCP Information 2 Network Diagnostic Tools 3 Ethernet Statistics 4 IP Network Statistics 5 USB Devices 3 Network Configuration 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 395 of 630 Table 46 Local Tools menu 4 Lock Menu 1 Manual Secure Local Menu 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu 4 DHCP Secure Menu 5 Lock Now Note f you are prompted to enter a password when you double press the Services key password protection is enabled For more information about password protection see Local Tools menu pass
13. Item Description ISET TN Iscu TN ID CODE i2001 i2002 i2004 or i2050 ISET MAC ADR XX XX XX XX XX XX 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 559 of 630 Table 70 IDU command printout in LD 32 for IP Phone without a NAT Part 2 of 2 Item Description ISET IP ADR XX X X O0C XXXX LTPS IP ADR XX XX XXX XX MANUFACTURER CODE NAME MODEL NT CODE XXXXXXXX COLOR CODE Xx RLS CODE x SER NUM XXXXXX FW SW VERSION XXXXXXX If the IDU command cannot retrieve the information shown in Table 69 IDU command printout in LD 32 for IP Phone with a NAT on page 558 or Table 70 it responds with one of the following e prints the IP Phone IP address and the Voice Gateway Media Card address and generates an NPR0503 message e the IP Phone is not registered with the Call Server and generates an NPR0048 message e the IP Phone is registered but the Call Server is not responding and generates an NPR0503 message End of Procedure Graphic based diagnostics utilities Graphic diagnostic utilities are available on the IP Phone 2007 IP Phone 1120E the IP Phone 1140E and the IP Phone 1150E IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 560 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities For information about diagnostic utilities for the IP Phone 2007 see Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 2007
14. Procedure 30 Replacing an IP Phone 2007 on page 189 Procedure 31 Removing an IP Phone 2007 from service on page 189 Note After an IP Phone has been installed and configured if power to the phone is interrupted re entry of the IP parameters Node Number TN or re acquisition of firmware is not required The IP Phone 2007 uses the customer IP data network to communicate with the Communication Server 1000 The IP Phone 2007 translates voice into data packets for transport using Internet Protocol A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide information that enables the IP Phone 2007 network connection and connection to the Communication Server 1000 Figure 10 on page 153 shows the IP Phone 2007 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 153 of 630 Figure 10 IP Phone 2007 Message waiting indicator Goodbye key Incoming call indicator Hold key Handset Programmable line DN feature keys self labeled Speaker EN Display screen Dialpad Navigation keys Handsfree LED d Stylus holder Handsfree key Pu f i LED Mute Key Volume control bar Headset key Context sensitive soft keys Components and functions This section describes the following components and functions of the IP Phone 2007 e Keys and functions e Services menu Local Tools menu IP Phones Description Installation a
15. RTP RTCP statistics N A Yes Yes Network QoS process N A Yes last call Yes renew Supplicant Status N A Yes Yes Supplicant N A Authentication Status Yes Yes Supplicant Device ID N A Yes Yes Supplicant N A Authenticator ID Ping and TraceRoute Yes Yes The system administrator can use the local diagnostic tools Ping or Traceroute command from a specific endpoint with any arbitrary destination typically another endpoint or Signaling Server Ping and TraceRoute are available in Local or Remote mode IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 528 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Ethernet statistics In Local or Remote Mode the system administrator can view ethernet statistics for example number of collisions VLAN ID speed and duplex for the IP Phone on a particular endpoint The exact statistics will depend on what is available from the IP Phone for the specific endpoint The user may select either the Network Port NIport or PC port PCport IP Networking statistics In Local or Remote Mode the system administrator can view information on the packets sent packets received broadcast packets received multicast packets received incoming packets discarded and outgoing packets discarded DHCP information process In Remote Mode the system administrator can view DHCP settings for example IP address S1 S2 and
16. WA CU Method B 6 Installthe Ethernet cable Connect one end of the supplied Ethernet cable to the back of your phone using the CAT5 cable not provided connect marked with the symbol and thread the network cable through the channel marked with the symbol 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 325 of 630 7 Ifyou are connecting your PC through the phone you will require a second CATS cable Only one cable is included with the IP Phone 1110 package Connect one end of the PC Ethernet cable to your phone using the CAT5 connector marked with the symbol and thread it through the channel marked with the symbol Connect the other end to the LAN connector on the back of your PC CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug any device into your IP Phone 1110 Ethernet port other than one PC The IP Phone 1110 does not support multiple devices connected through the PC Ethernet Port Note Complete steps 1 9 as needed before wall mounting the IP Phone 8 Wall mount your phone optional Use Method A or Method B to wall mount the IP Phone See Method A using the mounting holes on the bottom of the phone stand or Method B using the traditional style wall mount box with a CAT5 connector and a 15 cm 6 inch CAT5 cord not provided See Figure 29 on page 324 e Method A Press the wall mount lever and pull away from the stand Using the stand cover see step 3 on
17. iiss esee eh EX bees URERE dS 426 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 426 Extensible Authentication Protocol L4 ceeds cena t RR be 426 Bluetooth wireless technology ssose ede mn 426 Reinstalling an IP Phone TADE 2 124 sdixdasilks bw Rn EARS 427 Replace an IF Phone LIJ0E soosseq r e epo E EROR apERAM RE det 428 Removing an IP Phone 1140E from service 428 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 388 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Introduction This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Phone 1140E For information on using the IP Phone 140E see the ZP Phone 1140E User Guide This section contains the following procedures Description Procedure 72 Configuring the IP Phone 1140E on page 408 Procedure 72 Configuring the IP Phone 1140E on page 408 Procedure 74 Enabling Full Duplex mode on page 424 Procedure 75 Checking Ethernet Statistics on page 425 Procedure 76 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1140E on page 427 Procedure 77 Replacing an IP Phone 1140E on page 428 Procedure 78 Removing an IP Phone 1140E from service on page 428 Note After an IP Phone is has been installed and configured if power to the phone is interrupted it is not necessary to reenter IP parameters Node Number TN nor firmware again The IP Phone 1140E uses the customer IP data network to communicate with the Communication
18. 452 Procedure 80 Installing the IP Phone 1150E for the first time using manual configuration 461 Procedure 81 Enabling Full Duplex mode 469 Procedure 82 Checking Ethernet Statistics 470 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 26 of 630 List of procedures Procedure 83 Changing the TN of an existing IP PRONG TIBUE Lun auioae ie lume mte RES ms 472 Procedure 84 Replacing an IP Phone 1150E 473 Procedure 85 Removing an IP Phone 1150E from service 473 Procedure 86 Connecting the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series to the IP Phone 481 Procedure 87 Accessing the Network Diagnostic Tools menu in Local mode eeess 528 Procedure 88 Executing PING 2 uebubr uu aya xEDR ER REL E 528 Procedure 89 Executing TraceRoute 529 Procedure 90 Accessing Ethernet Statistics 529 Procedure 91 Accessing IP Network Statistics 529 Procedure 92 Accessing IP Set amp DHCP Information 530 Procedure 93 Accessing the Diagnostics submenu in Remote Mode 530 Procedure 94 Accessing Diagnostic Tools in Remote mode 531 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 List of procedures Page 27 of 630 Procedure 95 Entering an IP address 53
19. Configuring the IP Phone 2004 on page 89 Procedure 10 Installing the IP Phone 2004 for the first time using manual configuration on page 93 Procedure 11 Installing an IP Phone 2004 for the first time using DHCP on page 100 Procedure 12 Enabling Full Duplex mode on page 107 Procedure 13 Checking Ethernet Statistics on page 108 Procedure 14 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2004 on page 109 Procedure 15 Replacing an IP Phone 2004 on page 110 Procedure 16 Removing an IP Phone 2004 from service on page 111 Note After an IP Phone has been installed and configured if power is to the phone is interrupted re entry of the IP parameters Node Number TN or re acquisition of firmware is not required The IP Phone 2004 uses the customer IP data network to communicate with the Communication Server 1000 The IP Phone 2004 translates voice into data packets for transport using Internet Protocol A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide information that enables the IP Phone 2004 network connection and connection to the Communication Server 1000 Figure 4 on page 75 shows the IP Phone 2004 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 75 of 630 Figure 4 IP Phone 2004 Programmable line DN feature keys self labeled Goodbye key Messaqe waiting indicator Hold key Incoming call indicator Handset Primary Directory Number key S
20. Meridian 1 PBX 11C CH CS 1000M CH Meridian 1 PBX 11C CA CS 1000M CA Meridian 1 PBX 51C CS 1000M Half Group Meridian 1 PBX 61C CS 1000M Single Group Meridian 1 PBX 81 CS 1000M Multi Group Meridian 1 PBX 81C CS 1000M Multi Group For more information see one or more of the following NTPs e Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Small System Upgrade Procedures 553 3011 258 e Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrade Procedures 553 3021 258 e Communication Server 1000S Upgrade Procedures 553 3031 258 Intended audience This document is intended for individuals responsible for maintaining Internet Enabled systems Conventions Terminology In this document the following systems are referred to generically as system e Communication Server 1000S CS 1000S IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 36 of 630 About this document e Communication Server 1000M CS 1000M e Communication Server 1000E CS 1000E e Meridian 1 The following systems are referred to generically as Small System e Communication Server 1000M Chassis CS 1000M CH e Communication Server 1000M Cabinet CS 1000M CA e Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis e Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet The following systems are referred to generically as Large System e Communication Server 1000M Half Group CS 1000M HG e Communication Server 1000M Single Group CS 1000M SG e Communicat
21. Navigation keys Function Press the Line key to access the single DN and make a call Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the green Line DN key to return to the caller on hold Press the Goodbye key to terminate an active call When a message is waiting the red Visual Alerter Message Waiting indicator flashes Also when the phone rings the indicator flashes When your IP Phone 1110 firmware is updating the blue Feature Status Lamp flashes Context sensitive soft keys are located below the display area The LCD label above the key changes based on the active feature A triangle before a key label indicates that the key is active Note Context sensitive soft keys are Call Server dependent and are further enhanced in CS 1000 Release 5 0 The Expand key is used to access an External Application Server such as Nortel Application Server The Expand key is reserved for future feature development Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen The outer part of this key cluster rocks for up down left and right movements Use Up and Down keys to scroll up and down in lists and the Left and Right keys to position the cursor You can also use the Left and Right keys to select editable fields that appear on the phone Press the Right key to select the field below the current position or press the Left key to select the field above the current position
22. Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to switch a call from the handset or Handsfree to the headset The Headset LED flashes when the Headset option is in use IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 350 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Table 39 IP Phone 1120E keys and functions Part 3 of 3 Volume control keys Copy Speaker Handsfree Function Press the volume control keys to adjust the volume of the handset headset speaker ringer and Handsfree feature Press the volume key with the loudspeaker icon to increase volume press the volume key without the loudspeaker icon to decrease volume Press the Copy Key to copy entries to your Personal Directory from other lists such as the Caller List Redial List and Corporate Directory Press the Handsfree key to activate the speaker Press the Handsfree key to activate the Handsfree feature The LED lights to indicate when handsfree is active Services menu Table 40 shows the Services menu Table 40 Services menu Part 1 of 2 Services Press the Services key to access the following items Telephone Options see Notes 1 and 2 Volume Adjustment Contrast Adjustment Language Date Time Display diagnostics 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 351 of 630 Table 40 Services menu Part 2 of 2 Local Dialpad Tone Set Info Diagnostics Call Log Options Ring
23. Remove the IP Phone from the stand by pressing the IP Phone tilt handle and pulling the IP Phone away from the stand Note For the IP Phone 2004 you can also adjust the stand angle to maximum instead of removing the stand Place the connecting arm of the IP Phone KEM behind the IP Phone and align the IP Phone KEM connection plug to the AEM port on the back of the IP Phone Note The IP Phones 2002 with the product codes NTDU76AB34 NTDU76BB34 NTDU76AB70 and NTDU76BB70 have shorter connector pins than the other IP Phone 2002 Therefore the ribbon cable connector of the IP Phone KEM must be detached from the retaining clip and pressed manually into the header connector before attaching the IP Phone KEM IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 200 of 630 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM 3 Pressthe IP Phone KEM and IP Phone firmly together until the IP Phone KEM locks into place 4 If connecting a second IP Phone KEM repeat steps 1 3 Note The second IP Phone KEM is attached to the right side of the first IP Phone KEM 5 Attach the IP Phone stand and the IP Phone KEM stand if removed Adjust each IP Phone KEM stand to the same angle as the IP Phone The IP Phone KEM powers up Note The IP Phone KEM uses the electrical connection of the IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 for power It does not have its own power source End of Procedure IP Phone KEM startup initialization Once the IP Phone KEM has been
24. pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the one s response time the IP Phone 2004 attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the network diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current settings and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are presented the configuration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace backspace a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 When the Nortel logo appears in the middle of the display immediately press the four feature keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right 2 Atthe prompt EAP Enable enter 1 Yes 1 for Yes if the network infrastructure supports 802 1x port based network access control Enter DevicelD and Password Note If you select No you will not be prompted to enter Device ID and Password For more information on EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August
25. 3 At the prompt LLDP Enable enter 1 Y 1 for Yes default or 0 N 0 for No For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 At the prompt DHCP Yes No enter 0 N 0 for No By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Phone 2004 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Phone 2004 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments e Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server Note A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description set IP a valid IP Phone 2004 IP address net msk a subnet mask def gw the default Gateway for the IP Phone 2004 on the LAN segment to which it is connected 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 95 of 630 Enter the information for the primary Connect Server S1 and the secondary Connect Server S2 Screen prompt Description S1 IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2004 81 Port This is a fi
26. 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 161 of 630 full VLAN capability including a manageable integrated switch in the IP Phone allows VLAN and priority tagging for the IP Phone traffic and VLAN tagging for PC traffic VLAN filtering which allows the IP Phone to only see Voice VLAN traffic The integrated switch will pass DATA VLAN traffic to the PC Ethernet port This prevents the Data VLAN broadcast traffic from reaching the IP Phone For more information see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 and Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 802 1x Port based network access control industry standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP over a LAN For more information about 802 1x port based network access control see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 integrated hardware to support Power over Ethernet PoE for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection The IP Phone 2007 supports the following user interface features a large color touch panel display that supports color XML HTML content through an XAS USB port to support USB devices Note Powered downstream 1 1 compliant USB hubs are supported including USB 2 0 hubs if they offer USB 1 1 backwards compliancy Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC as per FCC Part 68 headset jack with On Off key r
27. 802 1Q must be enabled on the NIC for the headers which includes 802 1p to be captured Application thread priorities Priorities are determined by thread priorities The 12050QosSvc exe application consists of threads which run the Graphical User Interface GUI and audio threads Thread priorities increase from the base priority of the process as needed The audio threads boost to high priority as recommended by Microsoft while the GUI maintains a normal priority Increasing the process priority implies that the operating system may not perform properly This concern restrains the IP Softphone 2050 to use Windows recommended priorities to avoid an unpredictable degradation in general OS performance Codec The IP Softphone 2050 provides the following codecs e G 711 provides the highest quality if the network facilities can handle the packet flow because there is no compression e G 729A is ranked best it has 8 1 compression but no voice activity detection e G 729AB is the same as G 729A but includes voice activity detection while this provides the lowest average network bandwidth utilization in some call environments the speech quality suffers due to clipping of the beginning of words Frame size The IP Softphone 2050 supports the following range of frame sizes e G 711 64 A law and ulaw 10 960 10 ms increments e G 729A 10 960 10 ms frames e G 729AB 10 960 10 ms frames IP Phones Description Installation
28. Bangladesh Brunei Sri Lanka 3 m 9 9 ft 125 VAC Option 11C Denmark power NTTK22ABE6 NTTK22AB cord Denmark Argentina N A A0814961 1 8 m 5 9 ft 10 amp IEC320 C13 NTTK26AAE6 N A Japan Installation and Configuration The following sections provide a step by step guide through the IP Phone 1150E installation and configuration process e Before you begin 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 453 of 630 First time installation e Configuring the IP Phone 1150E e Startup sequence e Installing the IP Phone 1150E Before you begin Before installing the IP Phone 1150E complete the following pre installation checklist Ensure there is one IP Phone 1150E boxed package for each IP Phone 1150E being installed The package contains IP Phone 1150E 2 1 m 7 ft CATS Ethernet cable Getting Started Card e Ensure there is one Software License for each IP Phone 1150E being installed e Ensure the host Call Server is equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card or a Signaling Server with the Line TPS application e fan AC power adapter is required ensure the approved Nortel global power supply model N0089601 is used See Table 56 IP Phone 1150E component list on page 451 First time installation You must first install an IP Telephony Node with the Communication Server For information about installing an IP Telephony Node see Signaling Se
29. Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection prevents the IP Phone 2004 from GARP Spoof attacks on the network In a GARP Spoof attack a malicious device on the network takes over an IP address usually the default gateway by sending unsolicited or Gratuitous ARP messages 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 109 of 630 thus manipulating the ARP table of the victim s machine The malicious device also launches a variety of attacks on the network resulting in undesired traffic routing For example a GARP attack can convince the victim machine that the malicious device is the default gateway In this scenario all traffic from the victim s machine flows through the malicious device To enable GARP Protection during configuration see Procedure 9 Configuring the IP Phone 2004 on page 89 or Procedure 9 Installing an IP Phone 2004 for the first time using DHCP on page 100 Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is a general protocol that fulfills the protocol requirements defined by 802 1x For further information on 802 1x see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Reinstalling an IP Phone 2004 You can reinstall an existing previously configured IP Phone 2004 on the same Call Server For example the IP Phone 2004 can be assigned to a new user new TN or to an existing user who moved to a new subnet by chang
30. Guide or the IP Phone 1150E Getting Started Card This section contains the following procedures Description Procedure 79 Configuring an IP Phone 1150E on page 454 Procedure 79 Configuring an IP Phone 1150E on page 454 Procedure 81 Enabling Full Duplex mode on page 471 Procedure 82 Checking Ethernet Statistics on page 472 Procedure 83 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1150E on page 474 Procedure 84 Replacing an IP Phone 1150E on page 475 Procedure 85 Removing an IP Phone 1150E from service on page 475 Note After an IP Phone is has been installed and configured if power to the phone is interrupted it is not necessary to reenter IP parameters Node Number TN nor firmware again The IP Phone 1150E uses the customer IP data network to communicate with the Communication Server 1000 The IP Phone 1150E translates voice into data packets for transport using Internet Protocol A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide information that enables the IP Phone 1150E network connection and connection to the Communication Server 1000 The IP Phone 1150E is configured for either an Agent or a Supervisor The IP Phone 1150E is shipped with Agent key configuration but can be modified to support Supervisor key configuration by replacing the key caps Remove the key caps using the Key Cap removal tool product number NTNM19AA For information about IP Phone 1150E
31. Installation and Operation Page 40 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 This section contains the following procedures Description Procedure 1 Configuring the IP Phone 2001 on page 52 Procedure 2 Installing the IP Phone 2001 for the first time using manual configuration on page 56 Procedure 3 Installing an IP Phone 2001 for the first time using DHCP on page 62 Procedure 4 Enabling Full Duplex mode on page 69 Procedure 5 Checking Ethernet Statistics on page 69 Procedure 6 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2001 on page 71 Procedure 7 Replacing an IP Phone 2001 on page 72 Procedure 8 Removing an IP Phone 2001 from service on page 72 Note After an IP Phone has been installed and configured if power to the phone is interrupted re entry of the IP parameters Node Number TN or re acquisition of firmware is not required The IP Phone 2001 uses the customer IP data network to communicate with the Communication Server 1000 The IP Phone 2001 translates voice into data packets for transport using Internet Protocol A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide information that enables the IP Phone 2001 network connection and connection to the Communication Server 1000 Figure 1 on page 41 shows the IP Phone 2001 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 41 of 630 Figure 1 IP Phone 2001 Messaqe waiting indicator Incoming
32. Installation and Operation Page 52 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 First time installation You must first install an IP Telephony Node with the Communication Server For information about installing an IP Telephony Node see Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 or IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 CAUTION Do not plug your IP Phone 2001 into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result Configuring the IP Phone 2001 Use Procedure 1 on page 52 to configure the IP Phone 2001 for the first time Procedure 1 Configuring the IP Phone 2001 1 Configure a virtual loop on the Call Server using LD 97 For more information about configuring a virtual loop see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 and Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 2 Configure the IP Phone 2001 on the Call Server using LD 11 For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 3 Connectthe IP Phone 2001 components a Connect one end of the handset cord to the handset jack on the back of the IP Phone identified with a handset icon b Connect the other end of the handset cord to the handset 4 Connect one end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable to the network interface located on the back of the IP Phone identified with a LAN icon see Figure 3 The other end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable plugs into the IP network 553 3001 368 S
33. Note If only the DEVICE CONFIG version is used you must add the FW section before the BootC FW recovery is used Otherwise the BootC FW download fails and the IP Phone reverts to the BootC TPS download screen 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Page 595 of 630 Figure 72 Sample of the 1140E cfg file FW DOWNLOAD MODE AUTO VERSION 0625Cxx FILENAME 0625Cxx bin PROTOCOL TFTP SERVER IP 192 168 1 100 SECURITY MODE 0 DEVICE CONFIG DOWNLOAD MODE FORCED VERSION 000001 FILENAME 1140eDEV cfg SERVER IP 192 168 1 100 Figure 73 Sample of the DEVICE CONFIG file with only the DEVICE CONFIG section DEVICE CONFIG DOWNLOAD MODE FORCED VERSION 000001 FILENAME 1140eDEV cfg SERVER IP 192 168 1 100 4 Startthe TFTP Server The TFTP Server must be running on the network when the IP Phone 1140E powers up to retrieve the Bluetooth wireless technology administrative control After you put the 1140e cfg and the device config file in the TFTP Server directory ensure the TFTP Server is running then reboot the IP Phone 1140E For information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 Once the IP Phone 1140E retrieves the setting when the IP Phone 1140E restarts it is saved in persistent memory If the Enable BT setting is set to Auto then the received value is acted on and Bluetooth wireless technology is either enabled or disabled on the
34. P Phone 2007 User Guide Tap the Tools icon to calibrate the touch panel and stylus Tap the Touch Panel Setup soft key The screen displays a calibration map the Cancel soft key is displayed and the following system prompt is displayed Touch the center of the red ball Use the stylus and tap each of the red dots in order starting with the lower left portion of the screen and following the sequence as prompted After the third dot is tapped the display changes to indicate the result of calibration fthe calibration is successful the telephone displays the following report 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 185 of 630 Data calibration is CORRECT Save Data calibration YES and NO soft keys and calibration statistics are displayed on the Screen Tap the YES soft key to save the calibration settings and exit to the main display or tap the NO soft key to abandon the calibration settings and exit to the main display Ifthe calibration is unsuccessful the telephone displays the following report Data calibration is WRONG Repeat calibration YES and NO soft keys and calibration statistics are displayed on the Screen Tap the YES soft key to retry the calibration Return to step 43 on page 184 to follow the calibration procedure or tap the NO soft key to abandon the calibration and return to the main display End of Procedure Full Duplex mode In the Configuration
35. Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 enter the TFTP Server IP address The IP Phone searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 The IP Phone 2004 can support a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes in IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 2004 searches for the connect server When the connection is complete proceed to step 8 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description Password IP Phone Installer Password You are not prompted to enter the IP Phone Installer Password if it has not been configured in your Call Server Node The node ID TN The TN or VTN The IP Phone 2004 registers with the TPS and if needed will begin the firmware download This takes several minutes When the download is complete the IP Phone 2004 resets Note The Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For fur
36. Startup sequence Installing the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Before you begin Before installing the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 complete the following pre installation checklist Ensure there is one IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 boxed package for each IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 being installed See Table 30 Components list for US CA CALA AP and GC on page 277 or Table 31 Components list for EMEA on page 278 for a list of package contents Ensure the host Call Server is equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card or a Signaling Server with the Line TPS application If an AC power adapter is required ensure the correct AC power transformer is used The voltage rating of the transformer must match the wall outlet voltage See Table 30 Components list for US CA CALA AP and GC on page 277 or Table 31 Components list for EMEA on page 278 First time installation You must first install an IP Telephony Node with the Communication Server For information about installing an IP Telephony Node see Signaling Server 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 281 of 630 Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 or IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 CAUTION Service Interruption Do not plug your IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result Configuring the IP Audio C
37. Without a Signaling Server the only firmware files available for downloading are the three available in CS Release 4 0 for the Phase 0 1 2 IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware download see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 SRTP media encryption Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP RFC 3711 is a standards based way to encrypt a Real time Transport Protocol RTP media stream The SRTP media encryption feature provides a mechanism to exchange session keys which are used to create an SRTP session over an existing RTP stream The session keys are dynamically created each time an RTP stream is created and are used to generate an SRTP Master key The session key is protected by a preshared secret embedded in the IP Phone to generate and exchange encryption parameters When SRTP media encryption feature is enabled and a traditional RTP call is set up the new feature reuses part of the RTP packets to determine if the SRTP media encryption feature is supported at the far end If the SRTP media encryption feature is supported the encryption parameters are encrypted using a secret preshared key and are sent in an RTP packet to the far end Each side then switches to SRTP SRTCP mode and all media and control streams are encrypted A small icon appears on the display to indicate the call is encrypted If the SRTP media encryption feature is not support
38. and Operation Page 612 of 630 Appendix H TFTP Server Figure 76 Configuration file information TFTP DOWNLOADING TFTP Configuration TFTP IP 47 65 70 133 Config File Contents TFTP Address DownLoad Mode Version i i ready 47 65 70 133 FORCED C123456 APP i2007 img TFTP Type File Name Protocol SECURITY Encrypted YES Authorized YES Execute Download Downioaa Exit _ _ BkSpace 6 Press the Download button to start the TFTP Server The phone will go blank briefly Then the message Starting TFTP download appears on the screen Then the firmware is downloaded The message Writing firmware to Flash ROM appears on the screen while the firmware is written to Flash memory The IP Phone 2007 resets and the application starts End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix H TFTP Server Page 613 of 630 Updating the firmware for IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E Automatic TFTP download at bootup If a TFTP IP address has been configured and a firmware upgrade is available on the server when the phone restarts the phone executes the automatic TFTP download This method requires the TFTP Server to store the cfg and img files for the IP Phone in the root directory For example the IP Phone IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E require the following files e 1110 cfg 0625Cxx bin e 112
39. and you can reenter the password but the password is not processed until the 5 minute time expires Note Some text appears dimmed depending on the current state of the menu lock and the configuration of the IP Phone Only configuration options which are enabled from the current state appear active Menu options that are not available appear dimmed For more information about configuring the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1140E see Appendix Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Key number assignments You can assign a maximum of nine functions to the four soft labeled predefined soft keys Because the soft keys are predefined the user cannot change the key number assignment Functions are assigned to the soft keys in layers in LD 11 The Message Waiting key is numbered 16 Functions mapped to key numbers 17 to 26 are assigned to the four soft keys Labels for the soft keys appear in the display area For further information see Soft key label display on page 401 Figure 37 on page 400 shows the IP Phone 1140E display area 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 405 of 630 Key number mappings at the Call Server are aligned with that of the IP Phone 2004 For a description of the IP Phone function assignment for each of the soft keys see Appendix Appendix I IP Phone soft keys on page 619 Package components The IP Phone 1140E includes integrated support for a
40. e Ensure there is one Software License for each IP Phone 1120E being installed e Ensure the host Call Server is equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card or a Signaling Server with the Line TPS application e fan AC power adapter is required ensure the approved Nortel global power supply model N0089601 is used See Table 42 IP Phone 1120E components list on page 362 First time installation You must first install an IP telephony node with the Communication Server For information about installing an IP telephony node see Signaling Server 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 365 of 630 Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 or IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug your IP Phone 1120E into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result The IP Phone 1120E does not support multiple devices connected through the PC Ethernet port Configuring the IP Phone 1120E You must configure the IP Phone 1120E before you can use it Use Procedure 65 on page 365 to configure the IP Phone 1120E for the first time Procedure 65 Configuring the IP Phone 1120E 1 Configure a virtual loop on the Call Server using LD 97 For more information about configuring a virtual loop see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 and Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 2 Configure the IP
41. managing bandwidth usage full VLAN capability including a manageable integrated switch in the IP Phone allows VLAN and priority tagging for the IP Phone traffic and VLAN tagging for PC traffic VLAN filtering which allows the IP Phone to only see Voice VLAN traffic The integrated switch will pass DATA VLAN traffic to the PC Ethernet port This prevents the Data VLAN broadcast traffic from reaching the IP Phone For more information see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 and Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 802 1x Port based network access control industry standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP over a LAN For more information about 802 1x port based network access control see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 integrated hardware to support Power over Ethernet PoE for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 2 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection GARP The IP Phone 2002 supports the following user interface features External Application Server XAS language support English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Japanese Russian Latvian and Turkish IP Key Expansion module IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 122 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Features not currently supported The following fea
42. on page 560 For information about diagnostic utilities for the IP Phone 1120E and the IP Phone 1140E see Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E on page 566 Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 2007 To access the Local Diagnostics menu on the IP Phone 2007 tap the Tools icon then tap the Local Diagnostics menu entry The Local Diagnostics menu displays the following items e Network Diagnostic Tools Ethernet Statistics e P Network Statistics e PSet amp DHCP Information You can press the Return soft key in any submenu item screen to return to the Local Diagnostics submenu Therefore you can gather information and run tests without exiting and reentering the Local Diagnostics menu Use Procedure 111 to access Network Diagnostic Tools Procedure 111 Using Network Diagnostic Tools 1 Tap the Tools icon 2 Tapthe Local Diagnostics menu entry 3 Tap the Network Diagnostic Tools soft key The screen displays Ping Tracert and EXIT soft keys presents a pull down list for IP addresses and displays the Ping and Hop parameters Scroll down through the IP addresses and tap an address 5 The number of repetitions of the Ping command are shown in the top bar of the screen The default is 4 To change the number of repetitions tap on the number and enter a new value using the USB keyboard 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 5
43. one at a time After the Expansion Module confirms to the IP Phone that the firmware file is downloaded and saved successfully the IP Phone starts the download to the next attached Expansion Module If any error causes the firmware download to fail or if the saved firmware file is corrupted the Expansion Module reverts to the factory installed firmware The factory installed firmware file is always available to facilitate firmware download in case the downloaded firmware is unusable For more information about TFTP Server firmware upgrade see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 For more information about Expansion Module see the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series User Guide NN43130 101 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 493 of 630 Features overview Contents Introduction liv nne rU er Ter ee ee 493 Corporate Directoy coa adeo dee E aed Pau dV i deed 494 Personal DIUSCIODE vi bo add ae bdo o oni RO Ye ERES qs 494 Peta 4242552538508 Baden RE d aue dariiuc adiu Br dd aed 495 CeL aas oue asd ed eub quies E eeEREQGG aA US IEEE d Fes 495 Password Admimisirallbit 42 44 sd dE ER hr EROR GG EE Y dedo 495 IP Call Recording perrbosin eo yi kre ERR Ope Sa bx Rd prod 495 voma OE Truc m 496 Emergency Services Tor Virtual Office ioo cce secco n 496 Joli ve Call Pale oux acp qp d pee qb p XR eg abico b dpa 496 Enhanced UNIStim Firmware download 200005 497 SRIP media Sneclvpel 63544 ee
44. or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 329 of 630 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description set IP A valid IP Phone 1110 IP address net msk A subnet mask def gw The default Gateway for the IP Phone 1110 on the LAN segment to which the IP Phone 1110 is connected Enter the information for the primary Connect Server S1 and the secondary Connect Server S2 S1 IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1110 S1 Port This is a fixed value 4100 1 action Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide b53 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if S1 Action is set to 1 S1 retry count The number of times the IP Phone 1110 to connect to the server Enter 10 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 330 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 1 PK S2 IP S2 Port S2 action S2 retry count S2 PK 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the f
45. see Communication Server 1000 Element Manager System Administration b53 3001 332 Select the Shift soft key labeled gt gt and press Clear to edit the TN field The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 by default will place you in the units field of the TN You cannot use backspace to move to the loop shelf or card fields Enter the new TN End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 300 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Replacing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 IMPORTANT Two IP Phones cannot share the same TN You must remove the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 that is currently using the TN Procedure 54 Replacing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 1 Obtain the node and TN information of the phone you want to replace 2 Disconnect the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 that you want to replace 3 Follow either Procedure 48 on page 281 or Procedure 50 on page 291 to install and configure the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 4 Enterthe same TN and Node Number as the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 you replaced The system associates the new IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 with the existing TN End of Procedure Removing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 from service Procedure 55 Removing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 from service 1 Disconnectthe IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 from the network or turn off the power If the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 was automa
46. the number of times the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 attempts to connect to the server enter 10 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using an Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto 60r 1 Entera 16 digit hexadecimal number The secondary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 same as S1 same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if S2 Action is set to 1 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 294 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 S2 retry count S2 PK TFTP Server IP 0 0 0 0 VLAN 0 No 1 Ma 2 Au 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 same as S1 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using an Secure Media Controller do the following Setto6or1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number the TFTP Server IP address Default 0 for No 802 1Q VLAN remains off and initialization continues 1 MA Enter a VLAN ID manually then press OK The following VLAN ID displays Manual Cfg VLAN 1234 Note The VLAN ID is entered as a decimal The VLAN ID is a 12 bit value between 1 and 4094 The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 is configured with 802 1Q VLAN enabled priority 6 and the VLAN ID set to the entered value 2 Au Enter a VLA
47. 1Q formatted frame is identical to a standard Ethernet frame with the exception of the 4 byte 802 1Q tag that is inserted between the source MAC address and the protocol identifier The first 16 bits of the 802 1Q tag 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description Page 513 of 630 field is the Tag Protocol Identifier containing 8100 hex allowing the Ethernet interface to distinguish it from standard Ethernet frames The last 16 bits of the 802 1Q tag contain the following information a 3 bit Priority field the 802 1p defined bits a 1 bit Canonical Field Identifier CFT a 12 bit VLAN ID field IP Phone support The IP Phones support 802 1Q as follows 802 1Q can be enabled or disabled at boot time using manual configuration or control downloaded from the TPS If 802 1Q is disabled standard Ethernet frames are transmitted If 802 1Q is enabled all frames transmitted by the Ethernet driver have the 802 1Q tag bytes inserted between the source MAC address and the protocol type field The tag protocol identifier field contains 8100 hex and the CFI bit is set to 0 When 802 1Q is enabled the configuration of separate voice and data VLANs is possible Each VLAN has its own ID and priority on the IP Phone Voice messages have the priority bits of all frames set to 6 octal and the VOICE VLAN ID is set to 000 hex by default Data messages have the priority bits of all frames set to 0 and the DATA
48. 2001 Page 65 of 630 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto6or 1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2001 Same as S1 Same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if the S2 action is set to 1 Same as S1 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto6or 1 e Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number Default O for No Note If there is no External Application Server XAS enter 0 for No You are not prompted to enter the XAS IP address Enter the IP address of the XAS server IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 66 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 7 Enterthe following parameters VLAN Cfg 0 No 1 Yes VLAN Cfg 0 Auto 1 Man LLDP MED 0 No 1 Yes LLDP VLAN 0 No 1 Yes DHCP 0 No 1 Yes 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 1 Man Enter the VLAN ID manually This is a number between 1 and 4094 0 Auto Automatically obtains VLAN ID using DHCP or the 802 1ab data switch If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the Network Policy TLV You are not prompted for LL
49. 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 101 of 630 At the prompt LLDP Enable enter 1 Y 1 for Yes default or 0 N 0 for No For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 At the prompt DHCP Yes No enter 1 Y 1 for Yes By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Phone 2004 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Phone 2004 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 At the prompt Cached IP select 0 0 No default to conform to the DHCP standard and to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server Only select 1 1 for Yes to force the IP Phone to start with a cached IP address in the event that the IP Phone cannot connect to the DHCP server and obtain an IP address Select Partial or Full DHCP a If you select Full DHCP then the following parameters are retrieved from the DHCP server avalid IP Phone 2004 IP address asubn
50. 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 577 of 630 USB mice and USB keyboards can be used The display shows the descriptive text string received from the USB device Procedure 119 Using the USB Devices tool 1 Press the Services key twice 2 Press 25 on the dialpad to access the USB Devices menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the USB Devices option 3 Press the Select soft key You can press the Return soft key exit the menu to return to the Local Diagnostics submenu End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 578 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 579 of 630 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu Contents This section contains information on the following topics lins i C R 579 Configuring the Local Tools menu esce n 580 Introduction This section describes the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and the IP Phone 1150E For information about the IP Phone 2007 Local Tools menu see Local Tools menu on page 158 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 580 of 630 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu Configuring the Local Tools menu Double press the Services key to access the Local Tools menu To make a menu selection you can press the number associated with the menu item for example pr
51. 362 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Key number mappings at the Call Server are aligned with that of the IP Phone 2002 For a description of the IP Phone function assignment for each of the soft keys see Appendix Appendix I IP Phone soft keys on page 619 Package components The IP Phone 1120E includes integrated support for a number of Power over Ethernet options including support for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 Table 42 lists the IP Phone 1120E package components and product codes Table 42 IP Phone 1120E components list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 1120E package contents include P Phone 1120E handset handset cord e 2 1 m 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Number plate and lens Getting Started Card Non RoHS IP Phone 1120E with icon key caps Graphite NTYSO3AC IP Phone 1120E with English key caps Graphite NTYSO3BC IP Phone 1120E with icon key caps Graphite ROHS NTYSO3ACE6 IP Phone 1120E with English key caps Graphite RoHS NTYSO3BCE6 Replacement parts Handset Charcoal NTYS09AA70 Handset cord Charcoal NTYS10AA70 Footstand kit Charcoal NTYS11AA70 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 363 of 630 Table 42 IP Phone 1120E components list Part 2 of 2 Phone number label and lens kit NTYS12AA 2 1 m 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable NTYS13AA Power adapter Global power supply for local power N0089601 I
52. 4 5 6 7 8 In Figure 63 PacketTx IP Phone packets sent PacketRX IP Phone packets received BcastPktRx broadcast packets received McastPkeRx multicast packets received InPktDisc incoming packets discarded OutPktDisc outgoing packets discarded UnknownPkts unknown protocol packets discarded ICMPTypeCode the last ICMP message xxx xxx IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 552 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities RUDP statistics data display screen TPS Figure 64 illustrates the data displayed from the RUDP Stats submenu item Figure 64 RUDP statistics data display page MessageTx xXxxxxxxxxxxx 2 MessageRx XXXXXXXXXXXX 3 Retries XXXXXXXXXXXX 4 UpTime xxx xx xx xx In Figure 64 e MessageTx messages sent e MessageRx messages received e Retries number of retries e UpTime up time of current TPS registration days hours minutes seconds Quality of Service statistics Figure 65 illustrates the data displayed from the QoS Stats menu item Figure 65 QoS statistics data display page FarEndIP xxx xxx xxx xxx PortEndPortID xxxx LocPktLossRx XXXXXXXXXXX LocJittAvgRx xxx LocLatAvg xxx LocPktTx xxx LocPktRx xxx LocOutOrdRx xxx LocListR xxx RmtPktLossRx xxx RmtJittAvgRx xxx RmtLatAvg gt xxx RmtListR xxx 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 553 of 630 In Figure 65 EndIP endpoint IP
53. 41 Key numbers 17 to 31 support the features A03 A06 CFW CHG CPN PRK PRS RGA RNP SCC SCU SSC SSU and TRN See Appendix Appendix I IP Phone soft keys on page 619 for a description of these features Key number assignments at the Call Server are aligned with that of the IP Phone 2002 The mappings between IP Phone 2001 soft key numbers and PBX CPU key numbers are the same as on the IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 49 of 630 Package components The following information applies to Phase II IP Phones Product codes for Phase II IP Phones are different from previous sets See the product code on the back of the phone to confirm whether it is a Phase ILIP Phone The product code for Phase II IP Phones appears as IP Phone 200x The product code for previous versions of the IP Phones appears with 66599 1 an in front of the model number example 1200x The AC power adapter must be ordered separately if local power using the AC adapter is required because Phase II IP Phones include integrated support for a number of power over LAN options including support for IEEE 802 3af standard power Table 4 lists the IP Phone 2001 package components and product codes Table 4 IP Phone 2001 components list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 2001 package contents include e IP Phone 2001 handset handset cord e footstand e 7 ft Cat5 Ethernet cable
54. 49 Installation and Conbiguralibit cers actis rhy Reit a 51 Pull Dopler iode 1 cron ES pRPIERURISO REP EEREN E RE RS 68 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 70 Extensible Authentication Protocol iiie esas tbhse be EE ARR ER 70 Reinstalling an JP Phone 200I cisiosilsesiki aeter R ARRIERE 70 Replacing an IP Phone 200 og cic eeviceee es RE RR RE RERER 72 Removing an IP Phone 2001 from service 0 4 T2 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Leeee 73 Mon P n POET 73 POIO i coa sbpe ce EROS EET QA d Pire ad dd d epa 74 Das loeo 2 ed deber EE ei hh eho Coe ey oe V RS 74 Components and TuncHoDs iascrasu c rnb ka eR Rx RR RAS 15 Supported Dedlures s 2c csc ckengceec base ays PRAEC PR UE RE d 79 Features not currently SUpported i ouod dee PEE PER ER A 81 Central Answering Positions Lear ex PRG GRE ROCK EO bees 81 Display chartactetistie8 4 oie wa pibe qp eR CRERRE Vd peERER aoe 82 Key number Sss Sells 412449 e eene iR epe x drb p 84 Package componebbs 6 reseko Ere Rede Pap bdo dg 84 Installation and Configuration 2 00 s040seenedeeeuseeaecons 86 Pull Duplex Wide pcs 4 cei eeee ienirt erie oire eR VO ERA 106 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 107 Extensible Authentication Protocol 00 4sse5 ener ences 108 Reinstalling an IP Phones 20095 iiie ba eds ra REIN e quee tpe RE 108 Replacing an IP Phone 2004 2 60 04cs 0sesevnsee eae ems 109 Removing an IP Phone
55. AC to AC A0647042 8W 240 VAC 50 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Australia and New Zealand Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 100 VAC 50 A0828858 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA For more information and for information about previous versions of the IP Phone contact your Nortel representative 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 51 of 630 Installation and Configuration The following sections provide a step by step guide through the IP Phone 2001 installation and configuration process Before you begin First time installation Configuring the IP Phone 2001 Startup sequence Installing the IP Phone 2001 Before you begin Before installing the IP Phone 2001 complete the following pre installation checklist Ensure there is one IP Phone 2001 boxed package for each IP Phone 2001 being installed The package contains IP Phone 2001 handset handset cord 2 1 m 7 ft CATS Ethernet cable Getting Started Card Ensure there is one Software License for each IP Phone 2001 being installed Ensure the host Call Server is equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card or a Signaling Server with the Line TPS application If an AC power adapter is required ensure the correct AC power transformer is used The voltage rating of the transformer must match the wall outlet voltage See Table 4 IP Phone 2001 components list on page 49 IP Phones Description
56. Any packet arriving on the PC port which is already tagged is dropped DATA VLAN enabled all traffic is forwarded to the PC port based on a review of the MAC address and the 802 1Q value that was manually configured in the DATA VLAN field Traffic is forwarded out the PC port only if the packets contain the DATA VLAN tag Untagged traffic and traffic without the DATA VLAN tag is dropped DATA PC Port VLAN Tag Stripping DATA VLAN Tag Stripping can be configured in the Network Configuration menu To enable DATA VLAN Tag Stripping select the PC Port Untag All check box DATA VLAN Tag Stripping can be enabled or disabled independent of enabling VLAN support on the PC Port If the DATA VLAN Tag Stripping is disabled the packet is sent to the PC Port unmodified If the DATA VLAN Tag Stripping is enabled the 802 1Q header if one exists is removed from the packet before the packet is forwarded to the PC port 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description Page 519 of 630 During manual configuration if DATA VLAN is enabled by configuring a VLAN ID the PC Port Untag All check box is selected and is enabled by default By default the egress tag is stripped To manually override this setting and disable egress stripping clear the PC Port Untag All check box If DATA VLAN is not enabled during manual configuration the PC Port Untag All check box is not selected By default the ingress tag is not stripp
57. Any value modified on any of the other tabs are associated with this profile until another profile is selected To change settings on other tabs for this profile select the tab you wish to change For example go to the Server tab to modify the server settings Sounds MVC 2050 can make sounds to indicate server connection or disconnection IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 256 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Sound files and sound settings are not saved when Profiles are saved so the use must program the sounds Up to three sounds can be programmed for use with audible notification of server connection or disconnection Descriptions of the events for which the sounds are used are as follows e Server unreachable e Server unresponsive e Server connected Server unreachable The sound you select for this event plays when MVC 2050 loses contact with the server The message Server unreachable displays on the PDA screen Server unresponsive The sound you select for this event plays if MVC 2050 fails to connect to the server The message Server unresponsive displays on the PDA screen Server connected The sound you select for this event plays when MVC 2050 connects to a server Audio quality Audio quality is controlled from the following screens e Audio quality slider tab e Advanced Audio Audio quality slider tab To control audio quality use the slider tab to reduce audio delay and increase aud
58. Auto Sense Negotiate Auto Nego Capability Y N Auto Nego Completed Y N 5 VLANPriority xxx 6 VLANID xxxx 7 PktColl xxxxxxxxxx 8 CRCErrOrs XXXXXXXXXX 9 FrameErrors XXXXXXXXXX In Figure 55 Duplex duplex mode Speed network speed 10MB 100MB Auto Sense Negotiate Auto Negotiate Protocol Received or Not Y Yes N No Note In the IP Phone Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup If the telephone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate it selects the best speed and duplex mode available For more information the applicable IP Phone section VLANPriority IP Phone VLAN priority VLANID IP Phone VLAN ID PCollision network packet collision peg counts CRCErrors network CRC errors peg counts FrameErrors network Framing errors peg counts IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 544 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities IP Networking Statistics Figure 56 illustrates the data displayed from the IP Networking Statistics submenu item Figure 56 IP Networking Statistics data display screen Packet Tx XXXXXXXXXX PacketRx XXXXXXXXXX BcastPktRx XXXXXXXXXX McastPktRx XXXXXXXXXX InPktDisc XXXXXXXXXX OutPktDisc XXXXXXXXXX UnknownPkts XXXXXXXXXX ICMPType Code xxx xxx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 In Figure 56 e PacketTx IP Phone packets sent e PacketRx IP Phone packets received
59. CAT5 Ethernet cable Power over Ethernet PoE module with 25 ft console cable IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card Universal power supply Accessories Power accessory kit PIM Universal power supply cabling NTEX11CA IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 278 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Table 30 Components list for US CA CALA AP and GC Power over Ethernet module NTEX11GAE6 Extension microphone with 7 ft cable NTEX11DA70 Table 31 lists the components for Europe Middle East and Africa EMEA regions Table 31 Components list for EMEA IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include NTEX11AA70E6 e IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 charcoal e 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Power over Ethernet PoE module with 25 ft console cable IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include NTEX11BA70E6 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 charcoal 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Power over Ethernet PoE module with 25 ft console cable IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card 2 Extension microphones charcoal IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include NTEX11EA70E6 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 charcoal 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Power over Ethernet PoE module with 25 ft console cable IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card Universal Power Su
60. Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following Setto6or1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number Default O for No Note lf there is no External Application Server XAS enter O for No You are not prompted to enter the XAS IP address Enter the IP address of the XAS server 1 Man Enter the VLAN ID manually This is a number between 1 and 4094 Description Installation and Operation Page 136 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 LLDP MED 0 No 1 Yes LLDP VLAN 0 No 1 Yes DHCP 0 No 1 Yes VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes PC Port 1 On 0 Off 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 0 Auto Automatically obtains VLAN ID using DHCP or the 802 1ab data switch If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the Network Policy TLV You are not prompted for LLDP MED if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV You are not prompted for LLDP VLAN if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 Y 1 for Yes the VLAN ID is configured automatically to a value received from the DHCP server You are not prompted for DHCP if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Au or if DHCP is not enabled Default O for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTE
61. Default 0 for Auto Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 145 of 630 PSK SRTP 0 No 1 Yes Default O for No GARP Ignore 0 No 1 Yes Default 0 for No Note You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000 Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 enter the TFTP Server IP address The IP Phone searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 The IP Phone 2002 can support a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes in P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 2002 searches for the connect server When the connection is complete proceed to step 7 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description Password IP Phone Installer Password You are not prompted to enter the IP Phone Installer Password if it has not been configured in your Call Server Node the node ID TN the TN or VTN The IP Phone 2002 registers
62. EE eot dog d 441 blesudset SUP PON choir 2 epe eae P EETEREA TEES SUR GRE E P TEE 444 Local Tools menu password protection 00 00 0008 444 Key number asspnmeniB ccoasiseaudbew aodu bp CCP EVA RS 447 Package componeuts icc rect ie OSE dE REP Od den 449 Installation and Configuration isceocc se 9 mes 450 Full Duplek mode iod Reb eRRGIG RR RADIX ARR OR doped 469 TETIE TIN Pee oho kh ETE ou be eee E RESP pe 471 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 471 Extensible Authentication Protocol 2 oosc cose ame cass 471 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Contents Page 15 of 630 Bl etooth wireless technology 2isseacoa ce RITE R ERR an daw 471 Remstalling an IP Phone 1090E i iia desto a erE eR RU ER RE 472 Replacing an IP Phone LESE cc ccckcc aces ERR petsa Re KR 473 Removing an IP Phone 1150E from service 2 sees enn 473 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series 475 goo Dm 475 DGsepBolis sid pexekpeiibbescxppFxrE RR be Padua uode quy ad 475 ESRUNESR Suae EOE TS EEE EE deenbaa hae Um ex dd beds 477 Display characteristics ues Ves opp ER EM POE OE AU EE PP deis 4a 478 Package compuietbs 2 ie cabra EO EFE Ed E apr doe poris 478 Contiplratiol i xsci coin whenet hee ales Enn Er RnR E 479 Msala essr se e4 4 oeeie ses buen We ER RR eques VET cores 480 Expansion Module startup initialization 0 484 Operating Parameters caa cis ae eAE PGae Rede venesswdei vas 486 a
63. Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information You must enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The default is ffffffffffffffff Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight VoiceVLAN combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 27 28 29 30 31 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 467 of 630 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e No VLAN e DHCP VLAN ID is configured automatically to one of the values received from the DHCP server e LLDP MED VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received from 802 1ab LLDP e LLDP VLAN Name VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received from 802 1ab LLDP Note If LLDP is disabled LLDP MED and LLDP VLAN Name modes do not appear in the list If DHCP is disabled DHCP does not appear in the list For more information about VLAN configuration see Data Networking for Voice over IP B53 3001 160 Press the Enter key Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight VLAN Filter check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off If the VLAN Filter is enabled packets destined for the IP Phone port are filtered on their MAC address and their VLAN tag Untagged VLAN packets and tagged VLAN packets that differ from the Telephony VLAN ID are prevented from reaching the IP Phone port For i
64. F Configuring the Local Tools menu Page 585 of 630 Procedure 120 Locking the Tools menu 1 Press the Services key twice 2 Press4onthe dialpad to access the Lock Menu item or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the Lock Menu options 3 Press the Select soft key End of Procedure Procedure 121 Unlocking the Tools menu 1 Press the Services key twice 2 Enter the password 26567 738 color set in the prompt window 3 The Tools menu is unlocked and will remain active for five minutes End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 586 of 630 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1110 Table 71 shows the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1110 Table 72 Local Tools menu options for the IP Phone 1110 1 Preferences 1 Contrast 2 Language 3 Backlight Timer 2 Local Diagnostics 1 IP Set amp DHCP Information 2 Network Diagnostic Tools 3 Ethernet Statistics 4 IP Network Statistics 3 Network Configuration 4 Lock Menu 1 Manual Secure Local Menu 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu 4 DHCP Secure Menu 5 Lock Now 1 Preferences The Preferences submenu offers the following choices e 1 Contrast e 2 Language e 3 Backlight Timer 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu Page 587 of 630 1 Contrast The Contrast tool adjusts the contrast of t
65. FEEP TERRE PIENO RRPPFeP EPA TIR 498 This chapter provides an overview of the following software features available for IP Phones e Corporate Directory e Personal Directory e Redial List e Callers List IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 494 of 630 Features overview e Password Administration e P Call Recording e Virtual Office e Emergency Services for Virtual Office e Active Call Failover e Enhanced UNIStim Firmware download e Secure Real time Transport Protocol media encryption Note Personal Directory Redial List Callers List Application Server Administration Password Administration are software on the Signaling Server An IP Phone must be registered to a Signaling Server to access these features Corporate Directory The Corporate Directory feature extends the use of a system database created from Optivity Telephony Manager OTM information to the IP Phones This database is downloaded and stored on the system CPU platform For information about using Corporate Directory from IP Phones see the appropriate user guide For details about Corporate Directory see Features and Services 553 3001 306 Note Corporate Directory is not supported on the IP Phone 2001 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 and IP Phone 1110 Personal Directory Personal Directory allows an end user to create and control a personal directory Up to 100 Personal Directory entries can be created edited copied from o
66. Filtering PC port disable Data VLAN and Filtering Duplex setting Ignore GARP protection Pre Shared Key PSK SRTP e XAS S4 IP address graphical port Local Displays the Local Diagnostics menu containing the following items Diagnostics Network Diagnostic Tools e Ethernet Statistics IP Network Statistics e IP Set amp DHCP Information For more information about the IP Phone 2007 Local Diagnostics menu see Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 16 Local Tools menu Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 159 of 630 Touch Panel Use the Touch Panel Setup tool to calibrate the touch panel and stylus Setup Contrast and Use Contrast Brightness tools to alter the display s physical settings Brightness USB Devices Use USB Devices menu to control the Universal Serial Bus USB device plugged into the USB port in the back of the IP Phone TFTP Upgrade Use TFTP Upgrade menu to upgrade the firmware in the IP Phone Preferences Use the Preferences menu to configure individual user preferences Lock Menu Use the Lock menu to prevent unauthorized access to the Local Tools menu Supported features twelve programmable line DN feature keys self labeled four context sensitive soft keys self labeled providing access to a maximum of 9 features Note Functions for the context sensitive soft keys are configured in LD 11 large color touch panel disp
67. IP Phone 1140E If the Device Config file with the Enable BT setting is not received for any reason and the Enable Bluetooth mode is set to Auto then the phone uses the last value received retrieved from persistent memory IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 596 of 630 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology If administrative control is not retrieved the previously received value is used If no value has ever been retrieved then Bluetooth wireless technology is disabled by default If the IP Phone 1140E successfully retrieves the administrative control and enables Bluetooth wireless technology 3 Bluetooth Setup appears in the Preferences menu 5 Configure the IP Phone 1140E with a TFTP Server IP address so the IP Phone can access the TFTP Server 6 Press the Services key twice 7 Press 3 on the dialpad to access the Network Configuration menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the Network Configuration option Press Enter Enter the TFTP IP address in the TFTP IP field 9 Press the Apply amp Reset soft key End of Procedure Table 73 lists the 1140e cfg field names and definitions Table 73 1140e cfg field name definitions Part 1 of 2 Field name Field value Definition FW Section header for firmware download information DOWNLOAD MODE Recommended setting FW is downloaded when the IP Phone s FW version is older than the value in the 1140e cfg file s VERSION field
68. IP Phone 1150E The Local Diagnostics submenu offers the following choices e IP Set amp DHCP Information e 2 Network Diagnostic Tools e 3 Ethernet Statistics e 4 IP Network Statistics e 5 USB Devices Figure 66 Local Diagnostics menu NORTEL 1 IP Set amp DHCP Information 1 IP Set amp DHCP Information Use Procedure 115 to use the IP Set amp DHCP Information tool 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 567 of 630 Procedure 115 Using the IP Set amp DHCP Information tool 1 2 Press the Services key twice Press 2 1 on the dialpad to access the IP Set amp DHCP Information menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the IP Set amp DHCP Information option Press the Select soft key You can press the Return soft key to exit the menu and return to Local Diagnostics submenu The tool displays the following information e Configuration Network data validated MAC address stored DHCP setting Voice VLAN status type of configuration and discovery status Primary Server identification PC Port enabled status e Firmware version and Hardware Identification number e Telephone Set IP address e Network subnet mask e Gateway IP address e EPROM Server S1 and S2 IP addresses ports actions and number of retries e Voice VLAN priority and VLAN ID e DHCP Response String e Server information for S01 S02 S03 and S04 including IP a
69. IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 588 of 630 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu For information about Network Configuration see Procedure 58 on page 327 or Procedure 59 on page 334 Lock Menu You must enter the fixed password whenever the Lock Menu sub menu is accessed Use the dialpad and enter the fixed password 26567 738 color set Note The settings configured in the Lock Menu sub menu override the settings received from the DHCP string The Lock Menu offers the following choices e 1 Manual Secure Lock Menu e 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu e 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu e 4 DHCP Secure Menu e 5 LockNow When options are inactive a black box appears at the beginning of the menu item and replaces the menu option number 1 Manual Secure Local Menu When this option is selected you are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever the Services key is double pressed 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu When this option is selected you are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access the Local Diagnostics and the Network Configuration sub menus 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu When this option is selected the Lock Menu is disabled 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu Page 589 of 630 4 DHCP Secure Mode The IP Phone follows the menu lock configuration received from the Full DHCP string e if SECUREMENU is present y
70. IP address Default 0 No 802 1Q VLAN remains off and initialization continues 1 MA Enter a VLAN ID manually then press OK The following VLAN ID displays Manual Cfg VLAN 1234 Note The VLAN ID is entered asa decimal The VLAN ID is a 12 bit value between 1 and 4094 The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 is configured with 802 1Q VLAN enabled priority 6 and the VLAN ID set to the entered value Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 289 of 630 Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes EAP Enable 0 No 1 Yes Cfg PK 0 No 1 Yes 0 Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full 0 2 Au Enter a VLAN ID automatically This prompt exists to support future implementation of DHCP VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes Default O for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTER if VLAN is not enabled Enter 0 for No since External Application Server is not supported on the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 This prompt exists to support future implementation of External Application Server Default 0 for No You are not prompted to enter Device ID and Password if you select 1 for Yes For more information on EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Default O for No Default 0 for Auto Note You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000 Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 For Succession Release
71. If three Expansion Modules are configured but only one Expansion Module responds the TPS assigns the keys 32 to 67 to the single Expansion Module using the Shift key functionality When a second Expansion Module is detected the TPS changes the key assignments to display across both Expansion Modules Keys on the third Expansion Module are unaccessible If three Expansion Modules are configured in LD 11 but two Expansion Modules respond the TPS assigns keys 32 to 85 to the first two Expansion Modules An error message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration When a third Expansion Module is detected the TPS changes the key assignments to display across all three Expansion Modules Services key operation The Services key is used to access user settings and certain features on the IP Phone When one or more Expansion Modules are attached to the IP Phone the actions of the display diagnostics for the IP Phones DN feature key display area are duplicated for the Expansion Modules IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 490 of 630 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series If an incoming call occurs when in the diagnostic mode the call is answered by pressing the DN feature key handsfree or headset key or by picking up the handset The display area remains in diagnostic mode until either the user exits the diagnostic more or the idle timeout clears
72. Implementation Guide NN43011 501 Display characteristics An IP Phone 2004 has three major display areas e programmable line DN feature key label e information line e soft key label Figure 6 shows the three display areas 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 83 of 630 Figure 5 IP Phone 2004 display areas Programmable line DN feature keys self labeled Soft keys Cleaning the IP Phone display screen Gently wipe the IP Phone display screen with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not use any liquids or powders on the IP Phone Using anything other than a soft dry cloth can contaminate IP Phone components and cause premature failure Programmable line DN feature key label display The feature key label area displays a ten character string for each of the four feature keys Each feature key includes the key label and an icon The icon state can be on off or flashing A telephone icon displays the status of the configured DN Key labels are left aligned for keys on the left side of the screen and right aligned for keys on the right side of the screen IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 84 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Note If a label is longer than ten characters the last ten characters are displayed and the excess characters are deleted from the beginning of the string Information line display An IP Phone 2004 has a three line
73. Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Branch Office is configured Password Admin Note 1 f a call is presented while the user is manipulating an option the IP Phone 1150E rings and the DN key flashes However the screen display is not updated with Caller ID information The programming text is not disturbed Note 2 The user can originate a call using Autodial or Last Number Redial while manipulating an option However the display is not updated with the dialed digits or the Caller ID and Autodial and Last Number Redial intercept the dialpad Local Tools menu Table 53 shows the Local Tools menu Table 53 Local Tools menu Press the Services key twice to access the Local Tools menu The following items appear in the Local Tools menu 1 Preferences 1 Display Settings 2 Languages 3 Bluetooth Setup 2 Local Diagnostics 1 IP Set amp DHCP Information 2 Network Diagnostic Tools 3 Ethernet Statistics 4 P Network Statistics 5 USB Devices 3 Network Configuration 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 439 of 630 Table 53 Local Tools menu 4 Lock Menu 1 Manual Secure Local Menu 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu 4 DHCP Secure Menu 5 Lock Now Note f you are prompted to enter a password when you double press the Services key password protection is enabled For more information about password protection see Local Tools menu password protecti
74. Module package component Table 58 Expansion Module component list Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 Series NTYSO8AAE6 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Page 481 of 630 Configuration Use LD 11 to configure the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series LD 11 Configure the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series Part 1 of 2 Response Description NEW CHG Add new or change existing data 1120 1140 1150 For IP Phone1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E 0 3 lt CR gt Number of attached Expansion Modules 0 Up to three Expansion Modules are supported KEM3 KEM3 CLS must be defined 0 see text gt Key number range expanded to support number of CR Expansion Modules specified by KEM prompt The range on the IP Phone is as follows KEM value KEY range 0 0 31 1 32 49 2 50 67 3 68 85 PAGEOFST Page lt KeyOff PAGEOFST is prompted if one Expansion Modules is set CR specified at the KEM prompt and CR is entered at the KEY prompt This prompt enables you to enter a Page number of 0 or 1 and a Key Offset number from 0 to 17 Once entered the KEY is prompted with the appropriate KEY value filled in CR ends the input IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 482 of 630 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series LD 11 Configure the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series Part 2 of 2 Response Des
75. Network Interface Card NIC or NIC driver The 12050QosSvc does not fill in other fields in the 802 1Q header for example no values are assigned to the VLAN ID field VLAN ID The default VLAN ID value in Windows is 0 This can be overwritten for Network Interface Cards NIC that support 802 1Q The 12050 processes do not assign values to the VLAN ID field This setting is documented with the NIC or the NIC driver The VLAN ID for an application must match the VLAN ID for the PC because the PC has only one IP stack for each NIC A second IP stack is required to assign a specific VLAN ID tag for an application which is different than the PC tag You can use two different IP cards each with different VLAN ID values on asingle PC however this can cause security gaps on the voice VLAN which is normally a more secure network than the data VLAN DiffServ The IP Softphone 2050 uses DSCP settings assigned by the TPS The IP Softphone 2050 supports DSCP on Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Pro and Windows XP Home For information about configuring DiffServ values see ZP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 802 1p For information about configuring 802 1p values see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 221 of 630 Ethereal traces Current versions of Ethereal show 802 1Q headers if they are present
76. PPRGGp UU REAX4d ce 234 Supported AMTES seire ed cpegirPeesc ie pics P ER dE RR edid 2 MVE 2050 components 6s can bade eens lee bev dd EVO Gere 236 MYC 2050 Call Handbng screen 2c odas teh aeree aes 238 PETAR e Cave dpi EIqpeS been EQ RERO GX QAI bode IUE E eed 246 MYC 2050 1819 TADIBULL o iR o EROR EE PEORES EP EN ERA ERA 247 MYC CUS FOIRONVAL us cect eo pepe dpa qp a Ra dx edges 249 Beunilno PP ETT 249 S05 Trend EUIS eod b UR E C IE E CR IIR ES 229 MYC 2030 and WEAN aua aai qaet kb equo eee paco dede 239 Nortel WLAN Handset 2210 WLAN Handset 2211 and WLAN Handset 2212 ee 261 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 263 ONC ost ieee eee e boe auti baud bees ppupbi es 263 Ody tOn Loss uuu sad PER CX Ede Reda ded e dca po ea dod 264 DeScnploll voces G41 G a4 ESTAS SERRE eR qne ORS 264 Extenston miicropbes rrise iri see Ra ER caked beeen dees 266 Components and JUDCHOS i sseiren sena titri tiri eae 266 Supported IedIlles oos ieee E RE Ru Y RE V AAA HER 260 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 12 of 630 Contents Features not currently Supported oc esiccadwsseedase anced RACER 270 Display characteristics oc scceisies ERR EA eos Laneedagecrdes 271 Key number Asst EDDelS 34252845 deen k eee eke eaGeeeedae eee 274 Pockap GOD pDODEDIS a Lus aso deo FAR eR ReeW ides Clawecdees 2195 Installation and ContiguraHoN e s ius whachere khe REESE eiiiai 278 Pull Duplex inodea coc indu
77. Phone 1140E IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 478 of 630 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series e IP Phone 1150E The Expansion Module is a hardware component that connects to the IP Phones and provides additional line appearances and feature keys Up to three Expansion Modules are supported on the IP Phones With three Expansion Modules the IP Phones provide up to 54 additional line feature keys The IP Phone1140E and IP Phone 1150E can also provide up to 36 additional line feature keys using the Shift key functionality and one Expansion Modules With more than one Expansion Modules connected the Shift key functionality does not affect the Expansion Modules since the maximum number of line feature keys is already available Note The IP Phone 1120E does not support Shift key functionality Figure 49 on page 479 shows an IP Phone 1140E with the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series attached 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Features Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Page 479 of 630 Figure 49 IP Phone 1140E with Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series NORTEL E E D C zu cl E The Expansion Module provides the following features e 18 self labeled line programmable feature keys provide up to 36 additional self labeled line programmable feature keys Using the Shift key functionality an IP Phone 1140E for example can have up to 6
78. Phone 2002 for the first time using DHCP Startup sequence 553 3001 368 When an IP Phone 2002 is connected to the network it must perform a startup sequence The elements of the startup sequence include obtaining VLAN ID if supported by the network infrastructure obtaining the IP parameters connecting to the Call Server obtaining a User ID Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 131 of 630 See Table 13 for a summary of the IP parameters and how they are obtained Table 13 IP Phone 2002 IP parameters Parameter Method of Acquisition VLAN ID Manually entered or automatically obtained through DHCP and LLDP IP Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Net Mask Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Default Gateway Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Connect Server IP address port Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Full action and retry count primary DHCP and secondary User ID Node ID Node Password Manually entered for first time configuration Retrieved and TN from local storage on subsequent power cycles Installing the IP Phone 2002 To install the IP Phone 2002 for the first time using manual configuration use Procedure 18 on page 132 To install the IP Phone 2002 for the first time using DHCP see Procedure 19 on page 139 IP Phones Descr
79. Power Classification 2 To use Power over Ethernet where power is delivered over the CAT5 cable the LAN must support Power over Ethernet and an AC adapter is not required To use local AC power the optional AC adapter can be ordered separately You will hear a tone shortly before the IP Phone is ready to start the Nortel IP telephone application 7 A blue screen appears with Nortel Once the set application has loaded and started Nortel Networks will appear in the middle of the screen Immediately press the following keys in sequence a 0 b 0 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 176 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 c 7 d star Note f you miss part of the configuration unplug the phone from the power for a few seconds and redo this step WARNING If you are using local power you must use the Global power adapter or your phone will fail to operate End of Procedure Startup sequence When an IP Phone 2007 is connected to the network it must perform a startup sequence The elements of the startup sequence include e obtaining VLAN ID if supported by the network infrastructure e obtaining the IP parameters connecting to the Call Server obtaining a User ID See Table 19 for a summary of the IP parameters and how they are obtained Table 19 IP Phone 2007 IP parameters Part 1 of 2 Parameter Method of Acquisition VLAN ID Manually entered or automatically obtained through DHCP
80. Press the OK soft key to return to the Ping submenu Procedure 98 Reviewing the results of the Ping 1 Use the Navigation keys to scroll to the Last Ping submenu item 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Use the Navigation keys to scroll through the results 4 Press the Cancel soft key to return to the Ping submenu End of Procedure TraceRoute The following items are available on the TraceRoute submenu in Remote mode IP Addr e Max Nr of Hops e TraceRt e Last TraceRt Procedure 99 Entering an IP address 1 Scroll through the TraceRoute submenu to the IP Addr menu item An IP address appears if previously entered Example 47 249 48 20 Press the Select soft key Use the Navigation keys to scroll to the destination IP address IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 536 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Ifthe destination IP address is in the list press the Select soft key to select the IP address Press the Select soft key again to return to the TraceRoute submenu Ifthe destination IP address is not in the list continue scrolling through the available IP address list until the IP address 0 0 0 0 appears Press the Select soft key Tip To edit the IP address use the Delete soft key and the Cancel Soft key Use the key for dots 4 Pressthe Select soft key to save the new IP address or press the Cancel Soft key to return to the TraceRoute submenu End of Proced
81. S4 addresses for each IP Phone In Local Mode partial information is available UNIStim RUDP statistics In Remote Mode the system administrator can view RUDP statistics for example number of messages sent received retries resets and uptime for the IP Phones RTP RTCP statistics In Remote Mode the system administrator can view RTP RTCP QoS metrics for example packet loss and jitter while a call is in progress Network QoS Process In Remote Mode the system administrator can view QoS statistics for example packets sent packets received packet loss jitter average and jitter maximum and round trip delay Supplicant Status The system administrator uses this option to determine whether 802 1x is enabled or disabled 802 1x 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 529 of 630 Authentication State The system administrator uses this option to determine whether the IP Phone is currently authenticated with the 802 1x system The following are valid state values e LogOff e Disconnected e Connected e Acquired e Authorizing Held e Authorized e Dbl Authd DevicelD The system administrator uses this option to check the user name configured for the device that is sent to the switch for authentication This should match the corresponding entry in the RADIUS Server Authenticator ID The system administrator uses this option to check the MAC address of the
82. Select 1 to enable Full Duplex mode When the Speed option appears select one of the following e Ofor10 Mbps e 1for 100 Mbps default Select OK to confirm the change Restart the IP Phone 2001 The firmware settings are read and are applied to UPLINK and the PC Ethernet Port End of Procedure When the IP Phone is restarted the firmware reads the setting for Full Duplex mode and sets the LAN Ethernet port PC Ethernet port duplex and speed accordingly Use Procedure 5 to confirm activation of Full Duplex mode Procedure 5 Checking Ethernet Statistics 1 2 Double click the Services key The Network Diagnostics menu appears Select Ethernet Statistics e If Full Duplex mode is active the following is displayed Link UP Duplex Full Speed 10 Mb or 100 Mb IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 70 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Auto Negotiate Capability N Auto Negotiate Completed N End of Procedure Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection prevents the IP Phone 2001 from GARP Spoof attacks on the network In a GARP Spoof attack a malicious device on the network takes over an IP address usually the default gateway by sending unsolicited or Gratuitous ARP messages thus manipulating the ARP table of the victim s machine The malicious device launches a variety of attacks on the network resulting in
83. TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 The IP Phone 1110 can support a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 1110 saves the configuration and then reboots The IP Phone 1110 searches for the connect server The IP Phone 1110 registers with the Terminal Proxy Server TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When the download is complete the IP Phone 1110 resets The current Call Server date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Soft key labels also appear 6 Check for dial tone and the correct DN on the display End of Procedure Use Procedure 59 on page 334 to install the IP Phone 1110 for the first time using DHCP IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 334 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Procedure 59 Installing an IP Phone 1110 for the first time using DHCP To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current setting
84. The IP Phone will now retain the value and will use the last value received if no new value is received Use Procedure 125 on page 594 to enable Bluetooth wireless technology on the IP Phone 1140E using the TFTP configuration file 1140e cfg retrieved during bootup Note If Bluetooth wireless technology is enabled on your phone and password protection for the Local Tools menu has been enabled you can still double press the Headset key to access the 3 Bluetooth Setup menu Manual configuration You can enable or disable Bluetooth wireless technology through the Network Configuration menu The Enable Bluetooth option provides administration control over Bluetooth wireless technology The following values are available Auto default Bluetooth wireless technology setting received through TFTP configuration Yes Bluetooth wireless technology is enabled on the IP Phone No Bluetooth wireless technology is disabled on the IP Phone When the IP Phone 1140E firmware is upgraded or when the IP Phone is received from the manufacturer with the latest firmware the default power up 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Page 593 of 630 setting is Auto When the setting is Auto the setting received from the TFTP Device Config file controls whether Bluetooth wireless technology is enabled When the Bluetooth wireless technology setting is Yes or No the value received from the TFTP D
85. VERSION 0625Cxx FW version FILENAME 0625Cxx bin image file name must match the file name of the FW file PROTOCOL TFTP Download protocol must be TFTP 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Page 597 of 630 Table 73 1140e cfg field name definitions Part 2 of 2 Field name Field value Definition SERVER IP XXX XXX XXX XXX IP address of the TFTP server that will download the FILENAME file SECURITY MODE For future use Possible reasons Bluetooth wireless technology remains disabled on the IP Phone after bootup The following are possible reasons Bluetooth wireless technology remains disabled on the IP Phone 1140E after bootup e The TFTP Server is down or is no longer present on the network e Network failure e The DEVICE CONFIG section is missing from the 1140e cfg file or is present but the specified device config file cannot be accessed or it can be accessed but the ENABLE BT line is either missing or is present but the value of 1 is missing Create the DEVICE CONFIG section and file The file pointed to by the DEVICE CONFIG section contains the parameter ENABLE BT The parameter s value is set to 1 which enables Bluetooth wireless technology The DEVICE CONFIG section can point to a single file that enables or disables the Bluetooth wireless technology on all phones or it can point to a device configuration file for specific phones using a wildcard file name t
86. a startup sequence The elements of the startup sequence include e obtaining VLAN ID if supported by the network infrastructure obtaining the IP parameters e connecting to the Call Server obtaining a User ID See Table 43 for a summary of the IP parameters and how they are obtained I Table 43 IP Phone 1120E IP parameters Part 1 of 2 Parameter Method of acquisition VLAN ID Manually entered or automatically obtained through DHCP and LLDP IP Address Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP Net Mask Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP Default Gateway Address Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 372 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Table 43 IP Phone 1120E IP parameters Part 2 of 2 Parameter Method of acquisition Connect Server IP address port Manually entered or automatically obtained through Full action and retry count primary DHCP and secondary User ID Node ID Node Password Manually entered for first time configuration Obtained and TN from local storage on subsequent power cycles Installing the IP Phone 1120E To install the IP Phone 1120E use Procedure 66 Configuring the IP Phone 1120E on page 365 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 373 of 630 Procedure 66 Installing the IP Phone 1120
87. a 15 cm 6 inch RJ 45 cord not provided e Method A Press the wall mount lever and pull away from the stand Using the stand cover see step 1 on page 456 mark the wall mount holes by pressing the bottom of the stand cover firmly against the wall in the location where you wish to install the phone Four small pins on the bottom of the stand cover make the marks on the wall Use the marks as a guideline for installing the wall mount screws not provided Install the screws so that they protrude 3 mm 1 8 inch from the wall and then install the phone stand mounting holes over the screw heads You may need to remove the phone from the wall to adjust the 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 461 of 630 lower screws When the lower screws are snug install the phone on the mounting screws and then tighten the top screws e Method B Attach the 15 cm 6 inch CAT5e cable position the stand over the mounting rivets and slide the phone down the wall so that the rivets fit into the slots on the stand 8 Replace the stand cover Ensure that all cables are neatly routed and press the stand cover into place until you hear a click 9 Putthe phone in the wall mount position optional If you wall mount the phone put it in the wall mount position by holding the Tilt Lever and press the phone towards the base until the phone is parallel with the base Release the Tilt Lever and continue to push the phone to
88. a primary S1 and secondary S1 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Port same as S1 port Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 Action Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Choose one of the following e for TPS only enter 1 e for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Retry Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Retry same as S1 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 PK S2 PK the Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Set the S2 PK to 6 or 1 Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information You must enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The default is ffffffffffffffff Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight VoiceVLAN combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation k
89. a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes in P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 2002 searches for the connect server When the connection is complete proceed with step 6 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 138 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 6 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description Password IP Phone Installer Password You are not prompted to enter the IP Phone Installer Password if it has not been configured in your Call Server Node The node ID TN The TN or VTN The IP Phone 2002 registers with the Terminal Proxy Server TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When download is complete the IP Phone 2002 resets Note The Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The current Call Server date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more information see IP Phone 2002 User Guide End of Pro
90. address e PortID port ID e PacketTx RTP packets sent e Packet Rx RTP packets received e DPacketRx BTR Disorder packets received e PacketLossRx packet loss received xxx e JittAveRx jitter average received xxxxxx e JittMaxRx jitter maximum received xxxxxx e RdTripDelay round trip delay Note Each new call resets the counters Network Address Translation Traversal This section describes the Network Address Translation NAT Traversal feature as it effects IP Phones NAT Traversal is required to permit IP Phones working behind a NAT box to connect and maintain signaling and media paths NAT Traversal is applicable to all UNIStim IP Phone clients and is one ended That is it does not require the other end of a call to support any special protocol and it is interoperable with any other media termination In this document NAT refers to both IP port address mapping and IP address mapping also known as NAPT A NAT can be used with or without a Virtual Private Network VPN The NAT Traversal feature supports only IP clients behind cone NAT types There are three types of cone NAT the full cone restricted cone and the port restricted cone NAT traversal is not compatible with symmetric NATs If the IP Phone is behind a Symmetric NAT the LTPS unregisters the phone from the call server while remaining registered on the LTPS and displays the following message on the IP Phone display Error Symmetric NAT
91. an IP Phone 1150E from service 1 Disconnect the IP Phone 1150E from the network or turn the power off Note The service to the PC is disconnected as well if the PC is connected to the IP Phone 1150E If the IP Phone 1150E was automatically configured the DHCP lease expires and the IP address returns to the available pool 2 InLD 11 enter OUT at the TN prompt End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 476 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 477 of 630 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Contents Description h ua MMPRP T TI MT 477 j pp m 479 Display Characteristies s osce sec merce Rhe RR AUR dee Rs 480 Package components Liu dibpsixPRpA Et RICE ROerA du Scd 480 C oPHEBERDDBE 2 226 esr RO E ERI PeRRP PE TIPPERPEROAEX D ped 481 loci DD RETERUIMTT 482 Expansion Module startup initialization llle lees 486 Operaing pardtiBels 1355 3 peris 4 VP d US I PRIME Edd d 488 IP Phone IL20B 4 owesntberrERA RT ERA RR EN ERR ERG XR 488 IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E 1 ease ace es 488 Serves key OpotallOt ids o5 esis cores oie Perdew REN eee 489 Display diagnosi ox hee the hae eb ee EE Na RR RES 490 DIBL INEO Lauer ee eee eee eee obi edo b db RE eee ee ee 491 3inr i ri PETITES 492 The Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series Expansion Module is supported on the following IP Phones e IP Phone 1120E e IP
92. and highlight Yes to enable LLDP or No to disable LLDP Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight DHCP combo box 8 Press the Down navigation key to open list box 9 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following DHCP options e No 4disable DHCP support and enter IP network information manually e Partial IP network information IP address network mask and gateway address are provided by the DHCP server Enter Server 1 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 179 of 630 IP address Server 2 IP address Port Action Retry and PK numbers manually e Full IP network information Server 1 IP address Server 2 IP address and XAS information are provided by the DHCP server All items are dimmed to prevent manual entry Note A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Set IP Use the dialpad to fill in the information Set IP a valid IP Phone 2007 IP address Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight NET MASK Use the dialpad to fill in the information Network Mask a subnet mask Use the Right navigation key to sc
93. appearance of the text Nortel When you see the text Nortel on the phone you have one s to respond by pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the one s response time the IP Phone 1140E attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the Local diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 Note f you are prompted to enter a password when you double press the Services key password protection is enabled For more information about password protection see Local Tools menu password protection on page 402 1 When the Nortel logo appears in the middle of the display immediately press the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right The 3 Network Configuration menu opens Note You can press the Apply amp Reset soft key to save the following settings and to reset the IP Phone You can press the Exit soft key exit the menu to exit the menu without saving any changes and return to the 3 Network Configuration menu When the 3 Network Configuration menu opens the Enable 802 1x EAP check box is highlighted 2 Pressthe Enter key to toggle this item on and off A check mark appears to indicate the item is active If 802 1x Authentication is enabled press the Enter key
94. are assigned to the soft keys the More key does not appear and all four functions are displayed 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 313 of 630 Information line display An IP Phone 1110 has a one line information display area with the following information e Caller number e Caller name e Feature prompt strings e User entered digits e Date and time information if the IP Phone is in an idle state or Call Timer if provisioned in the Telephone options menu The information in the display area changes according to the call processing state and active features Local Tools menu password protection If the SECUREMENU parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration the Local Tools menu is locked to prevent accidental or unwanted changes You are prompted to enter the fixed password 26567 738 color set whenever the Services key is double pressed or whenever the Local Diagnostics and Network Configuration sub menus are accessed If the PARTSECURE parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration you are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access 2 Local Diagnostics or 3 Network Configuration menu items from the Local Tools menu You are always prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access the 4 Lock Menu sub menu Two ways to control the menu lock are as follows e DHCP Secure Menu option the IP Phone processes the secure menu setting retrieved from the Full D
95. as well as the ADA requirements for the hearing impaired compliance with version 1 1 of the USB Device Specification and Windows Plug amp Play specifications e simple installation using standard Windows drivers requires no additional software or drivers e support on Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Pro and Windows XP Home See the IP Softphone 2050 User Guide for specific operation system information e in use lamp connector with in use control provided by polarity insensitive isolated contact closure e red Message Waiting light located at the top of the USB Headset Adapter that flashes when you have voicemail messages e IP Softphone 2050 Smart Functions button enables the IP Softphone 2050 Smart Functions menu that provides quick access to IP Softphone 2050 features e Mute light that indicates a call is on mute The USB Headset Adapter auto configures in the supported Windows operating system No additional software is required Registration When you add an IP Softphone 2050 to the network depending on configuration the IP Softphone 2050 can connect to a predefined IP address orcan request an IP address from a DHCP server The IP Softphone 2050 then contacts the Connect Server which instructs the IP Softphone 2050 to display a message on its display screen requesting the customer s node number and TN 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 217 of 630 After the customer enters this in
96. base of the IP Phone Use the angle adjustment grip on the top back of the IP Phone to adjust the position Power the IP Phone 2002 using either the Power over Ethernet or an AC power transformer local power If you are using local power plug the AC power transformer into the nearest power outlet Make sure you use the correct AC power transformer is used The voltage rating of the transformer must match the wall outlet voltage See Table 8 IP Phone 2004 component list on page 86 Note The IP Phone 2004 supports both AC power and Power over LAN options including IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 2 To use Power over Ethernet where power is delivered over the CAT5 cable the LAN must support Power over Ethernet and an AC adapter is not required To use local AC power the optional AC adapter can be ordered separately Use Procedure 10 on page 93 to install the IP Phone 2004 for the first time using manual configuration or use Procedure 11 on page 100 to install the IP Phone 2004 for the first time using DHCP End of Procedure Startup sequence When an IP Phone 2004 is connected to the network it must perform a startup sequence The elements of the startup sequence include obtaining VLAN ID if supported by the network infrastructure obtaining the IP parameters connecting to the Call Server obtaining a User ID IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 92 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 See Table 9 for
97. before connecting the Expansion Module CAUTION The Expansion Module is shipped with the base locked in position To avoid damaging the Expansion Module press the wall mount lever located on the base at the front of the Expansion Module 1 Press the wall mount lever to adjust the stand angle on the IP Phone See Figure 50 You can adjust the stand angle to maximum instead of removing the stand See Figure 51 on page 484 Figure 50 Wall mount lever Wall mount lever IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 484 of 630 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Figure 51 Adjusting the stand angle on the IP Phone Tilt lever Accessory Expansion Module port 2 Atthe back of the IP Phone remove the rubber plug from the Accessory Expansion Module AEM port Place the connecting arm of the Expansion Module behind the IP Phone and align the Expansion Module connection plug to the AEM port on the back of the IP Phone 3 Insert the screws in to the top and bottom holes of the connecting arm of the Expansion Module and tighten until snug See Figure 52 on page 485 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Page 485 of 630 Figure 52 Connecting the Expansion Module 4 If connecting a second or a third Expansion Module repeat steps 2 to 4 Note The second Expansion Module is attached to the right side of the first Expansion Module The third Expansion Modu
98. call indicator Bonon Display screen Soft keys self labeled Speaker Navigation keys gri Services key Dialpad Message key LE Goodbye key Hold key Line key Volume control bar Components and functions This section describes the following components and functions of the IP Phone 2001 e Keys and functions e Services menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 42 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Keys and functions Table 2 describes the IP Phone 2001 keys and functions Table 2 IP Phone 2001 keys and functions Speaker Message waiting Incoming call indicator Volume control bar Navigation keys Dial Line key Hold key Soft keys self labeled Message key Goodbye key Function Press the Line key to activate the speaker for on hook dialing and listening The Message waiting lamp turns ON to indicate that a message has been left for the user This lamp also flashes when the set ringer is ON Use the volume control bar to adjust the volume of the Handset Ringer and On hook Dialing Listen tones Press the right side of the rocker bar to increase volume press the left side to decrease volume Use the navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists in the display area Use the Line key to access the single line and activate on hook dialing No status icon or LED is provided Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the Dial Line key to
99. casque sca kasd er qU ERG DER ODER 592 TFIIF Conse ears encre E EP GRIP STEEP EH ERE IE 594 Panne our Reads cos hc ada dyson ERR UE RES daedqddA Nees 598 Bluetooth wireless technology Bluetoothis supported on the IP Phone 1 140E and the IP Phone 1150E The IP Phone 1120E does not support Bluetooth wireless technology Note On the IP Phone 1150E only the Agent port supports Bluetooth wireless technology The IP Phone 1140E and the IP Phone 1150E contain both hardware and software support for Bluetooth wireless technology enabled headsets When the IP Phone powers up Bluetooth wireless technology is disabled and it must be explicitly enabled IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 592 of 630 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology The following methods are available to enable Bluetooth wireless technology on the IP Phone Manual configuration can be used to set the Bluetooth wireless technology mode on the IP Phone on a phone by phone basis If manual configuration is used exclusively a TFTP server is not required to configure Bluetooth wireless technology For further information about manual configuration see Manual configuration on page 592 Use Procedure 124 on page 593 to configure the Bluetooth wireless technology through the Local Tools Network Configuration submenu TFTP configuration can be used to initially set the Bluetooth wireless technology mode then the TFTP Server can be removed
100. cord NTTK18ABE6 NTTK18AB Hong Kong Ireland United Kingdom Singapore Malaysia Bangladesh Brunei Sri Lanka 3 m 9 9 ft 125 VAC Option 11C Denmark power cord NTTK22ABE6 NTTK22AB Denmark Argentina N A A0814961 1 8 m 5 9 ft 10 amp IEC320 C13 NTTK26AAE6 N A Installation and Configuration The following sections provide a step by step guide through the IP Phone 1120E installation and configuration process e Before you begin First time installation e Configuring the IP Phone 1120E 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 407 of 630 e Startup sequence e Installing the IP Phone 1120E Before you begin Before installing the IP Phone 1140E complete the following pre installation checklist e Ensure there is one IP Phone 1140E boxed package for each IP Phone 1140E being installed The package contains IP Phone 1140E handset handset cord 2 1 m 7 ft CATS Ethernet cable Number plate and lens Getting Started Card e Ensure there is one Software License for each IP Phone 1140E being installed e Ensure the host Call Server is equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card or a Signaling Server with the Line TPS application e Ifan AC power adapter is required ensure the approved Nortel global power supply model N0089601 is used See Table 47 IP Phone 1140E component list on page 405 First time installation You must first install an IP telephony node w
101. display in sequence from left to right 2 Atthe prompt DHCP ves NO enter O 0 for No IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 286 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments e Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 3 Enterthe following information Screen prompt Description set IP a valid IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 IP address net msk a subnet mask def gw the default Gateway for the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 on the LAN segment to which it is connected 4 Enterthe information for the primary Connect Server 81 and the secondary Connect Server S2 Screen prompt Description S1 IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 S1 Port This is a fixed value 4100 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00
102. edit mode IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 382 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E 8 Press the Apply amp Reset soft key to save the changes and to restart the IP Phone 1120E The firmware settings are read and are applied to UPLINK and the PC Ethernet Port End of Procedure When the IP Phone is restarted the firmware reads the setting for Full Duplex mode and sets the LAN Ethernet port PC Ethernet port duplex and speed accordingly Use Procedure 68 to confirm activation of Full Duplex mode Procedure 68 Checking Ethernet Statistics 1 Double press the Services key 2 Press2to select Local Diagnostics then press 3 to open the Ethernet Statistics menu If Full Duplex mode is active the following is displayed e LinkStatus UP e Duplex Mode Full e Network Speed 10 Mb 100 Mb or 1G e Auto Sense Negotiate Auto Negotiate Capability No Auto Negotiate Completed No End of Procedure TFTP firmware upgrade When you enter Cfg TFTP 1 for yes and enter an IP address the phone searches for an upgrade file on the TFTP Server Note Users of CS 1000 Release 4 5 or later do not need to enter a TFTP IP address 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 383 of 630 For further information about TFTP firmware upgrade see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection Gratuitous Address Resolution Protoc
103. example Caller ID and instructions for using certain soft key features In the idle state only the date and time are displayed Four additional soft labeled keys on the IP Softphone 2050 support a specific subset of the key features Click the Answer key to answer and make calls Click the Hold key to place an active call on hold The feature key label for the line placed on hold displays a flashing icon Click the Line key to return to the call Click the Release key to end an active call Six programmable line keys represent line appearances DNs or features Use the volume keys to increase or decrease the headset volume Click the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Click the Mute key to return to a two way conversation The Mute key mutes the headset microphone IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 212 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Table 22 Call Control window elements and functions Part 2 of 3 Directory Click the Directory key to access the Network Directory Inbox Message Click the Inbox Message key to access messages or return a call Shift Outbox Press the Shift key to shift between two feature key pages when a second feature key page exists Click the Copy key to copy a network service feature or folder Click the Quit key to quit a network service or feature Navigation arrows Use the navigation arrows to scroll through menus and lists in
104. highlight the XAS IP combo box Use the dialpad to enter the XAS IP address The XAS delivers business applications to the IP Phone For more information about XAS see Nortel Application Gateway 1000 documentation If the XAS supports graphical displays use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Graphical XAS check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port combo box Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Upgrade the IP Phone 1120E firmware The IP Phone 1120E supports remote firmware upgrades through a TFTP process and an automated UFTP process The method to upgrade the firmware depends on the following Call Server software e For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 the TFTP Server is required to download the current firmware Enter the TFTP Server IP address at the prompt e For CS 1000 Release 4 5 and later use either a TFTP Server to upgrade the firmware at the prompt accept the default entry of 0 0 0 0 or UFTP to download the current firmware For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 380 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E 42 43 For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 the IP Phone 1120E searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If
105. information about Settings see Settings on page 242 Server The Server tab accessible from the Settings screen contains all the settings necessary for MVC 2050 to contact a server On the Server tab you can perform the following change the settings on the Server tab to access a different server e implement the profile containing the desired server IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 252 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 For more information about Profiles see Profiles on page 255 Connection history Connection history writes connection and disconnection indication messages to the registry key HKCU Software Nortel MVC2050 Log This is a circular queue of 29 entries Each time a connection or disconnection event occurs a log entry containing a date time and a description of the connection or disconnection event is written The descriptions of the connection and disconnection events are as follows e Soft reset server n e Server connected e Recovering Server unreachable Hard reset Soft reset server n Server n indicates that the server has instructed MVC 2050 to reset and connect to a server n where n and its value are determined and possibly written by the server This message maps directly to a UNIStim message Server connected Server connected indicates that MVC 2050 has successfully connected to the server MVC 2050 received the Assign TerminalID UNIStim message w
106. information display area with the following information e caller number e caller name e feature prompt strings user entered digits e date and time information if the IP Phone is in an idle state or Call Timer if provisioned in the Telephone options menu The information in the display area changes according to the call processing state and active features Soft key label display The soft key label has a maximum six characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a triangle icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a feature is enabled the icon state turns to On It remains in the on state until the feature key is pressed again This cancels the enabled feature and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state Use the More soft key to navigate through the layers of functions If there are only four functions assigned to the soft keys the More key does not appear and all four functions are displayed Key number assignments A maximum of nine functions can be assigned to the four soft labeled predefined soft keys Because they are pre defined the user cannot change 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 85 of 630 the key number assignment Functions are assigned to the s
107. installed and powered up on your IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 the IP Phone KEM initializes see Table 21 Table 21 Startup initialization process for the IP Phone KEM Phase Description 1 IP Phone KEM performs The self test confirms the operation of the IP Phone KEM s local self test memory CPU and other circuitry While undergoing this self test the IP Phone KEM display lights up Note f the IP Phone KEM display does not light up or lights up and then goes blank or fails to begin flashing check that the IP Phone KEM is correctly installed and configured 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Page 201 of 630 Table 21 Startup initialization process for the IP Phone KEM 2 IP Phone KEM The IP Phone KEM display flashes until it establishes establishes communication communication with the IP Phone Witte EE nene If the IP Phone KEM display does not stop flashing communication has not been established with the IP Phone Check that the IP Phone KEM is correctly installed and configured 3 IP Phone KEM The key labels download to the IP Phone KEM During the downloads keymaps download the display is blank When the three phases complete successfully you are ready to use the additional line feature keys on your IP Phone KEM Note If you have a second IP Phone KEM installed on your IP Phone the one to the immediate right of the IP Phone must be functional for
108. is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch will result If the IP Phone is connected to a network configured for Full Duplex mode only the IP Phone cannot automatically negotiate the proper configuration Therefore in this instance to allow the IP Phone to work at the optimum speed and duplex mode Full Duplex mode must be enabled Use Procedure 81 to enable Full Duplex mode Procedure 81 Enabling Full Duplex mode 1 Double press the Services key to open the Local Tools menu 2 Press 3 on the dialpad to access the Network Configuration menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the Network Configuration option 3 Usethe Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the Duplex combo box Press Enter to start the edit mode 5 Press the Down navigation key to open list box IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 472 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E 6 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e 10BT Full 10 BT Full Duplex mode e 100BT Full 100 BT Full Duplex mode 7 Press Enter to exit the edit mode 8 Press the Apply amp Reset soft key to save the changes and to restart the IP Phone 1150E The firmware settings are read and are applied to UPLINK and the PC Ethernet Port End of Procedure When the IP Phone is restarted the firmware reads the setting for Full Duplex mode and sets the LAN Ethernet port P
109. key labels e Corporate Directory e Personal Directory e Redial List e Callers List e Password Administration e Virtual Office e Branch Office e Active Call Failover Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download The IP Phone 1120E supports the following data network features e integrated gigabit Ethernet switch for shared PC access LAN Ethernet port supports 10 100 1000 Mbps Full Duplex mode PC Ethernet port supports 10 100 1000 Mbps Full Duplex mode e automatic network configuration through DHCP For more information about automatic network configuration see Table 43 IP Phone 1120E IP parameters on page 371 e 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 lab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 e Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP media encryption For more information about SRTP media encryption Features overview on page 493 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 355 of 630 802 1Q VLAN and 802 1p priority support industry standards for managing bandwidth usage full VLAN capability including a manageable integrated switch in the IP Phone allows VLAN and priority tagging for the IP Phone traffic and VLAN tagging for PC traffic VLAN filtering which allows the IP Phone to only see Voice VLAN traffic The integrated switch will pass DATA VLAN traffic to the PC Ethernet port This prevents the Data
110. labels A steady LCD light beside a line DN key indicates the feature or line is active A flashing LCD indicates the line is on hold or the feature is being programmed Context sensitive Context sensitive soft keys are located below the display area The LCD soft keys label above the key changes based on the active feature Note Atriangle before a key label indicates that the key is active Fixed feature keys Use these keys to access non programmable features Expand The Expand key is used to access external server applications such as External Application Server IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 434 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Table 49 IP Phone 1150E keys and functions Part 2 of 3 Function Navigation keys Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen The outer part of this key cluster rocks for up down left and right movements Use Up and Down keys to scroll up and down in lists and the Left and Right keys to position the cursor You can also use the Left and Right keys to select editable fields that appear on the phone Press the Right key to select the field below the current position or press the Left key to select the field above the current position Press the Enter key at the center of the Navigation key cluster to confirm menu selections In many cases you can use the Enter key instead of the Select soft key Message Inbox Press
111. lever Link lamp AC adapter jack Headset jack USB connector Handset jack IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 412 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E 5 Figure 41 Cable routing tracks Method A Install the handset Connect the end of the handset cable with the short straight section into the handset Connect the end of the handset cable with the long straight section to the back of the phone using the RJ 9 handset jack marked with the symbol Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the handset cord through the channels in the stand so that it exits behind the handset on the right side in the channel exit in the stand base marked with the symbol See Figure 41 Method B Install the headset optional If you are installing a headset plug the connector into the RJ 9 headset jack marked with the symbol on the back of the phone and thread the headset cord along with the handset cord through the channels in the stand so that the headset cord exits the channel marked with the symbol 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 10 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 413 of 630 Install the Ethernet cable Connect one end of the supplied Ethernet cable to the back of your phone using the RJ 45 connect marked with the symbol and thread the network cable through the channel marked with If you are connecting your PC through the phone you w
112. line is active A flashing LCD indicates the line is on hold or the feature is being programmed Soft keys self labeled are located below the display area The LCD label above the key changes based on the active feature Note Atriangle before a key label indicates that the key is active Use these keys to access non programmable standard features The Expand to PC key is used to access external server applications such as External Application Server A fixed key reserved for future feature development An audible non working tone is generated along with a display message Use the navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists in the display area Press the Shift key to toggle between two feature key pages and access an additional six lines features Press the Message Inbox key to access your voice mailbox 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 6 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 77 of 630 IP Phone 2004 keys and functions Part 2 of 2 Directory Mute Headset Volume control bar Handsfree key Function Press the Quit key to end an active application Pressing the Quit key does not affect the status of the calls currently on your IP Phone Press the Directory key to access Directory services Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to a two way conversation The Mute key applies to Handsfree Handset and Headset micropho
113. menu to exit the menu without saving any changes and return to the 3 Network Configuration menu When the 3 Network Configuration menu opens the Enable 802 1x EAP check box is highlighted 2 Pressthe Enter key to toggle this item on and off A check mark appears to indicate the item is active If 802 1x Authentication is enabled press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the following information Device ID e Password e Retype password IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 464 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E o 0 n 10 For further information about 802 1x Authentication Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Note f you do not enable 802 1x Authentication you will not be prompted to enter Device ID and Password Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Enable 802 1x LLDP Enable check box For information about 802 1x Authentication see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight DHCP combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open list box Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following DHCP options e No disable DHCP support and enter IP network information manually e Partial IP network information IP address network mask and gateway address are prov
114. more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 Connect the IP Phone 2002 components a Connect one end of the handset cord to the handset jack on the back of the IP Phone identified with a handset icon b Connectthe other end of the handset cord to the handset Choose one of the following connections e For an IP Phone not sharing LAN access with a PC Connect one end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable to the network interface located on the back of the IP Phone identified with a LAN icon see 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 129 of 630 Figure 9 on page 129 The other end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable plugs into the IP network e For an IP Phone sharing LAN access with a PC Connect one end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable to the network interface located on the back of the IP Phone identified with a LAN icon see Figure 9 on page 129 and the other end to the IP network Insert on end of a second CAT5 Ethernet cable into the PC network interface located on the back of the IP Phone identified with a PC icon see Figure 9 on page 129 and the other end into the computer CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug any device into your IP Phone 2002 Ethernet port other than one PC The IP Phone 2002 does not support multiple devices connected through the PC Ethernet port Figure 9 IP Phone 2002 Ethernet network interface connections AC Adapter jack LAN Ethernet po
115. not currently supported ico ceeciacears FOS EE RE RS 159 TOUCH PAGE iiu ocaxeethxetbIabe RA REDE ESOS RES REN Vb REIS 159 Dialpad enti ici couidsn sire ubresnkpe qe pi jaken i AREA 159 Cleamag the IP Phone display screen ois eos sae wr EPA dees 161 Display characteristics a s oacos sex Ret RR EX PCR acc Rees 161 Local Tools menu password protection 00 00 00 165 Key number Bees 64 4 pido opero rere REPE EY RIF 167 Package componellfe ioo o ehe RR Rep IER 168 Installation and Configuration 0 00 00 cece ee eee eee 169 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 10 of 630 Contents Pull Duplek 2D008 iicoadecbRrECRER SP ewate ga bec aweeda ace 182 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 184 Extensible Authentication Protocol 1222s ise kine caves bake 184 Reinstalling an IP Phone 2007 esis ce ccencduroecewensaweranss 185 Replacing an IP Phone 2000 254 ks tapoERSE RO EROR iite titr A E kee 186 Removing an IP Phone 2007 from service 004 186 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM 189 mon e CEU 189 DaseripBol a ssa somtorediexnrbperiepgqe pirdqupbriPad peque 189 zcnDD PLC P P rrrr 190 Display characteristics i305 Gods 4c Xu RRE TIMORE RU REX eb RES RA 191 Key number aESLEDIBEHIS s csccncceguriean PR RRAFEFQXU PIG ped 191 Packape componeDIs csecre ad crexxa Eques pir Re RR Rede 191 Conrritloli oes ov a CRRRN CERRAR KREBS R d dre Res
116. number for approximately five seconds If the node password is enabled and NULL choose one of the following a Disable the password b Setthe password as non NULL Press OK when the node number displays If Then the node password is enabled and a password screen displays Go to is not NULL step 4 the node password is disabled a TN screen displays Go to step 5 Enter the password at the password screen and press OK A TN screen displays Note To obtain the password enter the nodePwdShow command in Element Manager For further information see Communication Server 1000 Element Manager System Administration B53 3001 332 Select the Clear soft key to clear the existing TN Enter the new TN End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 475 of 630 Replacing an IP Phone 1150E IMPORTANT Two IP Phones cannot share the same TN You must remove the IP Phone 1150E that is currently using the TN Procedure 84 Replacing an IP Phone 1150E 1 Obtain the node and TN information of the phone you want to replace 2 Disconnect the IP Phone 1150E that you want to replace 3 Follow Procedure 79 on page 454 to install and configure the IP Phone 1150E 4 Enter the same TN and Node Number as the IP Phone 1150E you replaced The system associates the new IP Phone 1150E with the existing TN End of Procedure Removing an IP Phone 1150E from service Procedure 85 Removing
117. number of Power over Ethernet options including support for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 Table 47 lists the IP Phone 1140E package components and product codes Table 47 IP Phone 1140E component list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 1140E package contents includes P Phone 1140E handset handset cord e 2 1 m 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Number plate and lens Getting Started Card RoHS Non RoHS IP Phone 1140E with icon keycaps Graphite NTYSOBACE6 NTYSO5AC IP Phone 1140E with English keycaps Graphite NTYSOS5BBE6 NTYSO5BC Replacement parts Handset Charcoal NTYS09AA70 Handset cord Charcoal NTYS10AA70 Footstand kit Charcoal NTYS11AA70 Phone number label and lens kit NTYS12AA 2 1 m 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable NTYS13AA IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 406 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Table 47 IP Phone 1140E component list Part 2 of 2 Power adapter Japan Global power supply N0089601 IEC cable 1 8 m 5 9 ft 10 amp IEC320 C13 NTYS14AAE6 NTYS14AA North America 2 4 m 8 ft 240 VAC 10 amp ANZ power cord AS 3 N A NTTK15AA Australia New Zealand 250 VAC Option 11C Standard European power cord NTTK16ABE6 NTTK16AB Other EMEA Kenya Korea Thailand Indonesia Vietnam India Pakistan 3 m 9 9 ft 125 VAC Option 11C Swiss power cord NTTK17ABE6 NTTK17AB Switzerland 240 VAC Option 11C UK power
118. of 630 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Procedure 128 Unpairing a wireless headset 1 Double press the Headset key to open the 3 Bluetooth Setup dialog box 2 Pressthe Right navigation key to select the Paired item 3 Choose one of the following e If your headset is displayed in the Paired combo box proceed to step 4 e f more than one device is paired and your headset is not already displayed in the Paired combo box do the following Press the Right navigation key one or more times to highlight the Paired combo box Press the Enter key to open edit mode Press the Up Down navigation keys to open the list Press the Up Down navigations key to scroll in the list and highlight your headset Press the Enter key to select the headset and close the box Press the Enter key to exit edit mode 4 Pressthe Right navigation key one or more times to highlight the UnPair button next to the UnPair Device item 5 Press the Enter key Your Bluetooth wireless technology headset is unpaired and removed from the Paired item list 6 Press the Exit soft key to exit to the main display Note Your Bluetooth wireless technology headset is no longer paired with your phone and the wired headset can be used To use the Bluetooth wireless technology headset again you must perform the pairing and activation procedure End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 605 of 630 Appendix H TFTP S
119. of the following e Press the OK soft key to return to the Diagnostics submenu e Use the Navigation keys to browse the data See Figure 62 on page 550 e Press the Cancel soft key to return to the Diagnostics submenu End of Procedure Procedure 104 Checking 802 1x Supplicant status 1 2 3 Select EtherStats from the Diagnostics submenu Scroll through the EtherStats menu and select Supplicant Status Press the Select soft key IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 538 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities 4 5 Do one of the following e Press the OK soft key to return to the EtherStats submenu e Use the Navigation keys to browse the data Press the Cancel softkey to return to the EtherStats submenu End of Procedure Procedure 105 Checking 802 1x Supplicant Authentication state 1 2 3 4 5 Select EtherStats from the Diagnostics submenu Scroll through the EtherStats menu and select Authentication State Press the Select soft key Do one of the following Press the OK soft key to return to the EtherStats submenu e Use the Navigation keys to browse the data Press the Cancel softkey to return to the EtherStats submenu End of Procedure Procedure 106 Checking Device ID 1 1 2 Select EtherStats from the Diagnostics submenu Scroll through the EtherStats menu and select Device ID Press the Select soft key Do one of the following e Press the OK soft key t
120. or IP Softphone 2050 Preferred Name Match and Idle Set Display new call indication are supported e Corporate Directory e Callers List e Redial List Personal Directory e Automatic Call Distribution e P Key Expansion Modules e Support of accessory modules e Live Dialpad e Group Listening e Set to Set messaging e Context sensitive soft keys e Headset support e External Applications Server Display characteristics The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 has two display areas e information line display e Soft key label display Figure 20 on page 274 shows the two display areas IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 274 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Figure 20 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 display areas Local Directory Number Date Time Display Call Party information Feature Status information Soft key labels Soft keys self labeled Cleaning the IP Phone display screen Gently wipe the IP Phone display screen with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not use any liquids or powders on the IP Phone Using anything other than a soft dry cloth can contaminate IP Phone components and cause premature failure Information line display The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 has a one line information display area with the following information Caller number Caller name e Feature prompt strings e User entered digits 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel
121. page 321 mark the wall mount holes by pressing the bottom of the stand cover firmly against the wall in the location where you wish to install the phone Four small pins on the bottom of the stand cover make the marks on the wall Use the marks as a guideline for installing the wall mount screws not provided Install the screws so that they protrude 3 mm 1 8 inch from the wall and then install the phone stand mounting holes over the screw heads You may need to remove the phone from the wall to adjust the lower screws When the lower screws are snug install the phone on the mounting screws and then tighten the top screws e Method B Attach the 15 cm 6 inch CAT5 cable not provided position the stand over the mounting rivets and slide the phone down the wall so that the rivets fit into the slots on the stand 9 Replace the stand cover Ensure that all cables are neatly routed and press the stand cover into place until you hear a click IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 326 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 10 If you wall mount the phone put it in the wall mount position by holding the Tilt Lever and press the phone towards the base until the phone is parallel with the base Release the Tilt Lever and continue to push the phone towards the base until you hear an audible click Ensure the phone is securely locked into position 11 Connect additional cables Connect the Ethernet cable to the LAN Ethernet conne
122. page 493 802 1Q VLAN and 802 1p priority support industry standards for managing bandwidth usage VLAN filtering which allows the IP Phone to only see Voice VLAN traffic The integrated switch will pass DATA VLAN traffic to the PC Ethernet port This prevents the Data VLAN broadcast traffic from reaching the IP Phone For more information see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 and Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 802 1x Port based network access control industry standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP over a LAN For more information about 802 1x port based network access control see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 integrated hardware to support Power over Ethernet PoE for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 2 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection The IP Phone 2001 supports the following languages English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Japanese Russian Latvian Turkish IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 46 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Features not currently supported The following features are not supported on the IP Phone 2001 e External three port switch to support sharing LAN access with a PC or other data device is not provided However the IP Phone 2001 does provide 100 M
123. port based network access control see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 integrated hardware to support Power over Ethernet PoE for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 2 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection The IP Phone 1110 supports the following user interface features Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC as per FCC Part 68 language support English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Russian Latvian Turkish and Katakana 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 311 of 630 Note In the case of the prompts locally generated by the phone for the Local Tools menu and in all local features the language is controlled locally by the phone Thus the two language selection mechanisms on the phone are one for local features which is selected in the Local Tools menu and another for Terminal Proxy Server TPS features which is selected in the Telephone Options menu For information about selecting the languages for local features and TPS features see the ZP Phone 1110 User Guide Features not supported The following features are not supported on the IP Phone 1110 Live Dialpad Group Listening Set to Set messaging Headset Callers List Redial List Personal Directory Corporate Directory Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 Series Call status indicato
124. prompt enables the system administrator to enter a KEM number of 1 or 2 and a Key Offset number from 0 23 Once entered the KEY prompt is prompted with the appropriate KEY value filled in Enter CR to terminate data entry When values are entered for KEM and KeyOffset the KEY xx prompt displays followed by KEMOFST prompt This loop continues until no values CR only are entered at the KEMOFST prompt Note 1 Applies to an IP Phone 2002 if CR was entered at the KEY prompt Note 2 Applies to an IP Phone 2004 with KEM 2 and where CR was entered at the KEY prompt Edit the IP Phone KEM key number specified by KEMOFST where xx the number of the key for example KEY 36 Enter CR to keep the current setting Installation The IP Phone KEM mounts on the right side of an IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 The IP Phone KEM snaps into the receptacle on the back of the IP Phone using the desk mount bracket and structural baseplate supplied with the IP Phone KEM see Figure 15 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Page 199 of 630 The IP Phone KEM connects to the IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 using the Accessory Expansion Module AEM port on the IP Phone Figure 15 IP Phone KEM attached to an IP Phone 2002 Procedure 32 Connecting the IP Phone KEM to an IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 Use the following instructions to install an IP Phone KEM 1
125. provides the following information TN TN ID MAC address IP address LTPS IP address Manufacturer code Model NT code Color code Release code Serial number Firmware Software version Note For an IP Phone behind a NAT the IP address is composed of the public address followed by the private address in parentheses see Table 69 on page 558 For an IP Phone without a NAT the IP address is the signaling IP address of the IP Phone as seen by the LTPS see Table 70 on page 558 For detailed information see Software Input Output Maintenance 553 3001 511 Table 69 and Table 70 on page 558 provide the output format of the IDU commands in LD 32 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Table 69 provides the output format of the IDU commands in LD 32 for an Page 558 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities IP Phone with a NAT Table 69 IDU command printout in LD 32 for IP Phone with a NAT Item Description ISET TN Iscu TN ID CODE i2001 i2002 i2004 or i2050 ISET MAC ADR XX XX XX XX XX XX ISET IP ADR XX X X XXX XXXX XXX XXX X XX LTPS IP ADR XX XX XXX XX MANUFACTURER CODE NAME MODEL NT CODE XXXXXXXX COLOR CODE XX RLS CODE x SER NUM XXXXXX FW SW VERSION XXXXXXX Table 70 provides the output format of the IDU commands in LD 32 for an IP Phone without a NAT Table 70 IDU command printout in LD 32 for IP Phone without a NAT Part 1 of 2
126. return to the caller on hold Soft keys self labeled are located below the display area The LCD label above the key changes based on the active feature Note Atriangle before a key label indicates that the key is active Press the Message key to access your voicemail box Press the Goodbye key to terminate an active call 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 43 of 630 Services menu Table 3 shows the Services menu Table 3 Services menu Part 1 of 2 Services key Press the Services key to access the following items Telephone Options see Notes 1 and 2 Volume adjustment Contrast adjustment Language Date Time Local DialPad Tone Set Info Diagnostics Ring type Call Timer Password Admin Station Control Password Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Branch Office is configured Press the Services key to exit from any menu or menu item Note 1 Double press the Services key to access Network diagnostic utilities For more information on Network diagnostic utilities see Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 44 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Table 3 Services menu Part 2 of 2 Note 1 f a call is presented while the user is manipulating information the phone rings However the scree
127. running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Press the Enter key Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight SET IP Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Set IP a valid IP Phone 1140E IP address Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight NET MASK Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 418 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Net Mask a subnet mask Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Gateway Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Gateway the default gateway for the IP Phone 1140E on the LAN segment to which it is connected Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 IP Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information 1 IP the primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1140E Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port 1 Port a fixed value of 4100 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 Action Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Choose one of
128. sequence include e obtaining VLAN ID if supported by the network infrastructure obtaining the IP parameters e connecting to the Call Server e obtaining a User ID IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 284 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 See Table 33 for a summary of the IP parameters and how they are obtained Table 33 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 IP parameters Parameter Method of Acquisition VLAN ID Manually entered or automatically obtained through DHCP IP Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Net Mask Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Default Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Connect Server IP address port Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Full action and retry count primary DHCP and secondary User ID Node ID Node Password Manually entered for first time configuration Retrieved and TN from local storage on subsequent power cycles Installing the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 To install the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 use Procedure 49 Installing the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 for the first time using manual configuration on page 285 or Procedure 50 Installing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 for the first time using DHCP on page 291 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Con
129. the key number assignment Functions are assigned to the soft keys in layers in LD 11 The Message Indication key is assigned to key 16 Keys numbered 17 to 31 are the soft keys below the display area Key numbers 17 to 31 support A03 A06 CFW CHG CPN PRK PRS RGA RNP SCC SCU SSC SSU and TRN See Appendix Appendix I IP Phone soft keys on page 619 for a description of the IP Phone feature assignment for each of the dedicated keys 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 277 of 630 Package components Table 30 lists the components for the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 for the Americas Asia Pacific and Greater China region Table 30 Components list for US CA CALA AP and GC IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 charcoal NTEXTTAAZ9 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Power Interface Module PIM with 25 ft console cable IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card Universal power supply IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 charcoal METERNE AKI 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Power over Ethernet PoE Module with 25 ft console cable IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card 2 Extension microphones charcoal Universal power supply IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 charcoal NIEASHIERID 7 ft
130. the EtherStats submenu item Figure 62 Ethernet statistics data display screen Link UP Down 2 Duplex Full Half 3 Speed xxx MB 4 Auto Sense Negotiate Auto Nego Capability Y N Auto Nego Completed Y N 5 VLANPriority xxx 6 VLANID xxxx 7 PktColl xxxxxxxxxx 8 CRCErrors XXXXXXXXXX 9 FrameErrors XXXXXXXXXX In Figure 62 Duplex duplex mode Speed network speed 10MB 100MB Auto Sense Negotiate Auto Negotiate Protocol Received or Not Y Yes N No VLANPriority IP Phone VLAN priority VLANID IP Phone VLAN ID PCollision network packet collision peg counts CRCErrors network CRC errors peg counts FrameErrors network Framing errors peg counts Note In the IP Phone Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup If the telephone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate it selects the best speed and duplex mode available For more information see the applicable IP Phone section 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 551 of 630 IP Networking Statistics Figure 63 illustrates the data displayed from the IP Stats submenu item Figure 63 IP Networking statistics data display screen Packet TX xxxxxxxxxx Packet Rx XXXXXXXXXX BcastPktRx xxxxxxxxxx McastPktRx XXXXXXXXXX InPktDisc XXXXXXXXXX OutPktDisc XXXXXXXXXX UnknownPkts XXXXXXXXXX ICMPTypeCode xxx xxx 2 3
131. the Up Down navigation keys to scroll down through the IP addresses IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 570 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities 5 The number of repetitions of the Ping command is shown in the top bar of the screen The default is 4 To change the number of repetitions use the arrow keys to select the number and enter a new value using the dialpad 6 The number of hops for the Tracert command is shown in the top bar of the screen The default is 30 To change the number of hops use the arrow keys to select the number and enter a new value using the dialpad 7 Pressthe Ping soft key to have the telephone attempt to access the IP address up to the number of times shown on the top of the screen The IP Phone displays the following Pinging x x x x with 64 bytes where x x x x is the IP address chosen in step 4 on page 569 The Return soft key changes to Stop and the other soft keys become blank The IP Phone attempts to contact ping the address the number of configured times and displays the results of each attempt 8 Tostop the ping before completing tap the Stop soft key The Stop soft key becomes the Return soft key The results of ping are displayed as follows e Packets transmitted Tx e Packets received Rx e Percentage of Packets Lost Lost e Minimum round trip time Min e Maximum round trip time Max e Average round trip time Avg 9 Press the Tra
132. the configured number of server hopes displaying the hop number starting at 0 the time in milliseconds and the IP address When the trace is complete the screen displays the following IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 562 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Trace complete 10 To stop Tracert before it completes tap the Stop soft key The Stop soft key becomes the Exit soft key when Tracert stops 11 Tap the Exit soft key to return to the Local Diagnostics menu End of Procedure Procedure 112 Using Ethernet Statistics tool 1 Tap the Tools icon 2 Tapthe Local Diagnostics menu entry 3 Tapthe Ethernet Statistics soft key The tool displays Reset NIPort and EXIT soft keys and the statistics for the Network Interface Port NIPort The following statistics are displayed e LinkStatus e Duplex Mode e Network Speed e AutoSense Negotiate Capability e AutoSense Negotiate Completed e Port VLAN Priority e Port VLAN ID e Packet Collision e CRC Error count Frame Error count 4 Toresetthe NIPort counters to 0 tap the Reset soft key 5 Tap the NIPort soft key 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 563 of 630 The NiPort soft key changes to the PCPort soft key and the tool displays the statistics for the Personal Computer port PCPort The following statistics are displayed e Link Status e Duplex Mode e Network Sp
133. the dialpad to fill in the information 1 IP the primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1150E Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port S1 Port a fixed value of 4100 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 Action Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Choose one of the following e for TPS only enter 1 e for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Retry Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Retry the number of times the IP Phone 1150E attempts to connect to the server Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 PK S1 PK the Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information You must enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The default is ffffffffffffffff Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 IP Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use th
134. the file name specified in 1120e cfg is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone 1120E reboots Note The Enhanced UNIStim firmware download is only supported on CS 1000 Release 4 5 or later The Enhanced UNIStim firmware download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 1120E searches for the connect server When the connection is complete proceed with step 42 The IP Phone 1120E registers with the Terminal Proxy Server TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When download is complete the IP Phone 1120E resets The current Call Server date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN on the display Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more information see IP Phone 1120E User Guide NN431 12 103 End of Procedure Full Duplex mode In the Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup Typically the IP Phone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate and it selects the best speed and duplex mode ava
135. the following e Ifthe headset is successfully paired with your phone proceed to step 10 To verify that the pairing was successful ensure that the headset appears in the list next to the Paired item If pairing is successful the message Pair completed also appears at the bottom of the screen e Ifthe headset is not successfully paired with your phone an error message appears at the bottom of the screen If an error message appears Confirm that the wireless headset is still in search pair mode For example on the GN Netcom GN 6210 headset the blue LED should still be lighted when the pairing operation starts 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Page 601 of 630 Ifthe headset timed out and exited search pairing mode put the headset in pairing mode as discussed in step 4 and repeat step 8 Check that you are using the correct PIN and repeat step 8 10 Choose one of the following e fyourheadsetis displayed as the first item in the Paired combo box proceed to step 11 e f more than one device is paired you may need to navigate to the one you want as follows Press the Right navigation key one or more times to highlight the item in the Paired combo box Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Press the Up Down navigation keys to open the list Press the Up Down navigations key to scroll in the list and highlight your headset Press the E
136. the following e for TPS only enter 1 e for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Retry Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Retry the number of times the IP Phone 1140E attempts to connect to the server Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 PK S1 PK the Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information You must enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The default is ffffffffffffffff Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 IP Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 419 of 630 S2 IP the secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1140E Note The IP Phone 1140E can support a primary S1 and secondary S1 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multipl
137. to minimize a change in rate for arriving voice frames The jitter buffer sends voice frames to the PDA sound system at a fixed rate 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 259 of 630 The rate of arrival of voice frames is variable The value of jitter is the normal number of voice frames the application should have in its jitter buffer Codec MVC 2050 supports G 711 which provides higher audio quality with no compression Frame Size MVC 2050 supports G 711 64 A law and U law with 10 ms to 960 ms frame sizes in 10 ms increments Optimum and recommended payload is established as 30 ms frame size Listener IP Use the Listener IP screen to override the port assignments when there is a conflicting application on the PDA See Table 27 for information about selections available on the Listener IP screen Table 27 Listener IP screen Selection Description Use a specific address MVC 2050 normally listens to all IP addresses on the device for communication server to terminal UNIStim messaging on all the network interface cards on the device This is the default mode of operation To override this behavior select the check box and enter a specific IP address Use a specific port MVC 2050 listens to IP port 5000 on the device for communication server to terminal UNIStim messaging IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 260 of 630 Nortel M
138. undesired traffic routing For example a GARP attack can convince the victim machine that the malicious device is the default gateway In this scenario all traffic from the victim s machine flows through the malicious device To enable GARP Protection during configuration see Procedure 1 Configuring the IP Phone 2001 on page 52 or Procedure 1 Installing an IP Phone 2001 for the first time using DHCP on page 62 Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is a general protocol that fulfills the protocol requirements defined by 802 1x For further information on 802 1x see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Reinstalling an IP Phone 2001 You can reinstall an existing previously configured IP Phone 2001 on the same system For example the IP Phone 2001 can be assigned to a new user new TN or to an existing user who moved to a new subnet by changing the TN of the IP Phone 2001 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 71 of 630 Procedure 6 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2001 1 Repower the IP Phone 2001 Note During the reboot sequence of a previously configured Internet Telephone the IP Phone 2001 displays the existing node number for approximately five seconds If the node password is enabled and NULL choose one of the following a Disable the password b Setthe password as non NULL Press OK when
139. with the TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When complete the IP Phone 2002 resets Note The Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 146 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 The current Call Server date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more information see IP Phone 2002 User Guide End of Procedure Full Duplex mode In the Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup Typically the IP Phone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate and it selects the best speed and duplex mode available There is no intervention required under normal operation Note Changing the speed and or duplex mode on the phone changes both the LAN Ethernet port and PC Ethernet Port interfaces IMPORTANT It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch
140. 0 Enabling Full Duplex 22 225 cscs va ru roe 339 Procedure 61 Checking Ethernet Statistics 339 Procedure 62 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1110 341 Procedure 63 Replacing an IP Phone 1110 342 Procedure 64 Removing an IP Phone 1110 from service 342 Procedure 65 Configuring the IP Phone 1120E 363 Procedure 66 Installing the IP Phone 1120E 371 Procedure 67 Enabling Full Duplex mode 379 Procedure 68 Checking Ethernet Statistics 380 Procedure 69 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1120E 382 Procedure 70 Replacing an IP Phone 1120E 383 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 List of procedures Page 25 of 630 Procedure 71 Removing an IP Phone 1120E from service 383 Procedure 72 Configuring the IP Phone 1140E 406 Procedure 73 Installing the IP Phone 1140E 414 Procedure 74 Enabling Full Duplex mode 422 Procedure 75 Checking Ethernet Statistics 423 Procedure 76 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone T1406 i12 2222 5sa o rib ERI RR 425 Procedure 77 Replacing an IP Phone 1140E 426 Procedure 78 Removing an IP Phone 1140E from service 426 Procedure 79 Configuring an IP Phone 1150E
141. 0 V2 Standard 11 00 This document is up issued to include updated content for the IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 January 2006 January 2006 November 2005 August 2005 April 2005 April 2005 February 2005 September 2004 June 2004 October 2003 Page 5 of 630 Standard 10 00 This document is up issued to include updated content for the IP Phone1140E on pages 405 to 412 and 509 to 530 Standard 9 00 This document is up issued to reflect change in technical content on page 456 due to CR Q01233903 Standard 8 00 This document is up issued to support the addition of IP Phone 1140E Standard 7 00 This document is up issued to support CS 1000 Release 4 5 Standard 6 00 This document is up issued to support the addition of the IP Phone 2007 Standard 5 00 This document is up issued to support the addition of the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Standard 4 00 This document is up issued to support the 8 x Firmware Upgrade for IP Phones Standard 3 00 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4 0 Standard 2 00 This document is up issued to include the Nortel Networks Mobile Voice Client 2050 Standard 1 00 This document is a new document for Succession 3 0 Software It was created to support a restructuring of the Documentation Library This document contains information previously contained in the following legacy document no
142. 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 207 of 630 four soft keys providing access to a maximum of 10 features four line display directory capabilities stored locally on the PC or linked to external directories such as LDAP Microsoft Outlook and Windows Address Book Directory one click direct dialing from various windows and applications seven specialized feature keys Directory Inbox Message Shift Outbox Services Quit Copy Expand dedicated call processing keys Hold Goodbye Answer Mute Navigation Message Waiting user selected ringer lets the PC speakers or the headset ring for incoming calls choice of two window skins as well as an Accessibility Interface option for the visually impaired The Accessibility Interface operates with screen reading software such as JAWS for Windows from Freedom Scientific which enables visually impaired users to access the full range of IP Softphone 2050 features Visually impaired users can follow Procedure 39 on page 231 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 208 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 to install the Accessibility Interface from the IP Softphone 2050 CD ROM programmable hot keys allow single key access to user definable features three input modes Digit Alpha and Native macro functions available for programming long dialing patterns support for G 711 G 729A and G 729AB code
143. 001 365 The IP Phone 2001 saves the configuration and then reboots The IP Phone 2001 searches for the connect server When the connection is complete proceed with step 6 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description Password IP Phone Installer Password You are not prompted to enter the IP Phone Installer Password if it has not been configured in your system Node The node ID TN The TN or VTN The IP Phone 2001 registers with the Terminal Proxy Server TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When the download is complete the IP Phone 2001 resets Note The Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The current system date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 62 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 8 Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more information see IP Phone 2001 User Guide End of Procedure Procedure 3 Installing an IP Phone 2001 for the first time using DHCP IMPORTANT Timing information There are only four seconds s between plugging i
144. 04 172 Privacy release key IP Softphone 2050 221 Q QoS 216 DiffSERV 218 R Reboot IP Phone 2002 71 108 146 185 297 341 382 425 472 Redial List 493 Registration error messages 557 IP Softphone 2050 214 Reserved keys IP Phone 2002 221 Ring again key IP Phone 2004 617 IP Softphone 2050 221 Ringing number pickup key IP Phone 2004 617 IP Softphone 2050 221 Router address 55 91 129 174 282 324 369 413 460 S Speed dial IP Phone 2004 618 IP Softphone 2050 221 Start up IP Softphone 2050 227 228 Structural baseplate 196 T Terminal Proxy Server language selection 207 TN 225 IP Softphone 2050 222 sharing 72 109 147 186 298 342 383 426 473 Transfer key IP Phone 2004 617 Trivial File Transfer Protocol 603 U User ID IP Phone 2002 55 91 129 174 282 325 370 413 460 V Virtual Office 494 VLAN 802 1Q 509 priority 292 VLAN ID discover using DHCP 513 values 286 292 Ww WLAN Handset 2210 261 2211 261 IP Phones Page 629 of 630 Description Installation and Operation Page 630 of 630 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Communication Server 1000 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this d
145. 07 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 343 of 630 Redeploying an IP Phone 1110 You can redeploy an existing previously configured IP Phone 1110 on the same Call Server For example the IP Phone 1110 can be assigned to a new user new TN or to an existing user who moved to a new subnet by changing the TN of the IP Phone 1110 For further information see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Procedure 62 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1110 1 Repower the IP Phone 1110 Note During the reboot sequence of a previously configured IP Phone the IP Phone 1110 displays the existing node number for approximately 5 seconds 2 Ifthe node password is enabled and NULL choose one of the following a Disable the password b Setthe password as non NULL 3 Press OK when the node number displays If Then the node password is enabled and a password screen displays Go to is not NULL step 4 the node password is disabled a TN screen displays Go to step 5 4 Enterthe password at the password screen and press OK A TN screen displays Note To obtain the password enter the nodePwdShow command in Element Manager For further information see Communication Server 1000 Element Manager System Administration 553 3001 332 5 Select the Clear soft key to clear the existing TN 6 Enter the new TN End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 344 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Replacing an I
146. 0e cfg 0625Cxx bin e 1140e cfg 0625Cxx bin e 1150e cfg 0625Cxx bin Note 0625Cxx bin is the name of the firmware file by default but the location and the name of the firmware image file being downloaded is specified in 1110 cfg 1120e cfg 1140e cfg or 1150e cfg and can be any name The name of the firmware image file can be specified in relative path name notation for example subfolder name ext or name ext IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 614 of 630 Appendix H TFTP Server Table 76 describes the fields in the configuration file on the TFTP Server The download mode can be set to AUTO or FORCED It is recommended that you set DOWNLOAD MODE to AUTO Table 76 Fields in the TFTP configuration file FW Section header for firmware download info DOWNLOAD MODE Recommended setting The application looks at the version and downloads the FW if it is a newer version than what is on the phone FORCED The version of firmware is ignored The firmware is always downloaded VERSION 0625Cxx The version string compared to what is on the phone FILENAME 0625Cxx bin Image file name Must match the file name of the actual IP Phone FW file PROTOCOL TFTP Download protocol Must be TFTP SERVER_IP XXX XXX XXX XXX IP Address of the TFTP server in decimal SECURITY MODE 0 For future use Use Procedure 131 on page 615 to upgrade the firmware for the IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP 11
147. 1 Action configuration Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information You must enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The default is ffffffffffffffff For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 IP Use the dialpad to fill in the information S2 IP the secondary CS 1000 node IP address for IP Phone 2007 Note IP Phone 2007 can support a primary S1 and secondary S1 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see IP Line Description Installation and Operation b53 3001 365 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port Use the dialpad to fill in the information Port same as S1 port Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 Action Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Choose one of the following e for TPS only enter 1 e for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Retry Use the dialpad to fill in the information Retry same as S1 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 PK 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 25 26 27 28 29 Nor
148. 11x0 IP Phone Manual Configuration Nortel Note f you do not see this message you are in the wrong menu Repeat step 1 If BootC is damaged from a power reset hold down the Up and 3 keys to use the backup BootC When Nortel appears on the screen press the soft keys 1 2 3 4 in sequence left to right BootC goes to manual configuration If you miss this step and the phone begins to register to the TPS repeat step 1 Follow the prompts to configure DHCP and other IP parameters or if DHCP and other parameters are already configured just keep pressing the 1 soft key or OK The soft keys functions are listed below e softkey 1 below the LCD is OK e soft key 2 is BackSpace e softkey 3 is Clear e softkey 4 is Cancel 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 10 Appendix H TFTP Server Page 617 of 630 When prompted TFTP Dwnld 0 No 1 Yes 0 e Press soft key 2 BKSpace to clear the 0 No e Press 1 on the dialpad then press soft key 1 OK When prompted TFTP IP XXX XXX XXX XXX e Ifthe IP address is correct for the TFTP server press soft key 1 OK After the TFTP address is entered the first time it is presented the next time you enter the menu e Ifthe IP address is incorrect press soft key 2 Clear to erase the address shown and enter a new address Press the asterisk key to enter a period in the IP address You can also use backspace key to erase part of the address or correct errors b
149. 163 of 630 The following rules apply when you enter text and special characters using the dialpad e Press a key from 0 to 9 once to enter the corresponding number e Press a key from 2 to 9 repeatedly to cycle through the letters assigned to that key first in lower case and then in upper case For example if you press the 5 key repeatedly the following characters are displayed one at a time j gt k gt 1 gt J gt K gt L gt 5 gt See Table 17 Character key mappings on page 163 for character key mappings e The insertion point remains in the its current position as long as you continue to press the same key e The entry is accepted if either a new key is pressed or if two seconds pass with no entry The insertion point moves one space to the right For example to enter the word Nortel press the following key sequence 6 2 second delay 67835 Note Although special characters are not required key 1 generates commonly used special characters such as the period at symbol and underscore _ Table 17 Character key mappings Generates 19 96 amp 1 abcABC2 defDEF3 ghiGHI4 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 164 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Generates jkIJKL5 mnoMNO6 pqrsPQRS7 tuvTUV8 WXyzWXYZ9 Cleaning the IP Phone display screen Gently wipe the IP Phone display screen with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not use any liquids or powders on th
150. 2 Procedure 96 Changing the number of Pings 532 Procedure 97 Pinging an IP address esses nn 533 Procedure 98 Procedure 99 Entering an IP address 533 Procedure 100 Changing the number of Hops 534 Procedure 101 Tracing a Oute eiaesudasutaaaAM daa a naicA ia ka 534 Procedure 102 Reviewing the results of the trace 535 Procedure 103 Browsing Ethernet Statistics 535 Procedure 104 Checking 802 1x Supplicant status 535 Procedure 105 Checking 802 1x Supplicant Authentication state 536 Procedure 106 Checking Device ID ssleeseeesee 536 Procedure 107 Checking Authenticator ID Lleesee 537 Procedure 108 Browsing IP Statistics 00 e eee eee eee 537 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 28 of 630 List of procedures Procedure 109 Browsing RUDP Statistics 538 Procedure 110 Browsing Quality of Service Statistics 538 Procedure 111 Using Network Diagnostic Tools 558 Procedure 112 Using Ethernet Statistics tool 560 Procedure 113 Using the IP Network Statistics tool 561 Procedure 114 Using the IPSet amp DHCP Information tool 563 Procedure 115 Using the IP Set amp DHCP Information tool 565 P
151. 2004 from service 0 004 110 Nortel IP Phone 2002 esee 111 deni p PET CPC 111 Introd Bet fofi ace er VER XOGo E Verbi ve e E Pd KA 112 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Contents Page 9 of 630 WCC sese Bqcepe ESTEET OTE FETA S E EE 112 Components aad TuncHOIS ioa iier REPRE CERE e EE S 115 Suppoded TANIA ans dari bbb oae EEEE EREET liz Features not currently supported i asco dese uaco aam ek anie 119 Display characteristics aos sso eet ede Gece eRe eee T PES 120 Key muinber ASSIBTIMENIS 24452 leaded eked edndedsaseabanceas 122 Package COMPONCUIS 4c cows erede RR Ree eese drop E ene 122 Installation and Configuratio 42 2 orbene s e RR RE RR RR 124 Pull Duplex imnodgsirsoeuteoRRSESPEERE RRICKRSRARERRP4EE oa oes 144 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 146 Extensible Authentication Protocol iios so state er 146 Reinstalling an IP Phone 2002 2 21 akqdixk RARE PRA RRAAREERARAS 146 Replace an IP Phone 2002 lt occcivudidevecadediegeisegavcoas 147 Removing an IP Phone 2002 from service ssseccasecdh per 148 Nortel IP Phone 2007 susuwkekasdanack hon a wm 149 GIONE Coder pea t bane emer eae eels acqua p bp 149 Production 15045 kode ee bixead inane daeeus E OS PR bdde reda PR 150 Das o a ead ew etes odd RE bee qurdedqp qe ere ee eee 150 Components and TUNGWONS sabe pedr pRpeREX G P ERR EX DE 151 Supported Teatures iiio esse aree REPRE RARAS PRAE I Er 156 Features
152. 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 enter the TFTP Server IP address The IP Phone searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 290 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 can support a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 searches for the connect server When the connection is complete proceed with Step 5 5 Enterthe following information Screen prompt Description Password IP Phone Installer Password You are not prompted to enter the IP Phone Installer Password if it has not been configured in your system Node The node ID TN The TN or VTN Note Select the Shift soft key labeled gt gt and press Clear to edit the TN field The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 by default will place you in the units field of the TN You can not use backspace to move to the loop shelf or card fields The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 regis
153. 339 of 630 PSK SRTP 0 No 1 Yes Default O for No GARP Ignore 0 No 1 Yes Default O for No You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000 Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 A TFTP Server is not required for CS 1000 Release 4 5 With the Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature firmware can be automatically downloaded from the Call Server For further information about the Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 For CS 1000 Release 4 0 a TFTP Server is required to upgrade the firmware Enter the TFTP Server IP address The IP Phone searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 The IP Phone 1110 can support a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes in P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 IP Phone 1110 searches for the connect server The IP Phone 1110 registers with the Terminal Pr
154. 40E and IP Phone 1150E using automatic TFTP download during bootup 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix H TFTP Server Page 615 of 630 Procedure 131 Upgrading the firmware for IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E using automatic TFTP download at bootup 1 Use one of the three methods to configure the TFTP Server address e Access the Network Configuration menu Enter the address at the TFTP IP prompt Press the ApplyandReset soft key to save the change e Enter the address in the BootC menu See Manual TFTP Download from BootC Procedure on page 615 e Enterthe IP address in the TFTP IP address field retrieved by the DHCP Server 2 Restart the phone After the phone starts and begins to run the latest version of firmware the 1110 cfg 1120e cfg 1140e cfg and 1150e cfg files are downloaded from the TFTP Server After the cfg file is retrieved the DOWNLOAD MODE and VERSION fields are checked If necessary the firmware file is transferred to the phone using TFTP The display shows the message FW reading If successful the display shows FW writing and the blue LED starts to flash After the FW image is written to the phone the message FW finished is displayed the blue LED stops flashing and the phone resets The phone registers to the TPS with the new FW version End of Procedure Manual TFTP Download from BootC Procedure This method of upgrading the f
155. 50 through the PC operating system IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 512 of 630 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description Description e IP Phone 1110 e P Phone 1120E e P Phone 1140E e P Phone 1150E The 802 1Q support is configured from the user display interface of the IP Phone Configure 802 1Q VLAN support when you initially configure an IP Phone The switch ports for Voice Gateway Media Card TLAN network interfaces must be configured as untagged ports so the header is removed While the IP Phone 2001 and the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 provide VLAN support they do not provide a port for a PC The 802 1Q IEEE protocol standard allows virtual LANs VLANs to be defined within a single LAN This improves bandwidth management and limits the impact of broadcast and multicast messages A higher level of security between segments in a network can also be achieved Note 802 1Q functionality is supported only on the IP Phone The IP Line application IP stack does not provide 802 1Q support for the Voice Gateway Media Card The p bits within the 802 1Q standard allow packet prioritization at Layer 2 improving network throughput for VoIP data The 802 1Q standard specifies a new format of Ethernet frame A standard Ethernet frame contains e aheaderconsisting of a six byte destination MAC address following the header is a data area e asix byte source MAC address e atwo byte protocol identifier The 802
156. 509 DESCHBION 143 care ay eee UPPER E Vaud id eque edges 510 IP Phone SUPPER epres eese t ERIEN des seagiaaaeree en ewed 511 Three port switch suppott iius arwaesees a ERE REOR 312 WEAN B08 ca PEE 513 Eunbsuced DATA VLAN uu ped kd xad d bob CREE E Rad ES 515 Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access CORD MTTPP TT 519 nr TC 519 Titoli wicca e tak ad eked bodas didis be Ed idus 519 Extensible Authentication Protocol oscar hore 520 Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol 521 CUI S cioe E E E EE E E He bd op p pea o oe es 521 JUR BE oou iod doe ei de 35 eR ASSO EREE DIELS EARLE SE 521 DOeScnptioll 6430x4416 RONSON HSE OSE HEH KE SR AET ERA dI ER 321 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities 523 f Onions o Lies pe Tu ad de doa dde dd abo PES deg 523 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Contents Page 17 of 630 lius ic FTT de bigaGeiigarigaedend 323 Text based diagnosuc Utes i icsssst eset RERRRSERP ERE S 524 Graphic based diagnostics utilities 000 557 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools Doll Leucaueccesanssksons cuu ha 577 par E rere 373 TUEEOSDRQDON Lu oie dae hee I DIOE ed SEN abeo Rb dd 2377 Configuring the Local Tools menu 4 0254402sa0siceaedseanioas 578 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless jp qb toD AMPETRRTIQOTOQQQITTS I T lolo 589 PONG c ces kee Hi RRERIXbeR b bbeliPeies4qs idR Ras d APRES 58
157. 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 307 of 630 Table 34 IP Phone 1110 keys and functions Part 2 of 2 Function Press the Enter key at the center of the Navigation key cluster to confirm menu selections In many cases you can also use the Enter key like the Select soft key Message Inbox Press the Message Inbox key to access your voicemail box Volume control keys Press the volume control keys to adjust the volume of the handset listen only speaker and ringer Services menu Table 35 shows the Services menu Table 35 Services menu Part 1 of 2 Services key Press the Services key to access the following items Telephone Options see Note Volume Adjustment Contrast Adjustment Language Date Time Display diagnostics Local Dialpad Tone Set Info Diagnostics Call Log Options Ring type Call Timer IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 308 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Table 35 Services menu Part 2 of 2 Password Admin Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Branch Office is configured Note The user can originate a call using Last Number Redial while manipulating an option However the display is not updated with the dialed digits or the Caller ID information and Autodial and Last Number Redial intercept the dialpad Local Tools menu Table 36 sho
158. 584230 page 218 e Q01605678 page 208 Standard 23 00 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 This document includes updated content due to CR Q01478322 See page 123 and page 357 Standard 22 00 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 This document is up issued to support the addition of IP Phone 1110 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 4 of 630 January 2007 December 2006 October 2006 September 2006 August 2006 July 2006 June 2006 April 2006 April 2006 March 2006 January 2006 Standard 21 00 Not issued Standard 20 00 This document is up issued to include the addition of the Expansion Module for IP Phone Series Standard 19 00 This document is up issued to include updated content due to CR Q01462514 Standard 18 00 This document is up issued to include the addition of the IP Phone 1150E Standard 17 00 This document is up issued to include content update due to CR Q01434634 Standard 16 00 This document is up issued to include updated technical content for CR Q01337301 Standard 15 00 This document is up issued to include UNIStim firmware up version Standard 14 00 This document is up issued to include content for the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Release 2 Standard 13 00 Not issued Standard 12 00 This document is up issued to include updated content for the IP Softphone 205
159. 6 additional logical self labeled line programmable feature keys e Upgradeable firmware using a TFTP or UFTP Server e A desk mount bracket and structural baseplate connect the Expansion Module to an IP Phone or to another Expansion Module e P Phone and Expansion Module combination can be wall mounted using the wall mount template provided IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 480 of 630 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Display characteristics The Expansion Module has the following display characteristics LCD display area Each of the 18 physical keys on the Expansion Module has a 10 character display label beside the 18 self labeled line programmable feature keys see Figure 49 on page 479 This label is set automatically however the user can edit the label using the controls on the IP Phone adjustable display and contrast settings Use the Contrast Adjustment option in the Telephone Options menu on the IP Phone to adjust the display and contrast settings Any contrast changes you make on the IP Phone affect the Expansion Module The Expansion Module and IP Phone do not have separate contrast adjustments backlight The local 48V power supply is required to operate the backlight on the Expansion Module however you can use either the local 48V power supply or Power over Ethernet PoE to operate all other Expansion Module functionality Package components Table 58 shows the Expansion
160. 61 of 630 The number of hops for the Tracert command are shown in the top bar of the screen The default is 30 To change the number of hops tap on the number and enter a new value using the USB keyboard Tap the Ping soft key to have the telephone attempt to access the IP address up to the number of times shown on the top of the screen The IP Phone displays the following Pinging x x x x with 64 bytes where x x x x is the IP address chosen in step 4 on page 560 The Exit soft key changes to Stop and the other soft keys become blank The IP Phone will attempt to contact ping the address the number of configured times displaying the results of each attempt To stop the ping before completing tap the Stop soft key The Stop key becomes the Exit soft key The results of ping are displayed as follows e Packets transmitted Tx e Packets received Rx e Packets lost Lost e Minimum round trip time Min e Maximum round trip time Max e Average round trip time Avg Tap the Tracert soft key to request the IP Phone to trace the route to the entered IP address up to MaxHop nodes The IP Phone displays the following Tracing route to x x x x over a maximum of y hops where x x x x is the IP address chosen in step 4 on page 560 and y is the number of hops displayed at the top of the screen The Exit soft key changes to Stop and the other soft keys become blank The IP Phone will trace the route to the address for
161. 630 Preview To preview your macro in a single view view the read only field under the Contents box Dialpad To enter numbers into your macro select the Keys list box press the Add button or use the numbers on the dialpad 802 1p and DiffServ MVC 2050 does not support 802 1p and DiffServ Global Packet Loss Concealment algorithm The Global Packet Loss Concealment GIPS algorithm searches for missing incoming packets When one is found GIPS algorithm stretches the previous packet to conceal the loss and to remove noises associated with the audio system starting and stopping at volume Part of this concealment alters the pitch of the sound to make it appear more natural It assumes that human is the type of sound which permits better pitch changes For more information see www globalipsound com MVC 2050 and WLAN 802 11b wireless ethernet networking MVC 2050 uses an 802 11b WLAN interface Audio quality is affected by the distance from the AP and enclosed spaces Audio quality is also affected by using Bluetooth accessories while on a voice call due to interference and contention QoS Due to device constraints 802 11 p q is not supported IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 262 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Wireless Fidelity ActiveSync of a PDA with a PC can be accomplished using Wireless Fidelity WiFi CAUTION When you return the PDA to its cradle if you want to mai
162. 634 Handset cord Ethergray A0897725 Handset cord Charcoal N0000763 Footstand Charcoal used for Ethergray and Charcoal models A0891619 IP Phone 2001 2002 2004 Power Adaptors Power transformer 117 120 VAC 50 60 Hz North America A0619627 Power transformer 3 prong AC to AC direct plug in 8W 240 A0656598 VAC 50Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Ireland and UK Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 230 VAC 50 60 A0619635 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Europe Power transformer 2 prong wall plug direct plug in AC to AC A0647042 8W 240 VAC 50 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Australia and New Zealand Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 100 VAC 50 A0828858 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA For more information and for information about previous versions of the IP Phone contact Nortel 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 127 of 630 Installation and Configuration The following sections provide a step by step guide through the IP Phone 2002 installation and configuration process Before you begin First time installation Configuring the IP Phone 2002 Startup sequence Installing the IP Phone 2002 Before you begin Before installing the IP Phone 2002 complete the following pre installation checklist Ensure there is one IP Phone 2002 boxed package for each IP Phone 2002 being installed The package contains IP Phone 2002 handset han
163. 7 Appendix H TFTP Server Page 609 of 630 e 0625Cxx bin firmware image file Note 0625Cxx bin is the name of the firmware file by default but the location and the name of the firmware image file being downloaded is specified in the 12007 cfg file and can be any name The name of the firmware image file can be specified in relative path name notation for example subfolder name ext or name ext Table 75 describes the fields in the configuration file on the TFTP Server The download mode can be set to AUTO or FORCED It is recommended that you set DOWNLOAD MODE to AUTO Table 75 Fields in the TFTP configuration file DOWNLOAD MODE Recommended setting The application looks at the version and downloads the FW if it is a newer version than what is on the phone FORCED The version of firmware is ignored The firmware is always downloaded VERSION 0625Cxx The version string compared to what is on the phone FILENAME 0625Cxx bin Image file name Must match the file name of the actual IP Phone FW file PROTOCOL TFTP Download protocol Must be TFTP SERVER_IP XXX XXX XXX XXX IP Address of the TFTP server in decimal SECURITY_MODE 0 For future use Use Procedure 130 to upgrade the firmware for the IP Phone 2007 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 610 of 630 Appendix H TFTP Server Procedure 130 Downloading the firmware for the IP Phone 2007 Note Nortel recommends that the u
164. 7 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 59 of 630 S2 Port Same as S1 S2 action Same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if S2 Action is set to 1 S2 retry count Same as S1 2 PK Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto 6 or 1 e Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes Default O for No Note f there is no External Application Server XAS enter 0 for No You are not prompted to enter the XAS IP address XAS IP Enter the IP address of the XAS server VLAN Cfg 0 No 1 Yes VLAN Cfg 0 Auto 1 Man 1 Man Enter the VLAN ID manually This is a number between 1 and 4094 0 Auto Automatically obtains VLAN ID using DHCP or the 802 1ab data switch IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 60 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 LLDP MED 0 No 1 Yes LLDP VLAN 0 No 1 Yes DHCP 0 No 1 Yes VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full PSK SRTP 0 for No 1 for Yes GARP Ignore 0 No 1 Yes 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the Network Policy TLV You are not prompted for LLDP MED if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automat
165. 9 Miodu isasi isre Pas Day ect Oe S ee Rapide deed aid i Pg 589 DeScnploll s aces te ERE Ea ERR RR ce P A RR CR re dn 589 Appendix H TFTP Server 603 ary TK 603 AGOGO MICE 603 TFTP Server pDIIBRS ouuoree e eR ERRREReREURTES EAE SP A Res 604 Updating IP Phones POWIE LesosrsasrpRDLRERG4 ika ai erpi hEN 605 Appendix I IP Phone soft keys 617 Appendix J Call features 619 eee ee ee Teer CUR eT ee NER C RON CR RO 623 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 18 of 630 Contents 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 19 of 630 List of procedures Procedure 1 Configuring the IP Phone 2001 52 Procedure 2 Installing the IP Phone 2001 for the first time using manual configuration 56 Procedure 3 Installing an IP Phone 2001 for the first time using DHCP ciccccadenevserescedes cis ewes ceases 62 Procedure 4 Enabling Full Duplex mode 69 Procedure 5 Checking Ethernet Statistics 69 Procedure 6 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2001 71 Procedure 7 Replacing an IP Phone 2001 72 Procedure 8 Removing an IP Phone 2001 from service 72 Procedure 9 Configuring the IP Phone 2004 88 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 20 of 630 List of procedures Procedure 10 Installing the IP Phone 2004
166. AC 10 amp ANZ power cord AS 3 N A NTTK15AA Australia New Zealand 250 VAC Option 11C Standard European power cord NTTK16ABEG NTTK16AB Other EMEA Kenya Korea Thailand Indonesia Vietnam India Pakistan 3 m 9 9 ft 125 VAC Option 11C Swiss power cord NTTK17ABE6 NTTK17AB Switzerland 240 VAC Option 11C UK power cord NTTK18ABE6 NTTK18AB Hong Kong Ireland United Kingdom Singapore Malaysia Bangladesh Brunei Sri Lanka 3 m 9 9 ft 125 VAC Option 11C Denmark power cord NTTK22ABE6 NTTK22AB Denmark IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 318 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Table 37 IP Phone 1110 components list Part 3 of 3 Argentina N A A0814961 1 8 m 5 9 ft 10 amp IEC320 C13 NTTK26AAE6 N A Japan Installation and Configuration The following sections provide a step by step guide through the IP Phone 1110 installation and configuration process e Before you begin e First time installation e Configuring the IP Phone 1110 e Startup sequence e Installing the IP Phone 1110 Before you begin Before installing the IP Phone 1110 complete the following pre installation checklist Ensure there is one IP Phone 1110 boxed package for each IP Phone 1110 being installed The package contains IP Phone 1110 handset handset cord 2 1 m 7 ft CATS Ethernet cable number plate and lens Getting Started Card Ensure there is one Software License for each IP
167. AS 3 240Vac 10A NTTK15AA Australia New Zealand PRC Option 11C Standard European Power Cord 250Vac NTTK16AB Other EMEA Kenya Option 11C Swiss Power Cord 9 9 ft 125Vac NTTK17AB Switzerland Option 11C UK Power Cord 240Vac NTTK18AB Hong Kong Ireland UK Singapore Malaysia India Bangladesh Pakistan Brunei Sri Lanka Option 11C Denmark Power Cord Kit 9 9 ft 125Vac NTTK22AB Denmark Installation and Configuration The following sections provide a step by step guide through the IP Phone 2007 installation and configuration process e Before you begin e First time installation e Configuring the IP Phone 2007 e Startup sequence e Installing the IP Phone 2007 Before you begin Before installing the IP Phone 2007 complete the following pre installation checklist Ensure there is one IP Phone 2007 boxed package for each IP Phone 2007 being installed The package contains IP Phone 2007 handset 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 173 of 630 handset cord 2 1m 7 ft CATS Ethernet cable Getting Started Card Ensure the host Call Server is equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card or a Signaling Server with the Line TPS application If you are not using Power over Ethernet PoE you must use the Global power adapter or your phone will fail to operate See Table 18 IP Phone 2007 component list on page 171 First time installation You mu
168. Adjustment Language Date Time Format Display diagnostics Local Dialpad Tone Set Info Ring type OnHook Default Path Change Feature key label Call Timer Password Administration Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Branch Office is configured 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 11 Services menu Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 119 of 630 Double press the Services key to access Network diagnostic utilities For more information on Network diagnostic utilities see Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 Note 1 f a call is presented while the user is manipulating an option the IP Phone 2002 rings and the DN key flashes However the screen display is not updated with Caller ID information and programming text is not disturbed Note 2 The user can originate a call using Autodial or Last Number Redial while manipulating an option However the display is not updated with the dialed digits or the Caller ID information and Autodial and Last Number Redial intercept the dialpad Supported features The IP Phone 2002 supports the following telephony features four feature keys four soft keys self labeled providing access to a maximum of nine features Note Functions for the soft keys are configured in LD 11 volume control bar for adjusting ringer speaker handset and headset volume six s
169. Answer Expand volume UP Down keys navigation keys online help 12 button dialpad multifield display audible notification of connection or disconnection to the server macro functions available for programming lengthy dialing patterns Note Pause is available to build into the macro to introduce a delay which may be required to access some Interactive Voice Response IVR applications and voicemail systems IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 238 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 e Redial List e Callers List profiles e skins connection to user supplied headsets for the speech path features and services provided by the network such as call features and voicemail e run in background application MVC 2050 interface is closed but the application runs in the background to allow incoming calls e 802 1Ib WLAN interface e automatic network configuration through DHCP e G 711 codec for operation without compression Application software MVC 2050 is a software application that enables voice communications over a WLAN from a PDA The MVC 2050 software application is comprised of the following components e MVC 2050 software NetEQ software included in MVC 2050 software ClearType MVC 2050 uses a special screen font which requires that Microsoft ClearType be enabled on your PDA ClearType software improves the appearance and readability of text on liquid crystal display LCD p
170. August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 287 of 630 S1 action S1 retry count 1 PK S2 IP S2 Port S2 action IP Phones Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if S1 Action is set to 1 The number of times the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 attempts to connect to the server Enter 10 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto6or1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The secondary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Same as S1 Same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if S2 Action is set to 1 Description Installation and Operation Page 288 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 S2 retry count S2 PK TFTP Server IP 0 0 0 0 VLAN 0 No 1 Ma 2 Au 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Same as S1 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following Setto6or1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number the TFTP Server
171. Authenticator switch Accessing Network Diagnostic utilities from the IP Phone Local diagnostics are available from the IP Phone for either Local or Remote mode Note Diagnostics prompts are presented in English Local Mode When the IP Phone is not registered with the signaling server the Network Diagnostic Tools menu is available from the IP Phone in Local Mode see Table 68 Network Diagnostic Utilities availability on page 527 This menu is controlled by the firmware on the IP phone IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 530 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Use Procedure 87 on page 530 to access the Network Diagnostic Tools in Local mode Procedure 87 Accessing the Network Diagnostic Tools menu in Local mode 1 Double press the Services key The Local Main Menu Network Diagnostic Tools appears Press Cancel to quit or use the Navigation keys to scroll through the menu and select one of the following e Ping e TraceRoute e Ethernet Statistics e P Network Statistics P Set amp DHCP Information End of Procedure Procedure 88 Executing Ping 1 2 Select Ping from the Network Diagnostic Tools submenu Press the IP soft key and enter the IP address to Ping Tip Use the dialpad to enter the IP address The key is used for dots and the f key produces a space Press the Ping soft key The results of the Ping appear on the display Use the Navigati
172. C Ethernet port duplex and speed accordingly Use the following procedure to confirm activation of Full Duplex mode Procedure 82 Checking Ethernet Statistics 1 Double press the Services key to open the Local Tools menu 2 Press2to select Local Diagnostics then press 3 to open the Ethernet Statistics menu If Full Duplex mode is active the following is displayed e Link Status UP e Duplex Mode Full e Network Speed 10 Mb 100 Mb or 1G e Auto Sense Negotiate Auto Negotiate Capability No Auto Negotiate Completed No End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 473 of 630 TFTP firmware upgrade When you enter the IP address of the TFTP Server the phone searches for an upgrade file on the TFTP Server Note Users of CS 1000 Release 4 5 or later do not need to enter a TFTP IP address For further information about TFTP firmware upgrade see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection protects the IP Phone 1150E from GARP Spoof attacks on the network In a GARP Spoof attack a malicious device on the network takes over an IP address usually the default gateway by sending unsolicited or Gratuitous ARP messages thus manipulating the ARP table of the victim s machine The malicious device launches a variety of attacks on the network resulting in undesir
173. CALA AP GC using Power over Ethernet Classification 0 IP Phone Product Code Normal Load NTEX11BA70 NTEX11EA70 Note 1 Heavy load is defined as all LEDs on and 1 kHz tone on the speaker Note 2 Normal load is defined as set powered up Table 62 Power requirements for IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 EMEA using Power over Ethernet Classification 0 IP Phone Product Code Maximum Load Normal Load NTEX11AA70E6 NTEX11BA70E6 NTEX11EA70E6 NTEX11FA70E6 Note 1 Heavy load is defined as all LEDs on and 1 kHz tone on the speaker Note 2 Normal load is defined as set powered up 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix A Specifications Page 503 of 630 Table 63 provides power requirements for IP Phones using Power over Ethernet Classification 2 Table 63 Power requirements for IP Phones using Power over Ethernet Classification 2 IP Phone Product Code Maximum Load Normal Load 2001 Phase Il NTDU90BA 4 0W 30W 2002 Phase II NTDU91BA 45W 30W 2004 Phase ll NTDU92BA 45W 3 4 W 1110 NTYSO2AAE6 4 5 W 3 4 W NTYS02BAE6 Note 1 Heavy load is defined as all LEDs on and 1 kHz tone on the speaker Note 2 Normal load is defined as set powered up Table 64 provides power requirements for IP Phones using Power over Ethernet Classification 3 Table 64 Power requirements for IP Phones using Power over Ethernet Classification 3 IP Phone Product Code Maximum Load Norma
174. CAT5 Ethernet cable to the LAN Ethernet port located on the back of the IP Phone 2004 identified with a LAN icon The other end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable plugs into the IP network IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 90 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 For an IP Phone sharing a LAN access with a PC Connect one end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable to the LAN Ethernet port located on the back of the IP Phone identified with a LAN icon see Figure 6 and the other end to the IP network Insert one end of a second CATS5 Ethernet cable into the PC Ethernet port located on the back of the IP Phone identified with a PC icon see Figure 6 and the other end into the computer CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug any device into your IP Phone 2004 Ethernet port other than one PC The IP Phone 2004 does not support multiple devices connected through the PC Ethernet port Figure 6 IP Phone 2004 Ethernet network connections LAN Ethernet port PC Ethernet port AC Adapter jack Attachment clips Cord guides Headset jack Handset jack 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 91 of 630 Connect the AC power adapter optional Leaving the AC adapter unplugged from the power outlet connect the adapter to the AC adapter jack in the bottom of the phone Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the adapter cord through the channels in the stand Secure the IP Phone footstand to the
175. Controller do the following e Setto6or 1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2004 Same as S1 Same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if S2 Action is set to 1 Same as S1 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto 6 or 1 e Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number Description Installation and Operation Page 104 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes XAS IP 7 Enterthe following parameters Screen prompt VLAN Cfg 0 No 1 Yes VLAN Cfg 0 Auto 1 Man LLDP MED 0 No 1 Yes LLDP VLAN 0 No 1 Yes 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Default 1 for Yes Note f there is no External Application Server XAS enter 0 for No You will not be prompted to enter the XAS IP address Enter the IP address of the XAS server Description 1 Man Enter the VLAN ID manually This is a number between 1 and 4094 0 Auto Automatically obtains VLAN ID using DHCP or the 802 1ab data switch If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the Network Policy TLV You are not prompted for LLDP MED if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured autom
176. DP MED if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV You are not prompted for LLDP VLAN if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes the VLAN ID is configured automatically to a value received from the DHCP server You are not prompted for DHCP if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Au or if DHCP is not enabled Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 67 of 630 VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes Default 0 0 for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTER if VLAN is not enabled Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full Default O for Auto PSK SRTP 0 for No 1 for Yes Default O for No GARP Ignore 0 No 1 Yes Default 0 for No Note You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000 Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 enter the TFTP Server IP address The IP Phone searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605
177. E IMPORTANT Timing information There are approximately 45 seconds s between plugging in the IP Phone 1120E power adapter and the appearance of the text Nortel When you see the text Nortel on the phone you have one s to respond by pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the one s response time the IP Phone 1120E attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the Local diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 Note f you are prompted to enter a password when you double press the Services key password protection is enabled For more information about password protection see Local Tools menu password protection on page 359 1 When the Nortel logo appears in the middle of the display immediately press the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right The 3 Network Configuration menu opens Note You can press the Apply amp Reset soft key to save the following settings and to reset the IP Phone You can press the Exit soft key exit the menu to exit the menu without saving any changes and return to the 3 Network Configuration menu When the 3 Network Configuration menu opens the Enable 802 1x EAP check box is highlighted 2 Pressthe Enter key to to
178. E parameter are present at the end of the S4 part of the Full DHCP string If neither the SECUREMENU parameter nor the PARTSECURE parameter is present password protection is not enabled The SECUREMENU PARTSECURE item is an optional parameter If it is present then the full S4 string needs to be present including the action and retries The S4 string will already be present if the XAS support has been configured through the DHCP If XAS is not configured you can still enable password protection by setting the S4 IP address to 0 0 0 0 and by setting the other fields to 0 IMPORTANT With Full DHCP the vendor specific or site specific options must be configured depending on the customers DHCP server configuration For further information on configuring Full DHCP see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Accessing the Local Tools menu Once the password is entered the Local Tools menu remains active for 5 minutes You can freely navigate exit and reenter the Local Tools menu without being prompted to reenter the password To reset the timer before the 5 minute time expires double press the Services key IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 170 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 You can also press the 5 key to select the Lock Now item from the Lock Menu The Lock Now item immediately exits the Local Tools menu closes any open Local Tools menu pages and locks the Local Tools menu Alternatively whe
179. EC cables RoHS Non RoHS 1 8 m 5 9 ft 10 amp IEC320 C13 NTYS14AAE6 NTYS14AA North America 2 4 m 8 ft 240 VAC 10 amp ANZ power cord AS 3 N A NTTK15AA Australia New Zealand 250 VAC Option 11C Standard European power cord NTTK16ABE6 NTTK16AB Other EMEA Kenya Korea Thailand Indonesia Vietnam India Pakistan 3 m 9 9 ft 125 VAC Option 11C Swiss power cord NTTK17ABE6 NTTK17AB Switzerland 240 VAC Option 11C UK power cord NTTK18ABE6 NTTK18AB Hong Kong Ireland United Kingdom Singapore Malaysia Bangladesh Brunei Sri Lanka 3 m 9 9 ft 125 VAC Option 11C Denmark power cord NTTK22ABE6 NTTK22AB Denmark Argentina N A A0814961 1 8 m 5 9 ft 10 amp IEC320 C13 NTTK26AAE6 N A Japan Installation and Configuration The following sections provide a step by step guide through the IP Phone 1120E installation and configuration process e Before you begin First time installation IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 364 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E e Configuring the IP Phone 1120E e Startup sequence e Installing the IP Phone 1120E Before you begin Before installing the IP Phone 1120E complete the following pre installation checklist e Ensure there is one IP Phone 1120E boxed package for each IP Phone 1120E being installed The package contains IP Phone 1120E handset handset cord 2 1 m 7 ft CATS Ethernet cable Number plate and lens Getting Started Card
180. ERE Edd depu da 125 Installation and Configuration seceese eee ee m ews 127 Ell Duplek modes c rreosscebibeSAaR d Vb req a Rated ied 146 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 148 Extensible Authentication Protocol leeeeeee esee 148 Reinstalling an IP Phone 2002 zLcsaRebRRRIECRCReFRS GRAM RR 148 Replacing an IP Phone 2UUS our ep bed edad eei Mp RETI 149 Removing an IP Phone 2002 from service 004 150 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 114 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Introduction This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Phone 2002 For information on using the IP Phone 2002 see the JP Phone 2002 User Guide This section contains the following procedures Description Procedure 17 Configuring the IP Phone 2002 on page 128 Procedure 18 Installing the IP Phone 2002 for the first time using manual configuration on page 132 Procedure 19 Installing an IP Phone 2002 for the first time using DHCP on page 139 Procedure 20 Enabling Full Duplex mode on page 146 Procedure 21 Checking Ethernet Statistics on page 147 Procedure 22 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2002 on page 148 Procedure 23 Replacing an IP Phone 2002 on page 149 Procedure 24 Removing an IP Phone 2002 from service on page 150 Note After an IP Phone has been installed and configured if power is to the phone is interr
181. Function Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the line DN key beside the flashing LCD to return to the caller on hold Press the Goodbye key to terminate an active call When a message is waiting the red Visual Alerter Message waiting indicator lights Also when the ringer sounds this indicator flashes When the firmware is updating the blue Feature Status Lamp indicator flashes Note This function requires server support and therefore is not available on all phones User defined feature key labels are configured for various features on the IP Phones A steady LCD light beside a line DN key indicates the feature or line is active A flashing LCD indicates the line is on hold or the feature is being programmed Soft keys are located below the display area The LCD label above the key changes based on the active feature Note Atriangle before a key label indicates that the key is active Use these keys to access non programmable standard features The Expand to PC key is used to access external server applications such as External Application Server 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 44 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 391 of 630 IP Phone 1140E keys and functions Part 2 of 3 Navigation keys Message Inbox Shift Outbox Quit Stop Directory Mute Function Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen The outer part o
182. HCP response e Lock Menu option double press the Services key to access the Local Tools menu Press 4 on the dialpad to access the Lock Menu items or use the up down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following Lock Menu options IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 314 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Manual Secure Local Menu 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu 4 DHCP Secure Menu 5 Lock Now The settings configured in the Lock Menu sub menu override the settings received from the DHCP string For more information about 4 Lock Menu manual user settings see Appendix Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Configuring Secure Local Menu through Full DHCP Password protection is enabled during Full DHCP configuration if the SECUREMENU parameter or the PARTSECURE parameter are present at the end of the S4 part of the Full DHCP string If neither the SECUREMENU parameter nor the PARTSECURE parameter is present password protection is not enabled The SECUREMENU PARTSECURE item is an optional parameter If it is present then the full S4 string needs to be present including the action and retries The S4 string will already be present if the XAS support has been configured through the DHCP If XAS is not configured you can still enable password protection by setting the S4 IP address to 0 0 0 0 and by setting the other field
183. IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 275 of 630 e Date and time information if the IP Phone is in an idle state or Call Timer if provisioned in the Telephone options menu e Set information The information in the display area changes according to the call processing state and active features Soft key label display The soft key label has a maximum of seven characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a triangle icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a soft key is enabled the icon state changes to on It remains in the on state until the soft key is pressed again This cancels the enabled soft key and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state Use the Shift gt gt key to navigate through the layers of functions If there are only three functions assigned to the soft keys the Shift gt gt key does not appear and all three functions are displayed Figure 21 shows the soft keys on the display area IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 276 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Figure 21 Soft keys Key number assignments A maximum of nine functions can be assigned to the three soft labeled pre defined soft keys Because they are pre defined the user cannot change
184. LD 11 enter OUT for the TN prompt End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 235 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics InttOdBCUol secueedisesrbreqrsewareei2Peqsi dd XE op Ede pas Deccan 465i triton ERE FERE EP ORE ERR CRI E Ee 236 Supported TEAMS siccae ke eR IER he RR ORE Pape Rees 237 MVC 2030 cOmponggita coils caches ede eee ah pea iron E erR 238 MVC 2050 Call Handbng screen iiu eiecit ERR RC ores 240 Url PC UE 248 MYC 2030 1n tallaloll sss icbeapie s a3 PROCEDE EORR OE poi 249 MYC 2050 removal eodd sad eT E OREER ORDEN Cd EX D t ped 251 Con plrablofi sese s we RR RR RR REG OH REG E dare ed 251 ads pou DHISQU Goose T qux dope WR Qe Lee Ea ede 261 MYC IIT dnd WLAN casti hoi treed ETE EREREPR Th EDERT 261 This section describes how to install configure and remove the Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 For information on using the MVC 2050 see the Nortel Networks IP Softphone 2050 and Mobile Voice Client 2050 User Guide This section contains the following procedures e Procedure 43 Starting MVC 2050 on page 248 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 236 of 630 Description Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 e Procedure 44 Synchronizing a PDA with a desktop PC using ActiveSync on page 249 e Procedure 45 Installing MVC 2050 on page 250 Procedure 46 Removing
185. MVC 2050 from your PDA on page 251 Procedure 47 Enabling Auto Create on page 253 Mobile Voice Client MVC 2050 adds wireless IP Phone services to the convenience of Personal Digital Assistants PDAs MVC 2050 functions like an IP Softphone 2050 However MVC 2050 cannot be used as an Agent or Supervisor in Call Center Portal applications MVC 2050 is UNIStim based software providing real time voice communication over a WLAN to PDAs MVC 2050 operates on PDAs running the following operating systems e Pocket PC 2003 e Windows Mobile 5 0 WLAN 802 11b can interwork with various enterprise communication servers MVC 2050 can also interwork with WLAN Access Points WAP and can use the WSS 2250 WLAN Security Switch MVC 2050 can coexist with a secure Virtual Private Network VPN client on the same PDA MVC 2050 requires access to an enterprise or public WLAN Access Point WAP System requirements MVC 2050 requires PDAs to meet the following minimum specifications e 240x320 screen size e 624MHz CPU speed 64MB RAM 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 237 of 630 Supported features MVC 2050 supports the following telephony features six programmable line feature keys four soft keys self labeled six specialized feature keys Messages Directory Shift Copy Quit Services call processing keys Hold Goodbye Mute
186. Menu 4 DHCP Secure Menu 5 Lock Now The settings configured in the Lock Menu sub menu override the settings received from the DHCP string For more information about 4 Lock Menu manual user settings see Appendix Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Configuring Secure Local Menu through Full DHCP Password protection is enabled during Full DHCP configuration if the SECUREMENU parameter or the PARTSECURE parameter are present at the end of the S4 part of the Full DHCP string If neither the SECUREMENU parameter nor the PARTSECURE parameter is present password protection is not enabled The SECUREMENU PARTSECURE item is an optional parameter If it is present then the full S4 string needs to be present including the action and retries The S4 string will already be present if the XAS support has been configured through the DHCP If XAS is not configured you can still enable IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 448 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E password protection by setting the S4 IP address to 0 0 0 0 and by setting the other fields to 0 IMPORTANT With Full DHCP the vendor specific or site specific options must be configured depending on the customers DHCP server configuration For further information on configuring Full DHCP see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Accessing the Local Tools menu Once the password is entered the Local Tools me
187. N ID automatically This prompt exists to support future implementation of DHCP Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 295 of 630 Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes EAP Enable 0 No 1 Yes Cfg PK 0 No 1 Yes 0 Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes Default 0 for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTER if VLAN is not enabled Enter 0 for No since External Application Server is not supported on the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 This prompt exists to support future implementation of External Application Server Default 0 for No You are not prompted to enter Device ID and Password if you select 1 for Yes For more information on EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Default 0 for No Default O for Auto Note You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000 Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 enter the TFTP Server IP address The IP Phone searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Serv
188. N screen displays Note To obtain the password enter the nodePwdShow command in Element Manager For further information see Communication Server 1000 Element Manager System Administration b53 3001 332 Select the Clear soft key to clear the existing TN Enter the new TN End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 428 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Replacing an IP Phone 1140E IMPORTANT Two IP Phones cannot share the same TN You must remove the IP Phone 1140E that is currently using the TN Procedure 77 Replacing an IP Phone 1140E 1 Obtain the node and TN information of the phone you want to replace 2 Disconnect the IP Phone 1140E that you want to replace 3 Follow Procedure 72 on page 4068 to install and configure the IP Phone 1140E 4 Enter the same TN and Node Number as the IP Phone 1140E you replaced The Call Server associates the new IP Phone 1140E with the existing TN End of Procedure Removing an IP Phone 1140E from service Procedure 78 Removing an IP Phone 1140E from service 1 Disconnect the IP Phone 1140E from the network or turn the power off Note The service to the PC is disconnected as well if the PC is connected to the IP Phone 1140E If the IP Phone 1140E was automatically configured the DHCP lease expires and the IP address returns to the available pool 2 InLD 11 enter OUT at the TN prompt End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 A
189. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Document Number 553 3001 368 Document Release Standard 26 00 Date August 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Produced in Canada The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Nortel the Nortel Logo the Globemark SL 1 Meridian 1 and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks Page 3 of 630 Revision history August 2007 May 2007 April 2007 March 2007 March 2007 Standard 26 00 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 This document includes updated content due to CRs Q01721270 and Q01736698 Standard 25 00 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 This document includes updated content due to CR Q01647741 Standard 24 00 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 This document includes updated content due to the following CRs e Q01586034 page 608 and page 613 e Q01
190. Nortel IP Phone 1110 S1 action S1 retry count 1 PK S2 IP S2 Port S2 action 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if the S1 action is set to 1 The number of times the IP Phone 1110 attempts to connect to the server Enter 10 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto6or 1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1110 Same as S1 Same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if the S2 action is set to 1 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 337 of 630 S2 retry count 2 PK Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes XAS IP Enter the following parameters VLAN Cfg 0 No 1 Yes VLAN Cfg 0 Auto 1 Man IP Phones Same as S1 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto6or 1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number Default O for No Note If there is no External Application Server XAS e
191. Nortel IP Phone 1140E 27 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e No VLAN e DHCP VLAN ID is configured automatically to one of the values received from the DHCP server e LLDP MED VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received from 802 1ab LLDP e LLDP VLAN Name VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received from 802 1ab LLDP Note If LLDP is disabled LLDP MED and LLDP VLAN Name modes do not appear in the list If DHCP is disabled DHCP does not appear in the list For more information about VLAN configuration see Data Networking for Voice over IP B53 3001 160 28 Press the Enter key 29 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight VLAN Filter check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off If the VLAN Filter is enabled packets destined for the IP Phone port are filtered on their MAC address and their VLAN tag Untagged VLAN packets and tagged VLAN packets that differ from the Telephony VLAN ID are prevented from reaching the IP Phone port For information about VLAN tagging see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 Note The VLANFilter check box will appear dimmed if you select No in the VoiceVLAN combo box 30 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Disable PC Port check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off 31 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlig
192. Note 1 The IP Phone 1150E supports both AC power and Power over Ethernet options including IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 To use Power over Ethernet where power is delivered over the CAT5 cable the LAN must support Power over Ethernet and an AC adapter is not required To use local AC power the optional AC adapter can be ordered separately Note 2 You must use CAT5e or later cables if you want to use gigabit Ethernet IP Phone 1150E connections Accessory Expansion Module port PC Ethernet port LAN Ethernet port AC adapter jack Agent headset port Tilt lever button f Supervisor headset port USB port 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 459 of 630 3 Install the headset If you are installing a headset plug the connector into the RJ 9 headset jack marked with the symbol on the back of the phone and thread the headset cord along with the handset cord through the channels in the stand so that the headset cord exits the channel marked with the symbol Note Although a handset cord channel appears on the base of the IP Phone 1150E the IP Phone 1150E does not support a handset port Figure 48 Cable routing tracks 2 rivet slots 4 wall mount holes PINI Ch TAN Method B Method A Cable routing tracks IP Phones Description Install
193. Number TN or re acquisition of firmware is not required The IP Phone 1110 uses the customer IP data network to communicate with the Communication Server 1000 The IP Phone 1110 translates voice into data packets for transport using Internet Protocol A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide information that enables the IP Phone 1110 network connection and connection to the Communication Server 1000 Figure 24 on page 305 shows the IP Phone 1110 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 305 of 630 Figure 24 IP Phone 1110 Feature Status Lamp Visual Alerter Message Waiting indicator NORTEL 99 29 SOUEN LCD display screen Trans Conf Fud More Context sensitive soft keys Handset Navigation keys Services key a Message Inbox key Speaker T Enter key i Goodbye key Volume keys eae Hold key Line kay Expand key Dialpad Components and functions This section describes the following components and functions of the IP Phone 1110 e Keys and functions e Services menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 306 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Keys and functions Table 34 describes the IP Phone 1110 keys and functions Table 34 IP Phone 1110 keys and functions Part 1 of 2 Line key Hold Goodbye Visual Alerter Message Waiting indicator Feature status lamp Context sensitive soft keys
194. P Phone 1110 IMPORTANT Two IP Phones cannot share the same TN You must remove the IP Phone 1110 that is currently using the TN Procedure 63 Replacing an IP Phone 1110 1 Obtain the node and TN information of the phone you want to replace 2 Disconnect the IP Phone 1110 that you want to replace 3 Follow Procedure 57 on page 319 and Procedure 58 on page 327 or Procedure 59 on page 334 to install and configure the IP Phone 1110 4 Enter the same TN and Node Number as the IP Phone 1110 you replaced The Call Server associates the new IP Phone 1110 with the existing TN End of Procedure Removing an IP Phone 1110 from service Procedure 64 Removing an IP Phone 1110 from service 1 Disconnect the IP Phone 1110 from the network or turn off the power Note The service to the PC is disconnected as well if the PC is connected to the IP Phone 1110 If the IP Phone 1110 was automatically configured the DHCP lease expires and the IP address returns to the available pool 2 InLD 11 enter OUT at the TN prompt End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 345 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Contents luis oui PET 346 Descrip cast cows kenge rpepirPeessqedqaeced sud dE du EROR 346 Components and funcliDlis i o eb e EE SERT ETE RT pee 347 Support TESIIIES eog EErEE EO ER ER ERN pad 333 Features not currently suppomted ii sssceoassesae ase a RE kod 356 Display characteristics esri epe Er Ep erbe Sha p
195. P Phone KEM The IP Phone KEM and IP Phone do not have separate contrast adjustments Key number assignments Since the IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 have key number assignments from 0 to 31 the IP Phone KEM key number assignments begin at 32 Therefore the first IP Phone KEM has key number assignments from 32 to 55 and the second IP Phone KEM has key number assignments from 56 to 79 Package components Table 20 lists the IP Phone KEM package components Table 20 IP Phone KEM components list Part 1 of 2 Components Order code IP Phone KEM Ethergray NTEX00DA16 A0540989 IP Phone KEM Charcoal NTEX00DA70 A0540990 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 194 of 630 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Table 20 IP Phone KEM components list Part 2 of 2 IP Phone KEM Charcoal RoHS NTEXOODA70E6 IP Phone KEM wall mount kit Charcoal A0555218 Configuration The IP Phone KEM must be configured in LD 11 before it can be used LD 11 Configure the IP Phone KEM Part 1 of 5 Response Description Add new data Change existing data IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 Zone number to which the IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 belongs Number of attached IP Phone KEMs Note Up to two IP Phone KEMs can be attached to an IP Phone Pressing CR without entering a number leaves the value unchanged 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Pag
196. P Softphone 2050 This section contains the following procedures e Procedure 34 Installing an IP Softphone 2050 for the first time on page 227 e Procedure 35 Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on the PC new installation on page 229 e Procedure 36 Upgrading the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC on page 230 e Procedure 37 Uninstalling the IP Softphone 2050 Version 1 on page 230 e Procedure 38 Uninstalling the IP Softphone 2050 Version 2 on page 231 e Procedure 41 Changing the TN of an existing IP Softphone 2050 on page 233 e Procedure 42 Removing an IP Softphone 2050 from service on page 234 The IP Softphone 2050 is a Windows based application that provides voice services for Personal Computers PC The IP Softphone 2050 operates on PCs that run Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Pro and Windows XP Home Designed to work with IP based phone systems the IP Softphone 2050 provides Voice Over IP VoIP services using a telephony server and an enterprise Local Area Network LAN The VoIP application is comprised of the following components e Settings used to configure the IP Softphone e IP Softphone 2050 the IP Softphone user interface e P Softphone 2050 QoS The IP Softphone 2050 supports the following features e 12 user defined feature keys six programmable line DN feature keys and six lines features accessed by pressing the Shift key 553 3001 368 Standard 26
197. Phone 1110 being installed 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 319 of 630 Ensure the host Call Server is equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card or a Signaling Server with the Line TPS application If an AC power adapter is required ensure the approved Nortel AC adapter model N0089601 is used See Table 37 IP Phone 1110 components list on page 316 First time installation You must first install an IP telephony node with the Communication Server For information about installing an IP telephony node see Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 or IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug your IP Phone 1110 into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result Configuring the IP Phone 1110 You must configure the IP Phone 1110 before you can use it Use Procedure 57 to configure the IP Phone 1110 for the first time Procedure 57 Configuring the IP Phone 1110 1 Configure a virtual loop on the Call Server using LD 97 For more information about configuring a virtual loop see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 and Software Input Output Administration B53 3001 31 1 Configure the IP Phone 1110 on the Call Server as IP Phone 2001 using LD 11 At the prompt enter the following REQ chg TYPE 2001 IP Phones Description Installation and Operati
198. Phone 1120E on the Call Server as IP Phone 2002 using LD 11 At the prompt enter the following REQ chg TYPE 12002 For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 CAUTION The IP Phone 1120E is shipped with the stand locked in position To avoid damaging the IP Phone press the wall mount lever located under the Handsfree key to release the stand and pull it away from the phone See Figure 32 on page 366 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 366 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Figure 32 Release the IP Phone 1120E from the stand Wall mount lever Tilt lever 3 Remove the stand cover Pull upward on the center catch and remove the stand cover The cable routing tracks are now accessible See Figure 33 on page 367 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 367 of 630 Figure 33 Stand cover removed Center Catch 4 Connectthe AC power adapter optional Leaving the AC adapter unplugged from the power outlet connect the adapter to the AC adapter jack in the bottom of the phone Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the adapter cord through the channels in the stand See Figure 34 on page 368 WARNING Use your IP Phone 1120E with the approved Nortel global power supply model N0089601 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 368 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Note 1 The IP Phone 1120E suppo
199. Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight DataVLAN combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 378 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E 32 33 34 35 36 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e No VLAN e LLDP VLAN Name VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV e VLAN ID value manual selection of VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 Note If LLDP is disabled LLDP VLAN Name does not appear in the list Press the Enter key Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight PC Port Untag All check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off If DATA VLAN is enabled the tag on all traffic destined for the PC port is stripped by default To override this action deselect the PC Port Untag All check box If DATA VLAN is disabled the tag on all traffic destined for the PC port is not stripped To override this action select the PC Port Untag All check box For information about PC port tag stripping see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Duplex combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box e Auto Link speed is auto negotiated with the network device and
200. R if VLAN is not enabled Default 1 for On Select 0 for Off to disable the PC port Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 137 of 630 Data VLAN 0 No 1 Yes If you select 1 Y 1 for Yes and if LLDP is enabled the Data VLAN Cfg prompt appears on the display This prompt is not displayed if the PC port prompt is set to OFF Data VLAN Cfg 0 A 1 M If you select 0 0 for A VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV This prompt is not displayed if Data VLAN or LLDP is not enabled Data VLAN ID This prompt is displayed if Data VLAN is enabled but LLDP is not enabled Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full Default O for Auto PSK SRTP 0 No 1 Yes Default O for No GARP Ignore 0 No 1 Yes Default O for No Note You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000 Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 enter the TFTP Server IP address The IP Phone searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 The IP Phone 2002 can support
201. REDE ERRERA ERAEN 162 Dialpad entis ooa sera serbe RR RR DEP ED PE RUE RE ed 162 Cleaning the IP Phone display screens acces ee I RE RES 164 Display eBaracteristieS s oocesse cce eR e RR RR n Reed 164 Local Tools menu password protection 0 000 000 168 Key number Bei Sens ox bd epis wade RUE ed HERERTRRERA 170 Package compon iiS erraten er eeRE Re D RR E APER Vader e aded s 171 Installation and Configuration iisrokeshRae rk Rer RR RR RE 172 Pull Duplex moderer iarria itre eti oe ecd 185 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 187 Extensible Authentication Protocol 000 000 005 187 Remstaling an IP Phone 2007 amp cteeq ura epe ERE EE nee 188 Replacing an IP Phone 2007 cai cesoss e eee 9m s 189 Removing an IP Phone 2007 from service 0004 189 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 152 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Introduction This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Phone 2007 For information on using the IP Phone 2007 see the JP Phone 2007 User Guide This section contains the following procedures Description Procedure 25 Configuring the IP Phone 2007 on page 173 Procedure 25 Configuring the IP Phone 2007 on page 173 Procedure 27 Enabling Full Duplex mode on page 186 Procedure 28 Checking Ethernet Statistics on page 187 Procedure 29 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2007 on page 188
202. Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 the IP Phone 2007 searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in i2007 cfg is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone 2007 reboots Note The Enhanced UNIStim firmware download is only supported on CS 1000 Release 4 5 or later The Enhanced UNIStim firmware download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 2007 can support a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes in P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 2007 searches for the connect server The IP Phone 2007 registers with the Terminal Proxy Server TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When download is complete the IP Phone 2007 resets The current system date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more information see the
203. SU and TRN See Appendix Appendix I IP Phone soft keys on page 619 for a description of the IP Phone feature assignment for each of the dedicated keys 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 171 of 630 Package components The IP Phone 2007 includes integrated support for a number of LAN options including support for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 The Global power adapter must be ordered separately if local power is required Table 18 lists the IP Phone 2007 package components and product codes Contact Nortel for further information Table 18 IP Phone 2007 component list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 2007 package contents includes e IP Phone 2007 charcoal with metallic bezel Handset Handset cord e Footstand e 7 ft 2 1 m CAT5 Ethernet cable Getting Started card NTDU96AB70 Replacement parts 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable A0648375 Handset charcoal A0758634 Handset cord charcoal N0000764 Footstand charcoal A0538587 IP Phone 2007 power adapter Global power adapter N0014020 IP Phone 2007 power cords Cord 9 9 ft NA Power NEMA 125Vac 13 NA M East Taiwan Indonesia Philippines Korea Thailand Vietnam Japan NTTK14AB IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 172 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Table 18 IP Phone 2007 component list Part 2 of 2 Cord 8 ft ANA Power
204. Server 1000 The IP Phone 1140E translates voice into data packets for transport using Internet Protocol A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide information that enables the IP Phone 1140E network connection and connection to the Communication Server 1000 Figure 36 on page 389 shows the IP Phone 1140E 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 389 of 630 Figure 36 IP Phone 1140E User defined feature keys Data message waiting indicator Message waiting indicator Handset High resolution Speaker graphical display screen Soft keys Copy key _ E Message Inbox key Services key e i Shift Outbox key Quit Stop key Directory key k Volume control Goodbye key Expand to PC key Mute key a kad Caa Headset key Handsfree key x z v Hold key Navigation keys Dialpad Components and functions This section describes the following components of the IP Phone 1140E e Keys and functions e Services menu e Local Tools menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 390 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Keys and functions Table 44 lists keys and functions for the IP Phone 1140E Table 44 IP Phone 1140E keys and functions Part 1 of 3 Hold Goodbye Visual Alerter Message waiting indicator Feature Status Lamp indicator User defined feature keys labels Soft keys Fixed feature keys Expand to PC
205. TP Server e The process for the IP Phone to check the version of firmware against the firmware on the TFTP Server takes a few seconds for a quiet network e The IP Phone attempts to connect to the TFTP Server If the TFTP Server is offline unreachable or no connection is made the IP Phone uses its existing version e The firmware downloading process takes about 30 seconds e The TFTP Server must be capable of supporting multiple TFTP sessions e When the IP Phone makes a TFTP request it uses filenames without a full path name Therefore firmware updates for the IP Phones must be installed on the root directory of the TFTP Server When the firmware is uploaded to the TFTP Server the files must be unzipped Allow time for the TFTP Server to refresh Monitor the TFTP Server for any errors The TFTP Server can be located anywhere on the network if the IP Phones have the subnet mask and default IP gateway configured correctly However the IP Phone expects a response within two seconds to any TFTP Server request Therefore the TFTP Server should not be located for example at the other end of a slow WAN link 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix H TFTP Server Page 607 of 630 If too many IP Phones attempt to download new software simultaneously it can cause the downloads to slow down or return error messages To reduce the number of retries and error messages manage the download process by staggering the times the IP P
206. UL or a server application on key 5 On key 6 the craftsperson can assign NUL or a local application On M3905 the craftsperson can assign NUL or the program key on key 7 On M3905 the craftsperson can assign AAG AMG ASP DWC EMR MSB or NRD on keys 8 11 Other features are blocked PAGEOFST lt Page gt Automatically calculates the IP Phone KEM key based lt KeyOffset gt on the entered values This prompt enables the system administrator to enter a Page number of 0 or 1 and a Key Offset number from 0 23 Once entered the KEY prompt is prompted with the appropriate KEY value filled in Enter lt CR gt to terminate data entry Note 1 Applies to an IP Phone 2004 with KEM 1 and where lt CR gt was entered at the KEY prompt Note 2 Does not apply to an IP Phone 2002 When values are entered for Page and KeyOffset the KEY xx prompt displays followed by PAGEOFST prompt This loop continues until no values lt CR gt only are entered at the PAGEOFST prompt IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 198 of 630 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM LD 11 Configure the IP Phone KEM Part 5 of 5 Response Description Edit the IP Phone KEM key number specified by PAGEOFST where xx the number of the key for example KEY 36 Enter CR to keep the current setting KEMOFST lt KEM gt Automatically calculates the IP Phone KEM key based lt KeyOffset gt on the entered values This
207. VLAN ID is set to 000 hex by default The GUI and TPS configured values override these values The IP Phone Ethernet driver receives any Ethernet frame destined for it regardless of whether 802 1Q is enabled or whether the received frame is an 802 1Q tagged frame Note The only exception is any 802 1Q tagged frame with the CFI 1 In this case the frame is discarded The IP Phone Ethernet driver strips the 802 1Q tag information from the frame prior to passing it on to the IP stack The IP Phone Ethernet driver filters packets by the VLAN tag and MAC address Tagged traffic is prioritized and routed based on the priority bits IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 514 of 630 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description IP Softphone 2050 support The IP Softphone 2050 supports 802 1Q with Windows 2000 By default when 802 1Q is enabled the priority bits of all frames are set to 6 and the VLAN ID is set to 0 a restriction of Windows 2000 For more information see the Nortel IP Softphone 2050 on page 205 Three port switch support The section refers to the following IP Phones e P Phone 2002 e P Phone 2004 e P Phone 2007 e P Phone 1120E e IP Phone 1140E e IP Phone 1150E The three port switch does not interpret the 802 1Q header but rather allows the packets to pass through unmodified Priority is achieved on a per port basis The phone port traffic has higher priority over the Ethernet por
208. VLAN broadcast traffic from reaching the IP Phone For more information see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 and Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 802 1x Port based network access control industry standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP over a LAN For more information about 802 1x port based network access control see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 integrated hardware to support Power over Ethernet PoE for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection The IP Phone 1120E supports the following user interface features graphical high resolution LCD display backlit with adjustable contrast USB port to support USB devices Note Powered downstream 1 1 compliant USB hubs are supported including USB 2 0 hubs if they offer USB 1 1 backwards compliancy Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC as per FCC Part 68 wireless headset support through Bluetooth gpiuetoot 1 2 compliant Audio Gateway Headset Profile External Application Server XAS Graphical External Application Server GXAS headset jack with On Off key IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 356 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E language support English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Russian Latvian Turkish an
209. a ad ar assa 613 Procedure 132 Upgrading the firmware for IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E using BootC 614 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 30 of 630 List of procedures 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 31 of 630 How to get Help This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services Getting help from the Nortel web site The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support web site www nortel com support This site provides quick access to software documentation bulletins and tools to address issues with Nortel products From this site you can e download software documentation and product bulletins e search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues e signup for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment e open and manage technical support cases Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support web site and you have a Nortel support contract you can also get help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center In North America call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 32 of 630 How to get Help Outside North America go to the fo
210. a summary of the IP parameters and how they are obtained Table 9 IP Phone 2004 IP parameters Parameter Method of Acquisition VLAN ID Manually entered or automatically obtained through DHCP and LLDP IP Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Net Mask Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Default Gateway Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Connect Server IP address port Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Full action and retry count primary DHCP and secondary User ID Node ID Node Password Manually entered for first time configuration Retrieved and TN from local storage on subsequent power cycles Installing the IP Phone 2004 To install the IP Phone 2004 for the first time using manual configuration use Procedure 10 on page 93 To install the IP Phone 2004 for the first time using DHCP use Procedure 11 on page 100 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 93 of 630 Procedure 10 Installing the IP Phone 2004 for the first time using manual configuration IMPORTANT Timing information There are only four seconds s between plugging in the IP Phone 2004 power transformer and the appearance of the Nortel logo in the middle of the display When you see the logo you have one s to respond by pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the
211. able 24 lists the IP Softphone 2050 package components Table 24 IP Softphone 2050 package components Component Code Nortel Mobile USB Adapter Nortel Mobile USB Adapter kit includes NTEX14MD P Softphone 2050 application software CD ROM NTDW83BA Nortel Mobile USB Headset Adapter with Monaural Headset Non RoHS NTEX14MB Nortel Mobile USB Headset Adapter no headset NTEX14MA Nortel Mobile USB Headset Adapter no headset ROHS NTEX14MAE6 Nortel Mobile USB Headset Adapter with Monaural Headset RoHS NTEX14MBE6 Nortel Enhanced USB Adapter desktop Nortel Enhanced USB Audio desktop kit NTEX14AA Nortel Enhanced USB Audio Adapter no headset NTEX14AB IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 226 of 630 Table 24 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 IP Softphone 2050 package components Component Code USB Audio Kit with GNN DuraPlus Monaural Headset Non RoHS NTEX14AC USB Audio kit with GNN DuraPlus Monaural Headset RoHS NTEX14ACE6 Adapter Kit Nortel Handset cord Charcoal for use with the Nortel Enhanced USB Audio NTEX14BA Before you begin The following section provides a step by step guide through the IP Softphone 2050 installation process Before installing the IP Phone complete the following pre installation checklist Procedure 33 Preinstallation checklist 1 2 Ensure you have the IP Softphone 2050 application software CD To
212. age 100 to install and configure the IP Phone 2004 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 111 of 630 Enter the same TN and Node Number as the IP Phone 2004 you replaced The Call Server associates the new IP Phone 2004 with the existing TN End of Procedure Removing an IP Phone 2004 from service Procedure 16 Removing an IP Phone 2004 from service 1 Disconnect the IP Phone 2004 from the network or turn the power off Note The service to the PC is disconnected as well if the PC is connected to the IP Phone 2004 If the IP Phone 2004 was automatically configured the DHCP lease expires and the IP address returns to the available pool In LD 11 enter OUT at the TN prompt End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 112 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 113 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Contents This section contains information on the following topics IntrOdBCUol secueedizre GSR oe ieioea na AA ACA d pre 114 DCS DE Loeb eth Ee RP E AREE ETE d Ad Wet Pe YET FEELERS 114 Components and T nctiofns eulsss ee eR mnn 115 SUPPOME CAMES ii ouaaa ced ritornano dms ree Deed dg 119 Features not currently supported 25044004 condos ede av RR et 122 Display CharacteriteS s eec v examcesR De RIA ERE EROR RR 122 Key number assienmenie 2ura docs PpeGydORR ARA RW ACER d E e 124 Package CONDODEULS L3 od d ead d Ve E OE E qr
213. age 142 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 1 PK S2 IP S2 Port S2 action S2 retry count S2 PK 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto 60r 1 e Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2002 Same as S1 Same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if S2 Action is set to 1 Same as S1 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto 6 or 1 e Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 143 of 630 Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes XAS IP Enter the following parameters Screen prompt VLAN Cfg 0 No 1 Yes VLAN Cfg 0 Auto 1 Man LLDP MED 0 No 1 Yes LLDP VLAN 0 No 1 Yes IP Phones Default 0 for No Note If there is no External Application Server XAS enter O for No You are not prompted to enter the XAS IP address Enter the IP address of the XAS server Description 1 Man Enter the VLAN ID manually This is a number between 1 and 4094 0 Auto Automatically obtains VLAN ID using DHCP or the 802 1ab data switch If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured auto
214. ailures malfunctioning or fire Power cords shipped with this equipment must not be used with any other equipment In case the above guidelines are not followed it may lead to death or severe injury x amp T8 eEEeIL CBRIRCG 06 VW ROCCICHECESU H7 2 V BRAK ACZ 4751450 08M DF RAIS CHET MAT in T IETERE n CIS FRIES UNS SIE FE SS LO Bec fie HILL S CM OMETR KRORACZOECEMBVET AMS CHET 518 OO RERO T SO teal SALE CCEA LRUISGUBRES SUV KO PAERGE AS SRMORACCSECEMNHVET IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 510 of 630 Regulatory and safety information 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 511 of 630 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description Contents This section contains information on the following topics Modic Uon LL c andes SESE Rhee a RHE Rudd dd ide 511 Des THO ceire toedoen ee Sab P UTENPORLE RESUME ES 512 IP Phone SUppalt ea onsec se xe RR RERO ede dne REDS 513 IP Softphone 2050 SUDDOIT os cede senda eg sheds kx amp ewdo a b eodd 514 Thiee port SWCD quppari o ico ede eere A THERE PE Ede EE Red 514 DIESE rm 515 Automatic VOICE VLAN ID configuration 515 Enhanced VLAN Tagging sscesssutew ee Rh ER REOR REA 516 Enhanced DATA VLANs Casi aed etek eh pakees ede por eae 317 Introduction The 802 1Q support is available for the following IP Phones e P Phone 2001 e P Phone 2002 e P Phone 2004 P Phone 2007 e P Audio Conference Phone 2033 e P Softphone 20
215. all the IP Phone 1150E use Procedure 80 on page 463 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 463 of 630 Procedure 80 Installing the IP Phone 1150E for the first time using manual configuration IMPORTANT Timing information There are approximately 45 seconds s between plugging in the IP Phone 1150E power adapter and the appearance of the text Nortel When you see the text Nortel on the phone you have one s to respond by pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the one s response time the IP Phone 1150E attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the Local diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 Note f you are prompted to enter a password when you double press the Services key password protection is enabled For more information about password protection see Local Tools menu password protection on page 446 1 When the Nortel logo appears in the middle of the display immediately press the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right The 3 Network Configuration menu opens Note You can press the Apply amp Reset soft key to save the following settings and to reset the IP Phone You can press the Exit soft key exit the
216. ame 510 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 April 2007 F Feature keys IP Softphone 2050 220 Features Callers List 493 Corporate Directory 492 Emergency Services for Virtual Office 494 IP Call Recording 493 Password Administration 493 Personal Directory 492 Redial List 493 Virtual Office 494 Frame size IP Softphone 2050 219 Full Duplex mode IP Phone 2001 68 294 G Gateway default 57 131 284 327 Global IP Sound NetEQ 236 H Headset adapter driver software 226 l Installer password 61 136 288 integrated switch 499 IP 42 IP address 54 91 128 173 282 324 369 412 459 IP Call Recording 493 IP Line IP stack 510 IP Phone diagnostic utilities 523 password 225 IP Phone 2001 Changing TN 71 297 components and functions 42 features not supported 46 Introduction 39 Reinstalling 70 107 146 184 296 340 381 424 471 Removing 72 298 Replacing 72 298 Supported features 44 IP Phone 2002 196 user ID 55 91 129 174 282 325 370 413 460 IP Phone 2002 keys reserved 221 IP Phone 2004 196 IP Phone controls 191 IP Phone Installer Password 61 136 288 IP Phone KEM 189 196 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM 189 IP Phones environmental specifications 502 IP Softphone 2050 codecs 219 loss plan 215 registration 214 software version 222 TN 222 isetShow command IP Softphone 2050 software version 222 J Jitter buffer setting 216 IP Ph
217. ame RAV Cre V doped dd ded 277 Installation and Configuration 2224 hebr ER A Ee a ER ewes 280 Pull Duplex dimidia aiias epqtu e xb ERG PP PERDE ux ang 297 Extensible Authentication Protocol s ciseisisossiseosistenisss 298 Reinstalling an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 298 Replacing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 300 Removing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 from service 300 Connecting an extension nierophbtg siricos sk Seb hr REA 301 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 266 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Introduction This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 For information on using the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 see the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide This section contains the following procedures Description Procedure 48 Configuring the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 on page 281 Procedure 48 Configuring the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 on page 281 Procedure 50 Installing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 for the first time using DHCP on page 291 Procedure 51 Enable Full Duplex mode on page 297 Procedure 52 Checking Ethernet Statistics on page 298 Procedure 53 Changing the TN of an existing IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 on page 299 Procedure 54 Replacing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 on page 300 Procedure 55 Removing an IP Audio Confe
218. an LED indicator to indicate the current mute state Figure 19 on page 268 shows an extension microphone Figure 19 Extension microphone Components and functions This section describes the following components and functions of the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 e Keys and functions e Services menu 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 269 of 630 Keys and functions Table 28 describes the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 keys and functions Table 28 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 keys and functions Line key Volume control buttons Mute button Goodbye key Hold key Message Inbox key Navigation keys Soft keys Function Use the Line key to access the single line and activate on hook dialing Use the Volume control buttons to adjust the volume of the ringer and speaker Use the Mute button on the main unit or any extension microphone to mute the speaker Note Pressing the Mute button on the extension microphone toggles the mute state of the entire IP Phone not just the microphone Use the Goodbye key to terminate an active call Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the Line DN key to return to the caller on hold Press the Message Inbox key to access your voice mailbox Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen Arrows appear on the left side of display screen
219. and LLDP IP Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Net Mask Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 177 of 630 Table 19 IP Phone 2007 IP parameters Part 2 of 2 Parameter Method of Acquisition Default Gateway Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Connect Server IP address port Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Full action and retry count primary DHCP and secondary User ID Node ID Node Password Manually entered for first time configuration Retrieved and TN from local storage on subsequent power cycles Installing the IP Phone 2007 To install the IP Phone 2007 use Procedure 26 on page 177 Procedure 26 Installing the IP Phone 2007 IMPORTANT Timing information There are only 4 s between plugging in the IP Phone 2007 power adapter and the appearance of Nortel on the display When Nortel appears in the middle of the screen you have 1 s to respond by pressing 0 0 7 If you miss the 1 s response time the IP Phone 2007 attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the Local diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 No
220. and Operation Page 222 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Key number assignments The IP Softphone 2050 has 6 keys that present 12 feature keys with 6 on each feature key page The keys are numbered from 0 to 11 The Shift key is used to change between two feature pages 0 to 5 and 6 to 11 Note If a feature requires a feature package that is not present for the Call Server installation that feature does not appear within the default configuration for the IP Softphone 2050 The Message key is numbered 16 If Message Waiting is not configured then key16 must be NUL Key numbers between 17 to 31 are assigned to the four soft label keys immediately below the display area The supported features are A03 A06 CFW CHG CPN PRK PRS RGA RPN SCU SCC SSU SSC and TRN Table 23 describes the IP Phone feature assignment for each of the soft keys Use LD 11 to program keys 16 to 26 on the IP Softphone 2050 Note If you attempt to configure anything other than the permitted response the Call Server generates an error code Table 23 IP Softphone 2050 soft keys Part 1 of 2 Prompt Response Description Key 16 MWK Message Waiting key NUL Removes function or feature from key Key 17 TRN Call Transfer key NUL Removes function or feature from key Key 18 A03 three party conference key A06 six party conference key NUL Removes function or feature from key 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007
221. art your IP Phone using one of the following methods e Ifyou are using an AC power adapter unplug it wait ten seconds and reinsert it e Ifyou are using POE unplug the LAN Ethernet cable wait ten seconds and reinsert it Double press the Headset key to open the 3 Bluetooth Setup dialog box The Enable Bluetooth check box is highlighted Note f the 3 Bluetooth Setup menu fails to open when you double press the Headset key Bluetooth wireless technology is not enabled on your phone Press the Enter key to activate Bluetooth wireless technology A check mark is displayed to indicate that Bluetooth wireless technology is activated The message BT Enabled appears at the bottom of the display Put your wireless headset in its pairing or search mode The procedure for doing this can be different for each wireless headset See the documentation that accompanied your headset Search for the headset a Press the Right navigation key twice to highlight the Search button displayed next to the Search Devices item b Press the Enter key The message Searching is displayed If the search is successful a list of Bluetooth wireless technology headsets appears in the Found combo box c Choose one of the following Ifthe search is successful proceed to step 6 Ifthe search is not successful the message Search completed No device found is displayed Power off the wireless technology and repeat step 4 and step 5
222. ased and graphic based The IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 and the IP Phone 1110 use a text based method to access diagnostic utilities For information about diagnostic utilities for the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 and IP Phone 1110 see Network diagnostic utilities on page 526 The IP Phone 2007 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and the IP Phone 1150E use a graphic based method to access Local Diagnostics through the IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 526 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Local Tools menu For information about Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 2007 see Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 2007 on page 560 For information about Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E see Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E on page 566 Text based diagnostic utilities Network diagnostic utilities are accessible on IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 and the IP Phone 1110 to isolate voice quality and network performance problems Network diagnostic utilities Network diagnostic utilities are available on the IP Phone itself set based or from the Command Line Interface CLI server based Diagnostic utilities provide testing and verification of end to end connectivity verificat
223. ask subnet mask e GtWay Gateway e PROMSI EEPROM Server information e PROMS2 EEPROM Server2 information e Sn S Server nis from 1 to 16 UNIStim RUDP statistics Figure 58 illustrates the data displayed from the UNIStim RUDP statistics submenu item Figure 58 UNIStim RUDP statistics data display screen TPS I Message TXx XXXXXXXXXXXX 2 MessageR X XXXXXXXXXXXX 3 Retries XXXXXXXXXXXX 4 UpTime xxx xx xx xx In Figure 58 MessageTx messages sent e MessageRx messages received e Retries number of retries e UpTime up time of current TPS registration days hours minutes seconds 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 547 of 630 RTP RTCP statistics Figure 59 illustrates the data displayed from the RTP RTCP statistics submenu item Figure 59 RTP RTCP statistics data display page EndIP xxx xxx xxx xxx 2 PortID xxxx 3 PacketTX xxxxxxxxxx 4 PacketRx XXXXXXXXXX 5 DiscPktRx xxxxXXXXXX 6 PacketLossRx xxx 7 JittAVeRX XXXXXXXXXX 8 JittMaxRXx XXXXXXXXXX 9 RdTripDelay xxxxx ms In Figure 59 EndIP endpoint IP address PortID port ID PacketTx RTP packets sent PacketRx RTP packets received DPacketRx BTR Disorder packets received PacketLossRx packet loss received xxx JittAveRx jitter average received xxxxxx JittMaxRx jitter maximum received xxxxxx RdTripDelay round trip delay Note Each new call resets the count
224. atically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV You are not prompted for LLDP VLAN if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 105 of 630 DHCP 0 No 1 Yes VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes PC Port 1 On 0 Off Data VLAN 0 No 1 Yes Data VLAN Cfg 0 A 1 M Data VLAN ID Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full PSK SRTP 0 No 1 Yes GARP Ignore 0 No 1 Yes IP Phones If you select 1 Y 1 for Yes the VLAN ID is configured automatically to a value received from the DHCP server You are not prompted for DHCP if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Au or if DHCP is not enabled Default O for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTER if VLAN is not enabled Default 1 for On If you select 1 Y 1 for Yes and if LLDP is enabled the Data VLAN Cfg prompt appears on the display This prompt is not displayed if the PC port prompt is set to OFF If you select 0 0 for A VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV This prompt is not displayed if Data VLAN or LLDP is not enabled This prompt is displayed if Data VLAN is enabled but LLDP is not enabled Default 0 for Auto Default O for No Default O for No Description Installation and Operation Page 106 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Note You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000
225. ation and Operation Page 460 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E 4 Install the Ethernet cable Connect one end of the supplied Ethernet cable to the back of your phone using the RJ 45 connect marked with the symbol and thread the network cable through the channel marked with If you are connecting your PC through the phone you will require a second CAT5 cable Only one cable is included with the IP Phone 1150E package Install the Ethernet cable connecting the PC to the phone optional Connect one end of the PC Ethernet cable to your phone using the RJ 45 connector marked with the symbol and thread it through the channel marked with the symbol Connect the other end to the LAN connector on the back of your PC CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug any device into your IP Phone 1150E Ethernet port other than a PC The IP Phone 1150E does not support multiple devices connected through the PC Ethernet port Install additional cables If applicable plug in optional USB devices Connect the Ethernet cable to the LAN Ethernet connection If you are using an AC power adapter plug the adapter into an AC outlet Note Complete steps 1 to 8 as needed before wall mounting the IP Phone Wall mount your phone optional Use Method A or Method B to wall mount the IP Phone See Method A using the mounting holes on the bottom of the phone stand or Method B using the traditional style wall mount box with a RJ 45 connector and
226. attached PC e 1OBT Full Link speed is available for up to 10 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port e 100BT Full Link speed is available for up to 100 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port e 1000BT Full Link speed is available for up to 1000 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port For more information about Full Duplex see Full Duplex mode on page 380 Use the Right navigation key to scroll to Enable PSK SRTP Select Yes to enable SRTP media encryption or select No to disable media encryption The SRTP media encryption feature provides encrypted media A preshared secret is embedded in the Nortel IP Phone to generate and to exchange encryption parameters without any Call Server involvement 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 37 38 39 40 41 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 379 of 630 For further information about the SRTP media encryption feature see SRTP media encryption on page 498 and System Security Management NN43001 604 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Ignore GARP check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off The GARP feature protects the IP Phone from a Gratuitous ARP Spoof attack from the network For more information about GARP see Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection on page 383 If an External Application Server XAS is available in the network use the Right navigation key to scroll and
227. battery is recommended It provides longer call duration and increased call volume than the standard life battery MVC 2050 installation If an older version of MCV 2050 is installed on the PDA remove it prior to installing a newer version See MVC 2050 removal on page 251 To install MVC 2050 on the PDA 1 Place the PDA in its cradle 2 Synchronize the PDA with a desktop PC running Microsoft amp ActiveSync See Procedure 44 3 Install the MVC 2050 from a Desktop See Procedure 45 on page 250 MVC 2050 installation method MVC 2050 supports installation from a docked PDA with a Microsoft ActiveSync connection to a desktop PC Synchronizing a PDA with a desktop PC Use Procedure 44 to synchronize your PDA with your desktop PC Procedure 44 Synchronizing a PDA with a desktop PC using ActiveSync 1 Place the PDAin its cradle 2 Ensure that ActiveSync is running IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 250 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 3 Wait for the PDA and the PC to synchronize End of Procedure For details about synchronizing a PDA with a desktop PC see the PDA Users Manual Installing MVC 2050 from a Desktop PC using ActiveSync Use the following procedure to install MVC 2050 using the product CD Procedure 45 Installing MVC 2050 1 2 3 Synchronize the PC and PDA See Procedure 44 on page 249 Insert the MVC 2050 CD into the CD ROM drive of your desktop PC Go
228. beled are located on the touch panel display and are configured for various features on the IP Phones A steady LCD light beside a programmable line DN feature key indicates the feature or line is active A flashing LCD indicates the line is on hold or the feature is being programmed 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 14 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 155 of 630 IP Phone 2007 keys and functions Part 2 of 2 Soft keys self labeled Navigation keys Context sensitive soft keys Function Soft keys self labeled are located on the touch panel display The soft key label changes based on the active feature Tap the More soft key to access the next layer of soft key functions Use the navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists on the LCD display screen The key rocks for up down left and right movement The soft key labels are enabled for the keys on either side of the navigation cluster The labels are context sensitive When in an edit box the soft key labels will show as Clear and Backspace This allows numeric editing without using the soft keyboard In normal use the soft key labels show Quit and Copy IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 156 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Services menu 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 157 of 630 Table 15 shows the Services menu Table 15 Services menu Services key Tap the Services key to ac
229. box 6 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e 10BT Full 10 BT Full Duplex mode e 100BT Full 100 BT Full Duplex mode 7 Tapthe Apply amp Reset soft key to save the changes and to restart the IP Phone The firmware settings are read and are applied to UPLINK and the PC Ethernet Port End of Procedure When the IP Phone is restarted the firmware reads the setting for Full Duplex mode and sets the LAN Ethernet port PC Ethernet port duplex and speed accordingly 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 187 of 630 Use Procedure 28 to confirm activation of Full Duplex mode Procedure 28 Checking Ethernet Statistics 1 Tap the Tools icon 2 Tapthe Local Diagnostics soft key 3 Tapthe Ethernet Statistics soft key The following statistics are displayed Link Up Duplex Full Speed 10 Mb or 100 Mb Auto Negotiate Capability N Auto Negotiate Completed N End of Procedure Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection prevents the IP Phone 2007 from GARP Spoof attacks on the network In a GARP Spoof attack a malicious device on the network takes over an IP address usually the default gateway by sending unsolicited or Gratuitous ARP messages thus manipulating the ARP table of the victim s machine The malicious device launches a variety of attacks on t
230. bps full duplex support Integrated switch Personal Directory Call Log and Redial List are not supported However if the primary DN on an IP Phone 2001 is an MADN of an IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 or IP Softphone 2050 Preferred Name Match and Idle Set Display new call indication are supported e Corporate Directory e Automatic Call Distribution P Key Expansion Modules e Support of accessory modules e Live Dialpad e Group Listening e Set to Set messaging e Context sensitive soft keys e Handsfree operation e Headset support Display characteristics An IP Phone 2001 has two display areas e information line display e soft key label display Figure 2 on page 47 shows these two display areas 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 47 of 630 Figure 2 IP Phone 2001 display areas NORTEL Upper display area information display Lower display area Massi cua Ss ae Cleaning the IP Phone display screen Gently wipe the IP Phone display screen with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not use any liquids or powders on the IP Phone 2001 Using anything other than a soft dry cloth can contaminate IP Phone components and cause premature failure Information Line display An IP Phone 2001 has a one line information display area with the following information e Caller Number e Caller Name e Feature prompt strings e User entered digits e Date and time infor
231. but immediately gives up the lease The IP Phone reboots and sends a DHCP Discovery Request with the first VLAN ID from the saved list This is repeated for each VLAN ID in the list until a response is received This works because the Layer 2 switch discards every DHCP Discovery Request it receives from the IP Phone if the VLAN ID does not match the VLAN IDs configured on the port When the IP Phone sends a DHCP Discovery Request with the port s configured VLAN ID the packet passes into the network and the DHCP server s Ack message is passed back When a DHCP Ack message is received the IP Phone accepts the offer and saves the IP address and Node IP address Enhanced VLAN Tagging 553 3001 368 Enhanced VLAN has two main functions Enhance the current Voice VLAN by implementing the hardware VLAN filter on the IP Phone port SMP Use TX High Priority Queue HPQ and 802 1P VLAN priority to enhance the traffic control on the IP Phone and PC network interface Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description Page 517 of 630 Enable Disable menu is available to enable or disable telephony packets filtering based on a VLAN ID The Enable Disable menu is only available if tagging is enabled on the IP Phone port IMPORTANT VLAN filtering on the telephony port is disabled by default If tagging is enabled on the telephony port you can enable VLAN filtering on the telephony port When VLAN filtering is enabled pack
232. cal Diagnostics for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E on page 566 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu Page 583 of 630 Network Configuration Use the Network Configuration menu item to configure the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and the IP Phone 1150E and to display information which was configured during installation You can access the Network Configuration menu using one of the following methods e Reboot the IP Phone and press the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right e Select 3 Network Configuration from the Local Tools menu Note When attempting to access Network Configuration by double pressing the Services key or if the soft keys 1 2 3 and 4 are pressed during bootup the Admin Password window will prompt for the Admin Password to be entered Enter the 26567 738 color set password then press the center of Nav key For information about Network Configuration see the following procedures e Procedure 66 on page 373 IP Phone 1120E e Procedure 73 on page 416 IP Phone 1140E e Procedure 80 on page 463 IP Phone 1150E Lock Menu You must enter the fixed password whenever the Lock Menu sub menu is accessed Use the dialpad and enter the fixed password 26567 738 color set Note The settings configured in the Lock Menu sub menu override the settings received from the DHCP string The Lock Menu offers
233. cedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 139 of 630 Procedure 19 Installing an IP Phone 2002 for the first time using DHCP IMPORTANT Timing information There are only 4 s between plugging in the IP Phone 2002 power transformer and the appearance of the Nortel logo in the middle of the display When you see the logo you have 1 s to respond by pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the 1 s response time the IP Phone 2002 attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the network diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current settings and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are presented the configuration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace backspace a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 Atthe prompt EAP Enable enter 1 Yes 1 for Yes if the network infrastructure supports 802 1x port based network access control Enter DevicelD and Password If you sel
234. cert soft key to request the IP Phone to trace the route to the entered IP address up to MaxHop nodes The IP Phone displays the following Tracing route to x x x x over a maximum of y hops where x x x x is the IP address chosen in step 4 on page 569 and y is the number of hops displayed at the top of the screen 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 10 11 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 571 of 630 The Return soft key changes to Stop and the other soft keys become blank The IP Phone traces the route to the address for the configured number of server hops displaying the hop number starting at 0 the time in milliseconds and the IP address When the trace is complete the screen displays the following Trace complete To stop Tracert before it completes tap the Stop soft key The Stop soft key becomes the Return soft key when Tracert stops Tap the Return soft key to return to Local Tools menu or the Stop key to exit the menu and return to the telephone display End of Procedure 3 Ethernet Statistics Use Procedure 117 on page 571 to use the Ethernet Statistics menu Procedure 117 Using Ethernet Statistics tool 1 2 Press the Services key twice Press 2 3 on the dialpad to access the Ethernet Statistics menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the Ethernet Statistics option Press the Select soft key You can press the Return soft key exit the menu to retur
235. cess the following items Telephone Option menu Volume adjustment Contrast adjustment Language Date Time Display diagnostics Local DialPad Tone Set Info Diagnostics Call Log Options Ring type Call timer On hook default path Change Feature key label Name Display Format Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Branch Office is configured Password Admin if configured Note When an option has a sublist an ellipsis appears after the option Double press the Services key to access Network diagnostic utilities For more information on Network diagnostic utilities see Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 158 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Local Tools menu Tap the Tools icon to access the Local Tools menu Table 16 shows the options available in the Local Tools menu Note Entering text in the Local Tools menu items is easier with a USB keyboard Table 16 Local Tools menu Network Use this menu to configure the IP Phone 2007 or to display the information Configuration that was configured when the IP Phone was installed This menu contains the following items e 802 1x EAP DHCP status P network settings IP address mask gateway address Server 1 and Server 2 IP address Port Action Retry and PK numbers Voice VLAN and
236. components see Package components on page 451 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 431 of 630 Figure 42 shows the IP Phone 1150E default Agent key configuration Note You can program the keys indicated with asterisks for different functions Figure 42 IP Phone 1150E default Agent key configuration Self labeled line programmable feature keys Data message Message waiting indicator waiting indicator Multi field LCD display screen Context sensitive soft keys Message Inbox key Outbox Shift key Directory key Quit Stop key m Navigation keys Supervisor 7 Goodbye key Talk Listen key Feature key Emergency key Activity key Supervisor key Make Busy key Not Ready key Volume control In Calls key Note You can program the keys indicated with asterisks for different functions Figure on page 431 shows the IP Phone 1150E Supervisor key configuration IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 432 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Figure 43 IP Phone 1150E Supervisor key configuration Self labeled line programmable feature keys Message Data message HII waiting indicator waiting indicator NORTEL Multi field LCD display screen Send Enter key C Context sensitive soft keys ee g a p a g y Copy key D Message Inbox key UU eS GED B L outoxshit key it eer Services key a Ce Gs se Directory key QuilStop key mtm NE M Na
237. control on page 521 Reinstalling an IP Phone 2002 You can reinstall an existing previously configured IP Phone 2002 on the same Call Server For example the IP Phone 2002 can be assigned to a new user new TN or to an existing user who moved to a new subnet by changing the TN of the IP Phone 2002 Procedure 22 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2002 1 Repower the IP Phone 2002 Note During the reboot sequence of a previously configured IP Phone the IP Phone 2002 displays the existing node number for approximately 5 seconds 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 149 of 630 2 Ifthe node password is enabled and NULL choose one of the following a Disable the password b Setthe password as non NULL 3 Press OK when the node number displays If Then the node password is enabled and a password screen displays Go to is not NULL step 4 the node password is disabled a TN screen displays Go to step 5 4 Enterthe password at the password screen and press OK A TN screen displays Note To obtain the password enter the nodePwdShow command in Element Manager For further information see Communication Server 1000 Element Manager System Administration b53 3001 332 Select the Clear soft key to clear the existing TN 6 Enterthe new TN End of Procedure Replacing an IP Phone 2002 IMPORTANT Two IP Phones cannot share the same TN You must remove the IP Phone 2002 that is cu
238. cription KEY lt key gt keys conf data gt key is the key number for the Page Key Offset CR entered at PAGEOFST Enter the key s configuration CR or just CR KEMOFST lt KEM gt Key Off KEMOFST is prompted if two or three Expansion set CR Modules are specified at the KEM prompt and CR is entered for KEY prompt This prompt enables you to enter a KEM number of 1 2 or 3 and a KEY Offset number from 0 to 17 Once entered the KEY prompt is prompted with the appropriate KEY value filled in CR ends the input KEY key keys conf data gt key is the key number for the KEM Key Offset CR entered at KEYOFST Enter the key s configuration CR or just CR Installation The Expansion Module mounts on the right side of the IP Phone The Expansion Module snaps into the receptacle on the back of the IP Phone using the desk mount bracket and structural baseplate supplied with the Expansion Module The Expansion Module connects to the IP Phone using the Accessory Expansion Module AEM port on the IP Phone Use Procedure 86 to connect the Expansion Module to the IP Phone 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Page 483 of 630 Procedure 86 Connecting the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series to the IP Phone Damage to Equipment To avoid damaging the equipment remove the power PoE cable or local power from the IP Phone
239. cs e If Full Duplex mode is active the following is displayed Link UP Duplex Full Speed 10 Mb or 100 Mb Auto Negotiate Capability N Auto Negotiate Completed N End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 148 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection prevents the IP Phone 2002 from GARP Spoof attacks on the network In a GARP Spoof attack a malicious device on the network takes over an IP address usually the default gateway by sending unsolicited or Gratuitous ARP messages thus manipulating the ARP table of the victim s machine The malicious device launches a variety of attacks on the network resulting in undesired traffic routing For example a GARP attack can convince the victim machine that the malicious device is the default gateway In this scenario all traffic from the victim s machine flows through the malicious device To enable GARP Protection during configuration see Procedure 17 Configuring the IP Phone 2002 on page 128 or Procedure 17 Installing an IP Phone 2002 for the first time using DHCP on page 139 Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is a general protocol that fulfills the protocol requirements defined by 802 1x For further information on 802 1x see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access
240. cs for operation at a variety of network connection speeds Supported features The IP Softphone 2050 supports the following additional features Call Duration Timer ability to change the feature key labels Corporate Directory Personal Directory Redial List Callers List Password Administration Virtual office Branch Office Call Recording language support English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Japanese Russian Latvian and Turkish Language support The IP Softphone 2050 is affected by the following three language controls Operating system language 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Components Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 209 of 630 IP Softphone 2050 language selection sets the language displayed in the help screens and in the menus select the IP Softphone 2050 language from the Application menu or during installation TPS language selection sets the language in the display area the language in the display areas is selected from the Language menu Note In normal operation the language chosen from the IP Softphone 2050 language setup matches the language chosen from the Language menu Otherwise the soft key labels and feature prompts will appear in a different language than the help text and menu items on the IP Softphone 2050 application The user must ensure that the appropriate language is chosen The IP So
241. ction If you are using an AC power adapter plug the adapter into an AC outlet End of Procedure Startup sequence When an IP Phone 1110 is connected to the network it must perform a startup sequence The elements of the startup sequence include e obtaining VLAN ID if supported by the network infrastructure e obtaining the IP parameters connecting to the Call Server e authenticating the user See Table 38 for a summary of the IP parameters and how they are obtained Table 38 IP Phone 1110 IP parameters Part 1 of 2 Parameter Method of acquisition VLAN ID Manually entered or automatically obtained through DHCP and LLDP IP Address Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP Net Mask Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP Default Gateway address Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 327 of 630 Table 38 IP Phone 1110 IP parameters Part 2 of 2 Parameter Method of acquisition Connect Server IP address port Manually entered or automatically obtained through Full action and retry count primary DHCP and secondary User ID Node ID Node Password Manually entered for first time configuration Obtained and TN from local storage on subsequent power cycles Installing the IP Phone 1110 Use Procedure 58 to install the IP Phone 1110
242. d Katakana Note In the case of the prompts locally generated by the phone for the Local Tools menu and in all local features the language is controlled locally by the phone Thus the two language selection mechanisms on the phone are one for local features which is selected in the Local Tools menu and another for TPS features which is selected in the Telephone Options menu For information about selecting the languages for local features and TPS features see the P Phone 1120E User Guide e Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series Features not currently supported The following features are not supported on the IP Phone 1120E e Live Dialpad e Group Listening e Set to Set messaging e Context sensitive soft keys Display characteristics An IP Phone 1120E has three major display areas e user defined feature key label e information line e soft key label Figure 31 on page 357 shows these three display areas 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 357 of 630 Figure 31 1120E IP display area s Upper display area NORTEL User defined feature key labels Middle display area Information line Lower display area Soft key labels User defined feature key label display The feature key label area displays a 10 character string for each of the four feature keys Each feature key includes the key label and an icon The icon state can be on off or flashing A telephone icon display
243. d right cursor control arrow keys on your PDA as navigation buttons to navigate around the skin and move through the menu items Display The display is located in the central area of the skin View messages and text on the display 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 241 of 630 Dialpad The twelve button dialpad is located on the left side of the skin Soft keys self labeled Four soft keys self labeled are located in the bottom row of the display The labels on these keys depend on the call server Programmable line feature keys Menus Six programmable line feature keys are located on the right side of the skin They are aligned vertically and are the same color as the display The number of features available depends on the call server MVC 2050 provides the following menus File e Keys e Help File The File menu provides the following items e Run in background e Paste e Contacts e Settings Exit Run in background Select Run in background to close MVC 2050 but allow it to keep running in the background so that incoming calls can ring on your PDA IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 242 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 After you have completed your call press the X in the upper right hand corner of the PDA display to close the MVC 2050 application and return it to the background Paste Select Paste to paste a telephone n
244. d ud 356 Local Tools menu password protection 02 0000 359 Key number assignments assess bXRNEACRRRLAGU RR V CR Re dE 361 Package compone s raaski sos dee ded edpod v dE addu eiie 362 Installation and Configuration iu cszuac eRprerdzsriRheracR ke pb es 363 Pill Duplek Mode 1 irss di bRPRG ERAS RESP PRA EHE ER p OE 380 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 383 Extensible Authentication Protocol sleleeeee eee 383 Reinstalling an IP Phone 1120B iiissuucseaace n hh 383 Replace an IF Phone TIOE itssevurd odd pub ope HE M Eee 385 Removing an IP Phone 1120E from service 385 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 346 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Introduction This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Phone1120E For information on using the IP Phone 1120E see the JP Phone 1120E User Guide NN43112 103 This section contains the following procedures e Procedure 65 Configuring the IP Phone 1120E on page 365 e Procedure 65 Configuring the IP Phone 1120E on page 365 Procedure 67 Enabling Full Duplex mode on page 381 Procedure 68 Checking Ethernet Statistics on page 382 e Procedure 69 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1120E on page 384 e Procedure 70 Replacing an IP Phone 1120E on page 385 e Procedure 71 Removing an IP Phone 1120E from service on page 385 Note After an IP Ph
245. dard 26 00 August 2007 Contents Page 13 of 630 Removing an IP Phone 1110 from service 04 342 Nortel IP Phone TI2UE iso d UO COR RR 343 CGMS E EEE A E TT ET ET 343 MOTE REEL TO T Lo o oo 1 L1 5 es 344 Desctipliol uad coss bessrepeqireqQi acce iret doped d pde 344 Components and TUncllolis code ehe ER ERE a Ed ER eg 345 upper TANCE os do cect none kqpebiuebprupicibetaoxedunsped 351 Features not currently supported esso ico uence eas tese RE Ric 354 Display characterises use ie op ERA TE REED E d EE PP dp ER be 354 Cleaning the IP Phone display sereem isses uso das xe ge erp E 357 Local Tools menu password protection 0 reno 357 Key number Ss Spes s 2 64 o bP equ E Re HORA REY CO EE RA HERE 329 Package COMPONCINE osse cred pRIGbEREQUEREquU ER EGG d Edd d 360 Installation and Configuration 361 Pull Duplex Wie 4 3 05 608d doe Yenhbe VeL etero cane vas EAS 378 TETP DNINAI UBSERUE cc la key cer ereka gen eee caked oe ed edged 380 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 381 Extensible Authentication Protocol icasccsos ecco eter PRESS 381 Reinstalling an IP Phone 0G sa cab phe d REO ERRERG DERE es 381 Replacing an IP Phone LI2UE oc ins ca siwueisadeiveneiseagives 383 Removing an IP Phone 11208 from service i553 cce crea kb ln 383 Nortel IP Phone 1140E 385 COMMING a oaacous age ERR ARA Vbi edP RA Ni Cod dedos 385 Miodu TET CETT 386 DascpBOlo edscod ich be
246. ddresses ports actions number of retries and failover values TFTP Server IP address Figure 67 on page 568 shows IP Set amp DHCP Information screen IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 568 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Figure 67 IP Set amp DHCP Information screen NORTEL 4 _ Use the scroll bar to display all the information 5 Press the Return soft key to return to the Local Tools menu or the Stop key to exit the menu and return to the telephone display End of Procedure 2 Network Diagnostic Tools The Network Diagnostic Tools menu contains the following menu items e P MaxPing MaxHop Ping Tracert Exit Use Procedure 116 on page 569 to use Network Diagnostic Tools 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 569 of 630 Procedure 116 Using Network Diagnostic Tools 1 Press the Services key twice 2 Press220nthe dialpad to access the Network Diagnostic Tools menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the IP Set amp DHCP Information option 3 Press the Select soft key You can press the Return soft key exit the menu to return to the Local Diagnostics submenu The screen displays IP MaxPing MaxHop Ping Tracert and Return soft keys Figure 68 on page 569 shows the Network Diagnostic Tools screen Figure 68 Network Diagnostic Tools screen NORTEL 4 Enter an IP address or use
247. de number and TN Enter the node number and TN using the keyboard or numeric keypad The IP Softphone 2050 is now configured and can be used Changing the TN of an existing IP Softphone 2050 This procedure is required for a new user of the IP Softphone 2050 application Procedure 41 Changing the TN of an existing IP Softphone 2050 1 Exitthe IP Softphone 2050 application 2 Restart the IP Softphone 2050 application IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 234 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 If the node password is not configured or is configured but disabled go to Step 3 If the node password is configured and enabled for the node go to Step 4 3 During startup the IP Softphone 2050 registers again with the TPS and the IP Softphone 2050 displays the existing node number and TN for approximately five seconds 4 Ifthe password is configured and enabled for the node the node number and password prompt displays for approximately 5 seconds enter the correct password within this 5 second period If the user activates the Clear soft key during the 5 second period the existing node and TN are cleared and the user is prompted for new parameters End of Procedure Removing an IP Softphone 2050 from service Procedure 42 Removing an IP Softphone 2050 from service 1 Exitthe IP Softphone 2050 application 2 Uninstall the IP Softphone 2050 application from the PC using the Windows Add Remove Programs 3 In
248. display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the one s response time the IP Phone 2004 attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the network diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current settings and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are presented the configuration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace backspace a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 When the Nortel logo appears in the middle of the display immediately press the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right 2 Atthe prompt EAP Enable enter 1 Yes 1 for Yes if the network infrastructure supports 802 1x port based network access control Enter DevicelD and Password If you select No you will not be prompted to enter Device ID and Password For more information on EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 94 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004
249. dset cord 2 1 m 7 ft CATS Ethernet cable Getting Started Card Ensure there is one Software License for each IP Phone 2002 being installed Ensure the host Call Server is equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card or a Signaling Server with the Line TPS application If an AC power adapter is required ensure the correct AC power transformer is used The voltage rating of the transformer must match the wall outlet voltage See Table 12 IP Phone 2002 components list on page 125 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 128 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 First time installation You must first install an IP Telephony Node with the Communication Server For information about installing an IP Telephony Node see Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 or IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 CAUTION Do not plug your IP Phone 2002 into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result Configuring the IP Phone 2002 Use Procedure 17 on page 128 to configure the IP Phone 2002 for the first time Procedure 17 Configuring the IP Phone 2002 1 Configure a virtual loop on the Call Server using LD 97 For more information about configuring a virtual loop see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 and Software Input Output Administration B53 3001 31 1 Configure the IP Phone 2002 on the Call Server using LD 11 For
250. e BeastPKktRx broadcast packets received e McastPktRx multicast packets received nPktDisc incoming packets discarded e OutPktDisc outgoing packets discarded e UnknownPkts unknown protocol packets discarded e ICMPType Code the last ICMP message XXX XXX DHCP Statistics Figure 57 on page 545 illustrates the data displayed from the DHCP Statistics submenu item 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 545 of 630 Figure 57 DHCP information data display page Configuration NetworkDataValided Yes No MAC AddressStored Yes No PerformDHCP Full Partial VLANEnable Yes No VLANConfig Manual Auto VLANIDsDiscovered Yes No PrimaryServer S 1 S2 2 FWVersion XXXXXXX 3 HWIDXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 4 SetIP Xxx XXX XXX XXX 5 SbMask xxx XXX XXX XXX 6 GtWay XXX XXX XXX XXX 7 PROMS L xxx XXX XXX XXX Port xxxx Act xxx Retries xxx 8 PROMS2 xxx xxx XXX XXX Port xxxx Act xxx Retries xxx 9 VLANPriority xxx 10 VLANID xxxx 11 DHCPRespondString XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 12 Servers Information SN XXX XXX XXX XXX Port xxxx Act xxx Retries xxx FailOver xxx IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 546 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities In Figure 57 e NetworkDataValided is EEPROM Network Data valided e MACAddressStored is MAC Address stored in EEPROM e FWVersion IP Phone firmware version e HWID IP Phone hardware ID e SbM
251. e nodes see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Port same as S1 port Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 Action Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Choose one of the following e for TPS only enter 1 e for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Retry Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Retry same as S1 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 PK S2 PK the Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Set the S2 PK to 6 or 1 Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information You must enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The default is ffffffffffffffff Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight VoiceVLAN combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 420 of 630
252. e 195 of 630 LD 11 Configure the IP Phone KEM Part 2 of 5 Response Description xx aaa yyyy cccc or D zz z Telephone function key assignments The following key assignments determine calling options and features available to an IP Phone Note that KEY is prompted until a carriage return CR is entered Where XX key number aaa key name or function yyy additional information required for the key Zz z additional information required for the key aaa The cccc or D entry deals specifically with the Calling Line Identification feature where cccc CLID table entry of 0 N where N the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1 D the character D When the character D is entered the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up to find a DN key with a CLID table entry The CLID associated with the found DN key will then be used Note The position of the cccc or D field varies depending on the key name or function You may enter a CLID table entry if aaa ACD HOT d HOT L MCN MCR PVN PVR SCN or SCR Some data ports require specific key assignments See the Meridian Data Services for information regarding these requirements Type xx NUL to remove a key function or feature IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 196 of 630 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM LD 11 Configure the IP Phone KEM Part 3 of 5 Response Description Key
253. e 349 of 630 IP Phone 1120E keys and functions Part 2 of 3 Navigation keys Message Inbox Shift Outbox Quit Stop Directory Mute Headset Function Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen The outer part of this key cluster rocks for up down left and right movements Use Up and Down keys to scroll up and down in lists and the Left and Right keys to position the cursor You can also use the Left and Right keys to select editable fields that appear on the phone Press the Right key to select the field below the current position or press the Left key to select the field above the current position Press the Enter key at the center of the Navigation key cluster to confirm menu selections In many cases you can use the Enter key instead of the Select soft key Press the Message Inbox key to access your voicemail box The Shift Outbox key is a fixed key that is reserved for future feature development Press the Quit Stop key to end an active application Pressing the Quit Stop key does not affect the status of the calls currently on your IP Phone Press the Directory key to access Directory services Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to a two way conversation The Mute key applies to Handsfree Handset and Headset microphones The Mute LED flashes when the Mute option is in use
254. e 493 802 1Q VLAN and 802 1p priority support industry standards for managing bandwidth usage full VLAN capability including a manageable integrated switch in the IP Phone allows VLAN and priority tagging for the IP Phone traffic and VLAN tagging for PC traffic VLAN filtering which allows the IP Phone to only see Voice VLAN traffic The integrated switch will pass DATA VLAN traffic to the PC Ethernet port This prevents the Data VLAN broadcast traffic from reaching the IP Phone For more information see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 and Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 802 1x Port based network access control industry standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP over a LAN For more information about 802 1x port based network access control see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 integrated hardware to support Power over Ethernet PoE for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection GARP The IP Phone 1150E supports the following user interface features graphical high resolution LCD display backlit with adjustable contrast USB port to support USB devices Note Powered downstream 1 1 compliant USB hubs are supported including USB 2 0 hubs if they offer USB 1 1 backwards compliancy Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC as per FCC Part 68 wireless device support A
255. e DHCP server Enter the IP Phone password node ID and TN manually using the dialpad For more information about DHCP servers see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Use Procedure 34 to install an IP Softphone 2050 for the first time Procedure 34 Installing an IP Softphone 2050 for the first time 1 Install the Voice Gateway Media Card For more information see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 2 Configure a virtual loop on the Call Server using LD 97 For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 3 Configure the IP Softphone 2050 in LD 11 At the prompt enter the following REQ chg TYPE i2050 4 Install the USB Headset Adapter If you are using the mobile adapter connect the headset to the adapter If you are using the desktop adapter you must IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 228 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 a Connectthe coiled lower cord to the headset cord with the Quick Disconnect connector Ensure the Quick Disconnect connector is securely fastened b Connectthe headset cord to the RJ9 jack on the adapter 5 Connect the USB cable to the headset adapter and to one of the USB jacks on the back of your PC or USB hub The first time the headset adapter is plugged in a delay occurs while Windows configures the device and locates the appropriate driver software During the installation you are
256. e IP Phone Using anything other than a soft dry cloth can contaminate IP Phone components and cause premature failure Display characteristics The IP Phone 2007 window based user interface has two display areas e Application area e Tools Navigation area Figure 11 on page 165 shows these two display areas 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 165 of 630 Figure 11 IP Phone 2007 display areas 03 15 1038am Nancy Conners i i I Application Area Tools Nav Area Note The display may differ from the above example To extend the life of the LCD panel the panel will go dark sleep after a configured period of time For further information see the JP Phone 2007 User Guide Application area The Application area provides e line and feature key status e information line display caller number caller name feature prompt strings user entered digits date and time information or Call Timer if provisioned in the Telephone options menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 166 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 set information e feature keys e softkeys Figure 12 shows the Application area Figure 12 IP Phone 2007 Application area Programmable line DN feature keys self labeled Nancy Conners Multi field LCD eee aie display screen Context sensitive soft keys Feature keys Programmable line DN feature keys
257. e IP Phone 1120E Table 39 IP Phone 1120E keys and functions Part 1 of 3 Hold Goodbye Visual Alerter Message waiting indicator Feature Status Lamp indicator User defined feature key labels Soft keys Fixed feature keys Expand to PC Function Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the line DN key beside the flashing LCD to return to the caller on hold Press the Goodbye key to terminate an active call When a message is waiting the red Visual Alerter Message waiting indicator lights Also when the ringer sounds this indicator flashes When the firmware is updating the blue Feature Status Lamp indicator flashes Note This function requires server support and therefore is not available on all phones User defined feature key labels are configured for various features on the IP Phones A steady LCD light beside a line DN key indicates the feature or line is active A flashing LCD indicates the line is on hold or the feature is being programmed Soft keys are located below the display area The LCD label above the key changes based on the active feature Note Atriangle before a key label indicates that the key is active Use these keys to access non programmable standard features The Expand to PC key is used to access external server applications such as External Application Server XAS 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 39 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Pag
258. e IP Phone to start with a cached IP address in the event that the IP Phone cannot connect to the DHCP server and obtain an IP address 4 Select Partial or Full DHCP a If you select Full DHCP then the following parameters are retrieved from the DHCP server aVvalid IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 IP address asubnet mask the default Gateway for the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 on the LAN segment to which it is connected the S1IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S1 action the S1 retry count This is the number of times the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 attempts to connect to the server the S2 IP The secondary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S2 action the S2 retry count b If you select Partial DHCP then you must enter the following parameters Screen prompt Description S1 IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 1 Port this is a fixed value 4100 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 293 of 630 S1 action 1 retry count 1 PK S2 IP S2 Port S2 action Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if S1 Action is set to 1
259. e Server Information menu option see Server Information on page 556 Set IP Information IP Phones which do not reside behind a NAT device display the following information Set IP SIG X X X X xyyyy GW X X X X Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX IP Phones which reside behind a NAT device display the following information Public Set IP SIG X X X X xyyyy Public Set IP RTP X X X X xyyyy Private Set IP SIG X X X X xyyyy Private Set IP RTP X X X X xyyyy GW X X X X Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 556 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Type of NAT Cone Ethernet Information The following information is accessed through the Ethernet Information menu e MAC Address Stored e VLAN Enabled e VLAN Configuration e VLAN Discovered e VLAN Priority e VLAN ID Server Information The following information is accessed through the Server Information menu e Node IP e Node ID e ITGIP Address e Perform DHCP e Primary Server e SLS2IP Address e 1 S2 Port e S1 S2 Action e SL S2 Retry Count DHCP Server IP Address 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 557 of 630 Using CLI Commands IDU commands The system based IDU command in LD 32 can be used to test the end to end IP connectivity of the IP Phone from the call server console instead of using set based diagnostics The IDU command
260. e XAS delivers business applications to the IP Phone For more information about XAS see Nortel Application Gateway 1000 documentation If the XAS supports graphical displays use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Graphical XAS check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port combo box Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Enable Bluetooth combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e Auto default Bluetooth wireless technology setting received through TFTP configuration e Yes Bluetooth wireless technology is enabled on the IP Phone e No Bluetooth wireless technology is disabled on the IP Phone For further information about Bluetooth wireless technology Appendix Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology on page 591 Upgrade the IP Phone 1140E firmware 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 44 45 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 423 of 630 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight TFTP IP combo box The IP Phone 1140E supports remote firmware upgrades through a TFTP process and an automated UFTP process The method to upgrade the firmware depends on the following Call Server software e F
261. e cannot connect to the DHCP server and obtain an IP address Select Partial or Full DHCP a If you select Full DHCP then the following parameters are retrieved from the DHCP server avalid IP Phone 2002 IP address asubnet mask the default Gateway for the IP Phone 2002 on the LAN segment to which it is connected the S1 IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S1 action the S1 retry count This is the number of times the IP Phone attempts to connect to the server the S2 IP The secondary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S2 action 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 the S2 retry count Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 141 of 630 the External Application Server XAS IP address b If you select Partial DHCP then you must enter the following parameters Screen prompt 1 IP S1 Port S1 action S1 retry count Description The primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2002 This is a fixed value 4100 Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if S1 Action is set to 1 The number of times the IP Phone 2002 attempts to connect to the server Enter 10 Description Installation and Operation P
262. e dialpad to fill in the information IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 466 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 S2 IP the secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1150E Note The IP Phone 1150E can support a primary S1 and secondary S1 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Port same as S1 port Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 Action Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Choose one of the following e for TPS only enter 1 e for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Retry Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Retry same as S1 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 PK S2 PK the Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Set the S2 PK to 6 or 1 Press the
263. e ico DUDE MORE RCE bb E trei dd 386 Components and MNCHONS iesscesest XR Ree s 387 Supported aeS o cio ese aces ense TRECE RACE Ru GS d PCS 393 Features not currently supported 2 coases sosccbrcre ome 397 Display characteristics e suolo e uec eR X RRERCSE ER SA 398 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 14 of 630 Contents Local Tools menu password protection renere 400 Key number SusrSonehnls erona epe E AER RERPPA DERE PIPERIS 402 Package Componenti 2 csorekbesbpbbeice Rei bre Spi PRAES 403 Installati n and Contibtfadofi s iicsesssewkaewe ieee E RE ERE 404 Pall Mules Wie Loose ed E Fe p REPE RE EP sae ERES EA 422 TFTP tire upgrade 2 ov eaio des creo eee 4s 4 AxERECERS 424 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 424 Extensible Authentication Protocol 2446424804 ed orbe RES RES 424 Bluetooth wireless technology iua bed Rd yx DERE aeRR 424 Reinstalling an IP Phone 140E o caceeskese Re Race ark inns 425 Replacing an IP Phone M08 2 tan eph ekerber ix me ERA EARS n 426 Removing an IP Phone 1140E from service 4 426 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Lisoas uwenxshakeReweas 427 Wong P TIT PI UTR 427 iol 0 eee eee ER ERO eee Tree ere ee rr 428 Dh ciii mI TU 428 Components and TUDCHODS 666g i e cede ne doe eden CREE EE Rd 430 SUDORE feds jee eo E p EE OVER I Hb ERN ede 437 Features not currently supported 2 52i aco s 441 Display Characteristic cirea s qe 4X3 xdg dara dO e
264. e model number for example 1200x The AC power adapter must be ordered separately if local power using the AC adapter is required because Phase II IP Phones include integrated support for a number of power over LAN options including support for IEEE 802 3af standard power Table 12 lists the IP Phone 2002 package components and product codes Table 12 IP Phone 2002 components list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 2002 package contents include e IP Phone 2002 Handset Handset cord e Footstand e 7ft Cats Ethernet cable Getting Started card IP Phone 2002 Ethergray with Icon keycaps NTDU91AA16 A0533404 IP Phone 2002 Ethergray with English text label keycaps NTDU91BA16 A0533405 IP Phone 2002 Charcoal with Icon keycaps NTDU91AA70 A0533406 IP Phone 2002 Charcoal with English text label keycaps NTDU91BA70 A0533407 IP Phone 2002 Charcoal with Bezell with Icon keycaps NTDU91AB70 IP Phone 2002 Charcoal with Bezell with Icon keycaps ROHS NTDU91AC70E6 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 126 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Table 12 IP Phone 2002 components list Part 2 of 2 IP Phone 2002 Charcoal with Bezell with English text label NTDU91BB70 keycaps IP Phone 2002 Charcoal with Bezell with English text label NTDU91BC70E6 keycaps RoHS Replacement parts 7 ft Cat5 Ethernet cable A0648375 Handset Ethergray A0788874 Handset Charcoal A0758
265. e network and the PC port e 100BT Full Link speed is available for up to 100 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port e 1000BT Full Link speed is available for up to 1000 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port For more information about Full Duplex see Full Duplex mode on page 424 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Enable PSK SRTP check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off The SRTP media encryption feature provides encrypted media A preshared secret is embedded in the Nortel IP Phone to generate and to exchange encryption parameters without any Call Server involvement IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 422 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 For further information about the SRTP media encryption feature SRTP media encryption on page 498 and System Security Management NN43001 604 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Ignore GARP check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off The GARP feature protects the IP Phone from a Gratuitous ARP Spoof attack from the network For more information about GARP see Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection on page 426 If an External Application Server XAS is available in the network use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the XAS IP combo box Use the dialpad to enter the XAS IP address Th
266. e port For information about VLAN tagging Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 Note The VLAN Filter check box will appear dimmed if you select No in the VoiceVLAN combo box Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Disable PC Port check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 182 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 30 31 32 33 34 35 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight DataVLAN combo box Press the Down navigation key to open the list box Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e No VLAN e LLDP VLAN Name VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received from 802 1ab LLDP e VLAN ID value manual selection of VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 Note f LLDP is disabled LLDP VLAN Name does not appear in the list Press the Enter key Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight PC Port Untag All check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off If DATA VLAN is enabled the tag on all traffic destined for the PC port is stripped by default To override this action deselect the PC Port Untag All check box If DATA VLAN is disabled the tag on all traffic destined for the PC port is not stripped To override this action select the PC Port Untag All check box For more information about PC port tag stripping see Appendi
267. e soft key to navigate through the layers of functions If there are only four functions assigned to the soft keys the More key does not appear and all four functions are displayed Key number assignments A maximum of nine functions can be assigned to the four soft labeled predefined soft keys Because they are predefined the user cannot change the key number assignment Functions are assigned to the soft keys in layers in LD 11 The Message key is numbered 16 Key numbers 17 to 31 are the four soft key labels below the display area See Figure 8 on page 122 Key numbers 17 to 31 support the features A03 A06 CFW CHG CPN PRK PRS RGA RNP SCC SCU SSC SSU and TRN See Appendix Appendix I IP Phone soft keys on page 619 for a description of these features Key number assignments at the Call Server are aligned with that of the IP Phone 2004 The mappings between IP Phone 2002 soft key numbers and PBX CPU key numbers are the same as on the IP Phone 2004 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 125 of 630 Package components The following information applies to Phase II IP Phones Product codes for Phase II IP Phones are different from previous sets See the product code on the back of the phone to confirm whether it is a Phase ILIP Phone The product code for Phase II IP Phones appears as IP Phone 200x The product code for previous versions of the IP Phone appears with an i in front of th
268. e version number of the application last reported by the server Dialing formats Dialing Locations settings set the dialing rules applied to properly route a call when a user dials a number The dialing rules establish prefixes to access local and long distance numbers using the location of the user s server To 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 255 of 630 establish the dialing rules and dialing patterns see Nortel Networks IP Softphone 2050 and Mobile Voice Client 2050 User Guide Profiles Each profile is a named file which contains a combination of servers and other attributes that control connection behavior and appearance of the MVC 2050 A number of profiles can be created and saved to allow easy switching among different servers feature programming and audio programming Profiles can be created selected modified or deleted When you select profile you can change the name modify it or delete it When a profile is selected all other Settings tabs see the selected profile The name of the selected profile is shown in the lower right corner on each tab From the Profiles screen you can do the following create profiles e delete profiles e modify a profile name e change the profile used by the application e export profiles e import profiles When a new profile is created and selected the values on all of the other tabs are set to the defaults for this profile
269. ecce eee n 318 Pull Duplek mode ee edbegibedia uere e p e E cte do odora 340 VETE tiie UBSERIB re uoo E ERR Pe he edd ees 342 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 342 Extensible Authentication Protocol 2 sc 2sc0s eee0esan0n56 342 Redeploying an IP Phone TEIL a eb bes eb baie Parier d 343 Replacing an IP Phone 1110 eeeese e ems 344 Removing an IP Phone 1110 from service sls esses 344 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 304 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Introduction This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Phone1110 For information on using the IP Phone 1110 see the JP Phone 1110 User Guide This section contains the following procedures Description Procedure 57 Configuring the IP Phone 1110 on page 319 Procedure 58 Installing the IP Phone 1110 for the first time using manual configuration on page 327 Procedure 59 Installing an IP Phone 1110 for the first time using DHCP on page 334 Procedure 60 Enabling Full Duplex on page 341 Procedure 61 Checking Ethernet Statistics on page 341 Procedure 62 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1110 on page 343 Procedure 63 Replacing an IP Phone 1110 on page 344 Procedure 64 Removing an IP Phone 1110 from service on page 344 Note After an IP Phone has been installed and configured if power to the phone is interrupted re entry of the IP parameters Node
270. ect No you will not be prompted to enter Device ID and Password For more information on EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 2 Atthe prompt LLDP Enable enter 1 Y 1 for Yes default or O N 0 for No For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 140 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 3 At the prompt DHCP Yes No enter 1 Y 1 for Yes By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Phone 2002 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Phone 2002 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments e Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 At the prompt Cached IP select 0 0 No default to conform to the DHCP standard and to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server Only select 1 1 for Yes to force the IP Phone to start with a cached IP address in the event that the IP Phon
271. ed To manually override this setting and enable ingress stripping select the PC Port Untag All check box IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 520 of 630 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 521 of 630 Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control Contents This section contains information on the following topics I t oductlol a dco oo ds a ae c ARRCPEGQcRE Gy RARE RR AG RES RP 321 Extensible Authentication Protocol esce eee e000es 322 PUN ZINN gc drip steer hnlag asec earpeee reese 2322 Introduction The 802 1x support is available for the following IP Phones IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 IP Phone 2007 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E IP Phone 1150E IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 522 of 630 Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP supports multiple authentication methods such as MD5 PEAP TLS and TTLS and represents a technology framework that facilitates the adoption of Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA schemes such as Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS RADIUS is defined in RFC 2865 802 1x defines the following three roles e Supplicant an IP Phone which requires access to the network to use network services e Au
272. ed Server Unreachable message is displayed The IP Phone uses this new mode of reregistration only when the Signaling Server explicitly tells the IP Phone to do so IP Phones clear all call information if they register to a Signaling Server or Line Terminal Proxy Server LTPS that does not support the ACF feature For more information on Active Call Failover see JP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Enhanced UNIStim Firmware download Enhanced UNIStim firmware download feature provides the following functionality for IP Phones Enhanced firmware file header that includes the IT TYPE and name string for each IP Phone type Revised definition of the IP Client s IP Phone identification Maintenance Mode for the Signaling Server that allows more simultaneous firmware downloads Note Maintenance Mode is not applicable to Voice Media Gateway Cards Identification of the registered IP Phones using string names and detailed identification of IP Phones that register as emulations of the base IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 UNIStim IP Phones are able to register with older versions of firmware when the UFTP servers are busy and are periodically offered the option start the firmware upgrade to the IP Phone IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 498 of 630 Features overview Enhanced UNIStim Firmware download feature requires a Signaling Server to be present on the node
273. ed traffic routing For example a GARP attack can convince the victim machine that the malicious device is the default gateway In this scenario all traffic from the victim s machine flows through the malicious device To enable GARP Protection during configuration see Procedure 79 Configuring an IP Phone 1150E on page 454 Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is a general protocol that fulfills the protocol requirements defined by 802 1x For further information on 802 1x see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Bluetooth wireless technology The IP Phone 1150E supports Bluetooth wireless technology GBluetootli For information about configuring Bluetooth wireless technology on the IP Phone 1150E see Appendix Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology on page 591 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 474 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Reinstalling an IP Phone 1150E You can reinstall an existing previously configured IP Phone 1150E on the same system For example the IP Phone 1150E can be assigned to a new user new TN or to an existing user who moved to a new subnet by changing the TN of the IP Phone 1150E Procedure 83 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1150E 1 Repower the IP Phone 1150E Note During the reboot sequence of a previously configured IP Phone the IP Phone 1150E displays the existing node
274. ed you can still enable password protection by setting the S4 IP address to 0 0 0 0 and by setting the other fields to 0 IMPORTANT With Full DHCP the vendor specific or site specific options must be configured depending on the customers DHCP server configuration For further information on configuring Full DHCP see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Accessing the Local Tools menu Once the password is entered the Local Tools menu remains active for 5 minutes You can freely navigate exit and reenter the Local Tools menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 404 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E without being prompted to reenter the password To reset the timer before the 5 minute time expires double press the Services key You can also press the 5 key to select the Lock Now item from the Lock Menu The Lock Now item immediately exits the Local Tools menu closes any open Local Tools menu pages and locks the Local Tools menu Alternatively when time expires the Local Tools menu and any open submenus are closed Double press the Services key to open the password prompt window to reaccess the Local Tools menu If you enter an incorrect password the Local Tools menu will not open Double press the Services key to open the password prompt window Only three incorrect password entries are allowed Any entry after the three attempts is ignored for 5 minutes The password prompt window is visible
275. ed at the far end the call continues using an unencrypted RTP RTCP stream The SRTP media encryption feature is supported on the following IP Phones e IP Phone 2001 e P Phone 2002 e P Phone 2004 e P Phone 2007 e IP Phone 1110 e IP Phone 1120E 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Features overview Page 499 of 630 e IP Phone 1140E e P Phone 1150E For information about configuring the SRTP media encryption feature see the applicable IP Phone section Note I During a firmware upgrade the SRTP media encryption feature will be automatically disabled Note 2 The SRTP media encryption feature does not support duplicate media streams encryption such as IP Call Recording Note 3 It takes as a few seconds at the beginning of the call for security to be established As a result the first few seconds of the call can sometimes be unsecured once the security icon appears the call is secure Note 4 SRTP media encryption does not work with codecs which have small payloads such as 10ms G 729 For more information about SRTP see System Security Management NN43001 604 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 500 of 630 Features overview 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 501 of 630 Appendix A Specifications Contents This section contains information on the following topics IP Phone power requirements iiicoceare ases RR IR ERR RERA 501 Environmental specications erede pe
276. ee Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 and Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 802 1x Port based network access control industry standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP over a LAN For more information about 802 1x port based network access control see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 integrated hardware to support Power over Ethernet PoE for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection GARP The IP Phone 1140E supports the following user interface features graphical high resolution LCD display backlit with adjustable contrast 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 399 of 630 USB port to support USB devices Note Powered downstream 1 1 compliant USB hubs are supported including USB 2 0 hubs if they offer USB 1 1 backwards compliancy Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC as per FCC Part 68 wireless headset support through Bluetooth guetootri 1 2 compliant Audio Gateway Headset Profile External Application Server XAS Graphical External Application Server GXAS language support English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Russian Latvian Turkish and Katakana headset jack with On Off key Note In the case of the prompts locally generated by the phone f
277. eed e AutoSense Negotiate Capability e AutoSense Negotiate Completed e Port VLAN Priority e Port VLAN ID e Packet Collision e CRC Error count e Frame Error count To reset the PCPort statistics to O tap the Reset soft key End of Procedure Procedure 113 Using the IP Network Statistics tool 1 2 3 Tap the Tools icon Tap the Local Diagnostics soft key Tap the IP Network Statistics soft key The tool displays the Reset NIPort and Exit soft keys and the statistics for the Network Interface Port NIPort IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 564 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities The following statistics are displayed e Packets sent e Packets received e Broadcast Packets received Rx e Multicast Packets received Rx e Incoming Packets discarded e Outgoing Packets discarded e Unknown protocols Unknown protos e Last Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP message type and code ICMP Type Code 4 Toresetthe NlPort counters to 0 tap the Reset soft key 5 Tap the NIPort soft key The NIPort soft key becomes the PCPort soft key and the statistics for the Personal Computer Port PCPort are displayed The following statistics are displayed e Packets sent e Packets received e Broadcast Packets received Rx e Multicast Packets received Rx e Incoming Packets discarded e Outgoing Packets discarded e Unknown protocols Unknown protos e Last Inter
278. eginning of the string Information line display An IP Phone 2002 has a single line information display area with the following information Caller number Caller name Feature prompt strings User entered digits Date and time information if the IP Phone is in an idle state or Call Timer if provisioned in the Telephone options menu The information in the display area changes according to the call processing state and active features IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 124 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Because the IP Phone 2002 only has a single line information display area you are prompted to scroll through any additional lines of information For example during an incoming call only the Directory Number DN appears if the caller name is greater than 10 characters Press the flashing arrow to display the caller name Soft key label display The soft key label has a maximum six characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a triangle icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a feature is enabled the icon state turns to On It remains in the on state until the feature key is pressed again This cancels the enabled feature and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state Use the Mor
279. el IP Phone 1150E Figure 44 IP Phone 1150E display area Upper display area Self labeled line programmable feature key labels Middle display area Information line Lower display area Context sensitive soft key labels Self labeled line programmable feature key label The self labeled line programmable feature key label area displays a 10 character string for each of the six line programmable feature keys Each line programmable feature key includes the key label and an icon The icon state can be on off or flashing A telephone icon displays the status of the configured DN Key labels are left aligned for keys on the left side of the screen and right aligned for keys on the right side of the screen To change the feature key label press the Services key to access Telephone Options gt Change Feature key label option For more information about changing the line programmable feature key label see the JP Phone 1150E User Guide Note lf a label is longer than ten characters the last ten characters are displayed and the excess characters are deleted from the beginning of the string 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 445 of 630 Information line display An IP Phone 1150E has a four line information display area with the following information caller number caller name e feature prompt strings user entered digits e date and time information if the IP Phone is in an
280. el display The soft key labels may show either text or icons The text labels are displayed by default and are changed using the Tools menu For further information about the soft keys and their icon equivalents see the IP Phone 2007 User Guide Tools Navigation area The Tools Navigation area provides controls for navigating between features and selecting tools The following five main elements are presented as touchable keys e Tools e Primary application e Applications e Telephone e Keyboard IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 168 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Local Tools menu password protection If the SECUREMENU parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration the Local Tools menu is locked to prevent accidental or unwanted changes You are prompted to enter the fixed password 26567 738 color set whenever the Services key is double pressed or whenever the Local Diagnostics and Network Configuration sub menus are accessed If the PARTSECURE parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration you are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access Local Diagnostics or Network Configuration menu items from the Local Tools menu You are always prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access the Lock Menu sub menu There are two ways to control the menu lock e DHCP Secure Menu option the IP Phone processes the secure menu setting retrieved from the Full DHCP response e Lock Menu o
281. emote firmware download TFTP Server based firmware upgrades language support English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Japanese Russian Latvian and Turkish IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 162 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 e External Application Server XAS e Graphical External Application Server GXAS Features not currently supported The following features are not supported on the IP Phone 2007 e Live Dialpad e Group Listening e Set to Set messaging Touch panel You perform point and click operations on your IP Phone 2007 using the touch panel The touch panel is used with the graphical user interface GUI to present soft keys directly on the display You can activate all Line DN keys and feature soft keys by using the touch panel Calibrate the touch panel Calibrate the touch panel through the Tools menu which enables you to fine tune the touch panel You are prompted to use the stylus to tap three targets For further information see Procedure 25 Configuring the IP Phone 2007 on page 173 Stylus Operate the touch panel using a stylus or your finger However use of a stylus is recommended to avoid damage to the touch panel Dialpad entry Note For ease of use Nortel recommends the use of the external USB keyboard 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page
282. end into the AC power source Ensure the correct AC power transformer is used The voltage rating of the transformer must match the wall outlet voltage See Table 30 Components list for US CA CALA AP and GC on page 277 or Table 31 Components list for EMEA on page 278 Figure 22 on page 282 shows the Power over Ethernet POE module Figure 22 POE module Network interface Power supply port Note Red LEDs on the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 indicate power Messages indicating system start up such as Loading Initializing network and Loading boot parameters appear after a short delay Figure 23 on page 283 shows the bottom view of the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Note The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 supports both AC power and Power over LAN options including IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 0 To use Power over Ethernet where power is delivered over the CAT5 cable the LAN must support Power over Ethernet and an AC adapter is not required To use local AC power the optional AC adapter can be ordered separately 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 283 of 630 Figure 23 Bottom view of IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Power Interface Module port Extension microphone jacks End of Procedure Startup sequence When an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 is connected to the network it must perform a startup sequence The elements of the startup
283. ense Negotiate Auto Negotiate Capability No Auto Negotiate Completed No End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 426 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E TFTP firmware upgrade When you enter Cfg TFTP 1 for yes and enter an IP address the phone searches for an upgrade file on the TFTP Server Note Users of CS 1000 Release 4 5 or later do not need to enter a TFTP IP address For further information about TFTP firmware upgrade see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection protects the IP Phone 1140E from GARP Spoof attacks on the network In a GARP Spoof attack a malicious device on the network takes over an IP address usually the default gateway by sending unsolicited or Gratuitous ARP messages thus manipulating the ARP table of the victim s machine The malicious device launches a variety of attacks on the network resulting in undesired traffic routing For example a GARP attack can convince the victim machine that the malicious device is the default gateway In this scenario all traffic from the victim s machine flows through the malicious device To enable GARP Protection during configuration see Procedure 72 Configuring the IP Phone 1140E on page 408 Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is a general protocol that f
284. entation from within the Voice Gateway Media Card is implemented in software for the IP Softphone 2050 It runs as part of the application code on the PC CPU If the CPU is busy with other tasks voice quality can be negatively affected The number of buffers used to buffer audio data between the application and PC audio hardware device driver is adjustable from the Settings Sound Devices window Using fewer buffers reduces the audio path delay but increases the chances of dropouts and choppy speech depending on the speed and utilization of the PC CPU This system wide registry key setting affects other applications and operating system components but is only effective if Windows QoS Packet Scheduler is installed For more information about Windows QoS Packet Scheduler see Windows QoS Packet Scheduler on page 232 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 219 of 630 For Windows 2000 the Windows QoS Packet Scheduler is not installed by default and the EnablePriorityBoost registry setting is not created For Windows XP the Windows QoS Packet Scheduler is installed by default and the EnablePriority Boost registry setting is created The default setting is 1 enable QoS Windows 2000 and Windows XP require a system wide registry key to enable QoS capabilities You must have Administrator privileges to create or modify the following value HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services Qossp Enab
285. er Programmable line DN feature keys self labeled Message waiting light Incoming call indicator Soft keys self labeled Navigation keys Message Inbox Outbox Shift Directory Quit Function Press the Line key to activate the speaker for on hook dialing and listening Programmable line DN feature keys self labeled are configured for various features on the IP Phone One must be the prime DN key A steady LCD light beside a line DN key indicates the feature or line is active A flashing LCD indicates the line is on hold or the feature is being programmed The Message waiting light turns ON to indicate that a message has been left for the user This light also flashes when the set ringer is ON Soft keys self labeled are located below the display area The LCD label above the key changes based on the active feature Note Atriangle before a key label indicates that the key is active Use the navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists in the display area Press the Message Inbox key to access your voicemail box The Outbox Shift key is a fixed key that is reserved for future feature development Press the Directory key to access Directory services Press the Quit key to end an active application Pressing the Quit key does not affect the status of the calls currently on your IP Phone 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 10 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 117 of 630
286. er on page 605 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 296 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 can support a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes in P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 searches for the connect server When the connection is complete proceed to Step 5 5 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description Password IP Phone Installer Password You are not prompted to enter the IP Phone Installer Password if it has not been configured in your system Node The node ID TN The TN or VTN Note Select the Shift soft key labeled gt gt and press Clear to edit the TN field The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 by default will place you in the units field of the TN You can not use backspace to move to the loop shelf or card fields The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 registers with the TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When the download is complete the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 resets Note The Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see IP Line Description Installation a
287. er Classification 2 To use Power over Ethernet where power is delivered over the CAT5 cable the LAN must support Power over Ethernet and an AC adapter is not required To use local AC power the optional AC adapter can be ordered separately Figure 28 on page 323 shows the IP Phone 1110 connections 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 323 of 630 Figure 28 IP Phone 1110 connections PC Ethernet port LAN Ethernet port d Tilt lever ell Link lamp lar AC adapter jack Handset jack 5 Install the handset Connect the end of the handset cable with the short straight section into the handset Connect the end of the handset cable with the long straight section to the jack marked with the symbol Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the handset cord through the channels in the stand so that it exits behind the handset through the handset cord channel The handset cord channel in the stand is marked with the symbol See Figure 28 Note Although a headset cord channel appears on the base of the IP Phone 1110 the IP Phone 1110 does not support a headset port IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 324 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Figure 29 Cable routing tracks
288. ers IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 548 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Remote Mode data display pages The following figures illustrate the Network Diagnostic Utilities data display pages in Remote Mode PING Figure 60 illustrates the data displayed from the Ping Diagnostic Tool Figure 60 Ping data display page Rx 64 bytes time xx ms Rx 64 bytes time xx ms Rx 64 bytes time xx ms For XXX XXX XXX XXX PacketTx xxx Packet Loss xx Min RTT xxx ms Avg RTT xxx ms Max RTT xxx ms In Figure 60 e Packet TX packets sent e Packet Rx packets received e RTT Round Trip Time for Min RTT Avg RTT and Max RTT 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 549 of 630 TraceRoute Figure 61 illustrates the data displayed from the Tracert Diagnostic tool Figure 61 Tracert data display screen Hopxxx RTT xxx xxx xxx IP XXX XXX XXX XXX Hopxxx RTT xxx xxx xxx IP XX XXX XXX XXX Hopxxx RTT xxx xxx xxx IP XXX XXX XXX XXX Hopxxx RTT xxx xxx xxx IP XXX XXX XXX XXX Hopxxx RTT xxx xxx xxx IP XXX XXX XXX XXX In Figure 61 Hopxxx the Hop number e xxx Round Trip Timel Round Trip Time2 Round Trip Time3 e IP IP address IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 550 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Ethernet Statistics Figure 62 illustrates the data displayed from
289. erveces HEP ODSEHUO S dapib b pP EE RO Pe IP RP pd d d epa 487 PWR Loo sd repURERQE RE piece d aquis dapi supe dog 490 Features overview eee 491 COGS ou eek o NEU boe ei aded eue d WM iq d eid 491 Miodio os obec ioe i rnerket REE ISS REPE ERE A Ep 49 Corporate DISOIDEY Looues cae eg Reece ER ERPCKRERer RARE aa CES 492 Personal DUSOONE 4 asoEearoUhicERECEEe bep EU Ede Rud ire 492 Beda L3SE oosied dn d ado Reet dei Ebo edP ep idi d ido 493 CAUSE Liebi 4 usur eee de swe Se eatt ia SERM ERE PAR E 493 Poss won Anis OHON s aaa biceed Vi pES ERE VR ERR seat ces 493 IP TUE Rondine nest tease Heb ee iet bb iit ohne 493 Wit OUNCE 2 56 aera VA RE TRERA UG RIPE VICE MORE EE REA 494 Emergency Services for Virtual Office iousscoss sce ase dar R 494 Aon ye UAL Failover uuu oio b E ehh cate ees REEHR d Regie 494 Enhanced UNIStim Firmware download 0 4 495 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 16 of 630 Contents SRIP media enctyptiO8 seerste ci where duat eedaspaxcen dain 496 Appendix A Specifications 499 ddl TC EEUU 499 Environmental specifications eris isr rra tkt r EAD Ae pb des 502 Regulatory and safety information 503 Other GompUaSict S sisi sau ha EAE ARET ERARE ES 506 DenAn regulatory notice Tor Fapana a 2ceeasece obti ep bbws 507 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description 509 no E Liao kgs eens mee ereerkes e dato deg aa ios qud 509 lines eii DTP cT
290. erver Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics InttodlCtlol uisa dede ER EEPRARQE GE ARRPSINRPSAS ERR CARO EO ERE 605 VETE Server pe seo ib od PS EYE SEPT ERP REPE anes 606 Pre downlodd checklist 2 064 2bcalia ed ERR ERRRLISGd oks 607 Update IP Phones Dnm cance cei dace a REW eR EIPERS 607 Updating the IP Phone 2007 firmware 0 608 Updating the firmware for IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone I130B 5 sueco es 613 A Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Server may be required in an IP Telephony system to distribute firmware to IP Phones The TFTP Server can reside on a subnet other than the Call Server and can be located on either side of the firewall IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 606 of 630 Appendix H TFTP Server TFTP Server planning CAUTION TFTP firmware download does not work when the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 is behind a NAT Server The TFTP Server holds the firmware for updating the IP Phones Assuming the IP address for the TFTP Server has been configured on the IP Phone each time the IP Phone is powered on rebooted or is manually reset the IP Phone checks the version of firmware against the version of firmware on the TFTP Server If the versions are different the IP Phone downloads the new firmware from the TFTP Server The following information must be considered when planning for a TF
291. ess 21 to show the IP Set amp DHCP Information menu or you can use the navigation keys to scroll through the list of menu items For information about the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E see Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E on page 581 For information about the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1110 see Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1110 on page 586 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu Page 581 of 630 Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E Table 71 shows the options in the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E Table 71 Local Tools menu options for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E 1 Preferences 1 Display Settings 2 Languages 3 Bluetooth Setup see Note 2 Local Diagnostics 1 IP Set amp DHCP Information 2 Network Diagnostic Tools 3 Ethernet Statistics 4 P Network Statistics 5 USB Devices 3 Network Configuration 4 Lock Menu 1 Manual Secure Local Menu 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu 4 DHCP Secure Menu 5 Lock Now Note Bluetooth wireless technology available on IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E is optional and is dimmed if it is not enabled IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 582 of 630 Appendix F Config
292. et mask the default Gateway for the IP Phone 2004 on the LAN segment to which it is connected the S1IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S1 Action IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 102 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 the S1 retry count This is the number of times the IP Phone attempts to connect to the server the S2 IP The secondary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S2 Action the S2 retry count the External Application Server XAS IP address b If you select Partial DHCP then you must enter the following parameters Screen prompt Description S1 IP 81 Port The primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2004 This is a fixed value 4100 1 action Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if S1 Action is set to 1 S1 retry count The number of times the IP Phone 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 2004 attempts to connect to the server Enter 10 August 2007 1 PK S2 IP S2 Port S2 action S2 retry count S2 PK Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 103 of 630 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media
293. ets destined for the IP Phone port are filtered based on the MAC address and the VLAN tag If VLAN filtering is not enabled on the telephony port packets destined for the IP Phone port are filtered only on the MAC address Filtering based on the VLAN tag does not occur This makes the telephony port susceptible to broadcast storms and a Denial of Service DOS attack Enhanced DATA VLAN Enhancements for DATA PC Port VLAN for the IP Phone include the following e DATA PC Port VLAN packet handling PC Port Ingress direction PC Port Egress direction DATA PC Port VLAN Tag Stripping IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 518 of 630 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description DATA PC Port VLAN packet handling Packets processed to and from the PC port operate as follows PC Port Ingress direction DATA VLAN disabled all traffic received on the PC port is switched based on MAC address The packets are not modified in any way DATA VLAN enabled all untagged packets received on the PC port have the 802 1Q header appended and the VLAN ID is set to the value that was manually configured in the Data VLAN field Any packet arriving on the PC port that is already tagged is dropped PC Port Egress direction DATA VLAN disabled all traffic received on the PC port has the 802 1Q header appended and the VLAN ID is set to the value which was manually configured in the DATA VLAN field
294. even characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a triangle icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a feature is enabled the icon state turns to On It remains in the on state until the feature key is pressed again This cancels the enabled feature and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state Use the More soft key to navigate through the layers of functions If only four functions are assigned to the soft keys the More key does not appear and all four functions are displayed 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 359 of 630 Cleaning the IP Phone display screen Gently wipe the IP Phone display screen with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not use any liquids or powders on the IP Phone Using anything other than a soft dry cloth can contaminate IP Phone components and cause premature failure Local Tools menu password protection If the SECUREMENU parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration the Local Tools menu is locked to prevent accidental or unwanted changes You are prompted to enter the fixed password 26567 738 color set whenever the Services key is double pressed or whenever the Local Diagnostics and Network Configuration sub menus are accessed If the PARTSECURE
295. evice Config file is saved but is not used The Bluetooth wireless technology administration setting is forced enabled or disabled respectively regardless of the value received in the TFTP Device Config file If the setting is then changed back to Auto the saved value will take effect if no further setting is received through the TFTP server Procedure 124 Configure the Bluetooth wireless technology administration setting 1 Double press the Services key 2 Press 3 on the dialpad to access the Network Configuration menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the Network Configuration option 3 Usethe Right navigation key to navigate to the Enable Bluetooth combo box The current setting is displayed 4 Press Enter to start the edit mode 5 Use the Down navigation key to open the list 6 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the desired Bluetooth wireless technology mode 7 Press Enter to select the mode and to close the list 8 Press Enter to exit the edit mode 9 Press the Apply amp Reset soft key to save the change and to restart the phone End of Procedure The new mode takes affect when the IP Phone restarts If the administrative control enabled Bluetooth wireless technology on the phone the item 3 Bluetooth Setup appears in 1 Preferences submenu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 594 of 630 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology After setting adminis
296. ext menu equivalents e Paste e Contacts e Settings e Toolbar toggle e System Input icon Toolbar icons The retractable toolbar contains icons which are not present on the remainder of the display The icons are located at the bottom of the skin and are visible when the Toolbar is retracted Use the Toolbar Toggle icon at the bottom of the screen to retract the Toolbar The following are the icons visible on the Toolbar e Mute Volume Down e Volume Up The following icons are visible when the Toolbar is retracted e Mute e Volume Down e Volume Up e Directory e Messages Shift e Services 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 247 of 630 e Expand e Copy e Quit System Input Panel To access the System Input Panel from MVC 2050 tap the System Input Panel icon on the Menu Bar on the bottom right hand corner of the PDA Consult the PDA documentation for a description of the System Input Panel You can use the System Input Panel to enter data for MVC 2050 and other applications Use the keyboard to enter data The default System Input Panels are as follows e Block Recognizer e Keyboard e Letter Recognizer The MVC 2050 application enables the keyboard to act like a dialpad interpreting the alphabetical keys as numbers For example J K or L are interpreted as the number five 5 Keys which are not alphanumeric are ignored IP Phones Description Ins
297. ey functionality and one IP Phone KEM With two IP Phone KEMs connected the Shift key functionality does not affect the IP Phone KEMs since the maximum number of line feature keys is already available The IP Phone 2002 does not support Shift key functionality Figure 14 IP Phone 2002 with one IP Phone KEM attached NORTEL Lagos 14 Features The IP Phone KEM has the following features e 12 keys on each side of an LCD provide up to 24 additional self labeled line feature keys Using the Shift key functionality an IP Phone 2004 can have up to 48 additional logical line feature keys 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Page 193 of 630 e A desk mount bracket and structural baseplate connect the IP Phone KEM to an IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 or to another IP Phone KEM e A wall mount bracket installs the IP Phone KEM alongside a wall mounted IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 Display characteristics The IP Phone KEM has one LCD between the two rows of 12 Line feature keys see Figure 14 on page 192 Each of the 24 physical keys on the IP Phone KEM has a 10 character display label This label is set automatically however the user can edit the label using the controls on the IP Phone To alter the display and contrast on the IP Phone KEM use the Contrast Adjustment option under the Telephone Options menu on the IP Phone Any contrast changes you make on the IP Phone affect the I
298. ey to open the list box 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 27 28 29 30 31 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 377 of 630 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e No VLAN e DHCP VLAN ID is configured automatically to one of the values received from the DHCP server e LLDP MED VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received from 802 1ab LLDP e LLDP VLAN Name VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received from 802 1ab LLDP Note If LLDP is disabled LLDP MED and LLDP VLAN Name modes do not appear in the list If DHCP is disabled DHCP does not appear in the list Press the Enter key For more information about VLAN configuration see Data Networking for Voice over IP B53 3001 160 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight VLAN Filter check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off If the VLAN Filter is enabled packets destined for the IP Phone port are filtered on their MAC address and their VLAN tag Untagged VLAN packets and tagged VLAN packets that differ from the Telephony VLAN ID are prevented from reaching the IP Phone port For information about VLAN tagging see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 Note The VLAN Filter check box will appear dimmed if you select No in the VoiceVLAN combo box Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Disable PC Port check box
299. f VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled Description Installation and Operation Page 332 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 DHCP 0 No 1 Yes VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes PC Port 1 ON 0 OFF PC Port Untag All 1 ON 0 OFF Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full PSK SRTP 0 No 1 Yes GARP Ignore 0 No 1 Yes If you select 1 1 for Yes the VLAN ID is configured automatically to a value received from the DHCP server You are not prompted for DHCP if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Au or if DHCP is not enabled Default O 0 for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTER if VLAN is not enabled Default 1 for ON Default 1 for ON Default O for Auto Default 0 for No Default O for No You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000 Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 A TFTP Server is not required for CS 1000 Release 4 5 With the Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature firmware can be automatically downloaded from the Call Server For further information about the Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 For CS 1000 Release 4 0 a TFTP Server is required to upgrade the firmware Enter the TFTP Server IP address 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 333 of 630 The IP Phone searches for the
300. f this key cluster rocks for up down left and right movements Use Up and Down keys to scroll up and down in lists and the Left and Right keys to position the cursor You can also use the Left and Right keys to select editable fields that appear on the phone Press the Right key to select the field below the current position or press the Left key to select the field above the current position Press the Enter key at the center of the Navigation key cluster to confirm menu selections In many cases you can use the Enter key instead of the Select soft key Press the Message Inbox key to access your voicemail box The Shift Outbox key is a fixed key that is reserved for future feature development Press the Quit Stop key to end an active application Pressing the Quit Stop key does not affect the status of the calls currently on your IP Phone Press the Directory key to access Directory services Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to a two way conversation The Mute key applies to Handsfree Handset and Headset microphones The Mute LED flashes when the Mute option is in use IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 392 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Table 44 IP Phone 1140E keys and functions Part 3 of 3 Headset Volume control keys Copy Speaker Handsfree key Function Press the Headset key to answer a cal
301. feature keys Key number Response Description Not Ready Make Set Busy Call Supervisor Emergency Note The In Calls key mirrors the programming of key 0 it is not separately programmable Table 55 Supervisor fixed feature keys Key number Response Description Observe Agent Call Agent Answer Agent Answer Emergency Soft keys You can assign a maximum of nine functions to the four soft labeled predefined soft keys Because the soft keys are predefined the user cannot change the key number assignment Functions are assigned to the soft keys in layers in LD 11 The Message Waiting key is numbered 16 Functions mapped to key numbers 17 to 26 are assigned to the four soft keys Labels for the soft keys appear in the display area For further information 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 451 of 630 see Context sensitive soft key label on page 445 Figure 44 on page 444 shows the IP Phone 1150E display area Key number mappings at the Call Server are aligned with that of the IP Phone 2004 For a description of the IP Phone function assignment for each of the soft keys see Appendix Appendix I IP Phone soft keys on page 619 Package components The IP Phone 1150E includes integrated support for a number of Power over Ethernet options including support for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 Table 56 lists the IP Phone 1150E package components and p
302. ference Phone 2033 Page 285 of 630 Procedure 49 Installing the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 for the first time using manual configuration IMPORTANT Timing information When you see the text Nortel you have 1 s to respond by pressing the three soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the 1 s response time the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the network diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 You will hear a tone shortly before the IP Phone is ready to start the Nortel IP Phone application Once the application has loaded and started you will see the Nortel logo and Starting DHCP will appear at the bottom of the screen To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current settings and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are presented the configuration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace backspace a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 Toenter the configuration menu press the three soft keys at the bottom of the
303. firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 1150E searches for the connect server The IP Phone 1150E registers with the Terminal Proxy Server TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When download is complete the IP Phone 1150E resets The current system date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN on the display Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more information see For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 and the P Phone 1150E User Guide End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 471 of 630 Full Duplex mode In the Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup Typically the IP Phone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate and it selects the best speed and duplex mode available There is no intervention required under normal operation Note Changing the speed and or duplex mode on the phone changes both the LAN Ethernet port and PC Ethernet Port interfaces IMPORTANT It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network
304. for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP over a LAN For more information about 802 1x port based network access control see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 integrated hardware to support Power over Ethernet PoE for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 2 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection The IP Phone 2004 supports the following user interface features External Application Server XAS language support English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Japanese Russian Latvian and Turkish IP Key Expansion module IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 82 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Features not currently supported The following features are not supported on the IP Phone 2004 e Live Dialpad e Group Listening e Set to Set messaging e Context sensitive soft keys Central Answering Position The Central Answering Position CAP operates as an Automatic Call Distribution ACD agent on the IP Phone 2004 A CAP provides call handling features such as transferring a call parking a call and answering a call You can add an IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM to provide additional lines and features Direct Station Select and Busy Lamp Field functionality For further information about Central Answering Position see Central Answering Position
305. for the first time using manual configuration 92 Procedure 11 Installing an IP Phone 2004 for the first time Going ONGP CI 99 Procedure 12 Enabling Full Duplex mode 106 Procedure 13 Checking Ethernet Statistics 107 Procedure 14 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2004 108 Procedure 15 Replacing an IP Phone 2004 109 Procedure 16 Removing an IP Phone 2004 from service 110 Procedure 17 Configuring the IP Phone 2002 126 Procedure 18 Installing the IP Phone 2002 for the first time using manual configuration 130 Procedure 19 Installing an IP Phone 2002 for the first time Using DHEP c te ccesescc ack seceuetiadeseceeae 137 Procedure 20 Enabling Full Duplex mode 144 Procedure 21 Checking Ethernet Statistics 145 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 List of procedures Page 21 of 630 Procedure 22 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2002 146 Procedure 23 Replacing an IP Phone 2002 L s 147 Procedure 24 Removing an IP Phone 2002 from service 148 Procedure 25 Configuring the IP Phone 2007 170 Procedure 26 Installing the IP Phone 2007 174 Procedure 27 Enabling Full Duplex mode 183 Procedure 28 Checking Ethernet Statistics
306. for the first time using manual configuration Use Procedure 59 on page 334 to install the IP Phone 1110 for the first time using Full DHCP Procedure 58 Installing the IP Phone 1110 for the first time using manual configuration IMPORTANT Timing information for manual configuration To enter the manual configuration mode you have approximately 30 seconds s between plugging in the IP Phone 1110 power adapter and the appearance of the text Nortel When you see the text Nortel on the phone you have one s to respond by pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right If you miss the one s response time the IP Phone 1110 attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the Local diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 Note f you are prompted to enter a password when you double press the Services key password protection is enabled For more information about password protection see Local Tools menu password protection on page 313 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 328 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current settings and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are presented the confi
307. formation the IP Softphone 2050 contacts the Node Master which selects a TPS with sufficient capacity to register the IP Softphone 2050 The IP Softphone 2050 contacts the chosen TPS and if the IP Softphone 2050 is valid registers it with the system The registration information is then saved to the IP Softphone 2050 Loss plan The USB Headset Adapter provides the IP Softphone 2050 with a fixed loss plan compliant with the TIA 810A specification If other headsets or audio devices are used the loss plan is unknown and undefined Nortel supports the resolution of audio problems only for the USB Headset Adapter Echo cancellation Echo can be generated electrically when there is an impedance mismatch or generated acoustically by feedback from a speaker or ear piece to a microphone Any echo that is ultimately returned to the IP Phone is more noticeable to the listener because of the additional delay introduced by the IP connection The Voice Gateway Media Card has echo cancelers included as part of its function that cancels echo generated on the TDM side of the Media Gateway When audio goes through the Voice Gateway Media Card the echo cancellers are enabled The IP Softphone 2050 has no echo canceller so a slight echo from acoustic coupling on the headset can occur in some call situations Clock synchronization Buffer underruns and overruns can occur since there is no sample clock at the receiving end of an IP audio stream synch
308. ftphone 2050 supports the following main components Call Control window Local Directory window Settings window System tray icon and menu third party supported applications 12050 exe application Call Control window You can use the 1140 Call Control Window see Figure 16 on page 210 or the Compact skin Call Control window see Figure 17 on page 210 to make and manage telephone calls IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 210 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Figure 16 1140 Call Control window IP Softphone 2050 Ele E Keys yew Hep s Line keys gt Line keys Display Navigation arrows Soft keys Quit yf vu Inbox Messages Services z A Outbox Shift Copy Oe e aj Directory Volume up NM Bee Release Volume down undi samt Ln Expand Mute n pros gruv guor 4 Answer Speaker o Hold Dialpad Figure 17 Compact skin Call Control window IP Softphone 2050 Fle Edit keys wew Help i26 204pm Cont Forward More Ao Sra bnc Tal Bane Suse Messages Outbox Shift Navigation arrows 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 211 of 630 Table 22 lists the elements and functions of the Call Control window Table 22 Call Control window elements and functions Part 1 of 3 Primary display Soft keys Release A Line keys Volume 4 increase E decrease t The primary display area provides call information for
309. gent port only through Bluetooth Bluetoott 1 2 compliant Audio Gateway Headset Profile External Application Server XAS 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 443 of 630 e Graphical External Application Server GXAS language support English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Russian Latvian Turkish and Katakana Note In the case of the prompts locally generated by the phone for the Local Tools menu and in all local features the language is controlled locally by the phone Thus the two language selection mechanisms on the phone are one for local features which is selected in the Local Tools menu and another for TPS features which is selected in the Telephone Options menu For information about selecting the languages for local features and TPS features see the JP Phone 1150E User Guide e Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series For more information about the Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 Series see Features not currently supported The following features are not supported on the IP Phone 1150E e Group Listening e Set to Set messaging Display characteristics An IP Phone 1150E has three major display areas self labeled line programmable feature key label e information line context sensitive soft key label IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 444 of 630 Nort
310. ggle this item on and off A check mark appears to indicate the item is active If 802 1x Authentication is enabled press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the keypad to fill in the following information Device ID e Password e Retype password IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 374 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E o0 n 10 For further information about EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Note f you do not enable 802 1x Authentication you are not prompted to enter Device ID and Password Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Enable 802 1x LLDP Enable check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off For information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight DHCP combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open list box following DHCP options e No 4disable DHCP support and enter IP network information manually e Partial IP network information IP address network mask and gateway address are provided by the DHCP server Enter Server 1 IP address Server 2 IP address Port Action Retry and PK numbers manually e Full IP network information Server 1 IP address Server 2 IP address and XAS information are provided by the DHCP server All items are dimmed to preven
311. guration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace backspace a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 Atthe prompt EAP Enable enter 1 Yes 1 for Yes if the network infrastructure supports 802 1x port based network access control Enter DevicelD and Password If you select 0 No 0 for No you will not be prompted to enter Device ID and Password For more information about EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 2 Atthe prompt LLDP Enable enter 1 Y 1 for Yes default or O N 0 for No For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 3 Atthe prompt DHCP Yes No enter 0 N 0 for No You are prompted to enter all parameters By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Phone 1110 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Phone 1110 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server Note A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP
312. gure 38 Release the IP Phone 1140E from the stand Wall mount lever Tilt lever 3 Remove the stand cover Pull upward on the center catch and remove the stand cover The cable routing tracks are now accessible See Figure 39 on page 410 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 410 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Figure 39 Stand cover removed Center Catch 4 Connectthe AC power adapter optional Leaving the AC adapter unplugged from the power outlet connect the adapter to the AC adapter jack in the bottom of the phone Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the adapter cord through the channels in the stand WARNING Use your IP Phone 1140E with the approved Nortel global power supply model N0089601 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 411 of 630 Note 1 The IP Phone 1140E supports both AC power and Power over Ethernet options including IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 To use Power over Ethernet where power is delivered over the CAT5 cable the LAN must support Power over Ethernet and an AC adapter is not required To use local AC power the optional AC adapter can be ordered separately Note 2 You must use CAT5e or later cables if you want to use gigabit Ethernet Figure 40 shows the IP Phone 1140E connections Figure 40 IP Phone 1140E connections Accessory Expansion Module port PC Ethernet port LAN Ethernet port 9 Tilt
313. he LCD display screen on the IP Phone 1110 The initial Contrast level for the LCD display screen is downloaded when the IP Phone 1110 is configured Selecting the Contrast tool automatically sets the LCD display screen contrast to the IP Phone s local contrast setting 2 Language Use this item to select the language in the local menus of the IP Phone To access the language used by the server based features press Services gt Telephone Options Languages To access the local language tool double press the Services key select the Preferences menu or press 1 on the dialpad to open the Preferences menu then press 2 to select the Language tool 3 Backlight Timer Use this item to adjust how long the LCD display screen remains lit when the IP Phone 1110 is inactive The backlight time is displayed in the format xxx where xxx is the time in minutes or hours Local Diagnostics For information about Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 1110 see Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 Network Configuration Use the Network Configuration menu item to configure the IP Phone 1110 and to display information which was configured during installation You can access the Network Configuration menu using one of the following methods e Reboot the IP Phone and press the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right e Select 3 Network Configuration from the Local Tools menu
314. he Local Tools menu on page 579 Key number assignments This section describes the following keys supported on the IP Phone 1150E e self labeled line programmable feature keys e ACD fixed feature keys e soft keys Self labeled line programmable feature keys The IP Phone 1150E has six self labeled line programmable feature keys which can support up to 12 DNs or features on 2 pages When a call is presented on a feature key which is not currently shown the message Shift for Call appears on the display area Press the Shift Outbox key to access the second page of feature or DNs or to access any Expansion Module 1100s attached to the phone The six self labeled line programmable keys are numbered 0 5 for the first key page and 6 11 for the second key page When key 0 is programmed as the ACD In Calls key the default features are assigned to the Automatic Call Distribution ACD fixed keys ACD fixed feature keys Key numbers 12 15 are used for the ACD fixed features See Table 54 ACD default Agent fixed feature keys on page 450 for a list of the ACD default Agent fixed feature keys or Table 55 Supervisor fixed feature keys on page 450 for a list of Supervisor fixed feature keys For a description of supported call features see Appendix Appendix J Call features on page 621 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 450 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Table 54 ACD default Agent fixed
315. he network resulting in undesired traffic routing For example a GARP attack can convince the victim machine that the malicious device is the default gateway In this scenario all traffic from the victim s machine flows through the malicious device To enable GARP Protection during configuration see Procedure 25 Configuring the IP Phone 2007 on page 173 Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is a general protocol that fulfills the protocol requirements defined by 802 1x For further information on IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 188 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 802 1x see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Reinstalling an IP Phone 2007 You can reinstall an existing previously configured IP Phone 2007 on the same system For example the IP Phone 2007 can be assigned to a new user new TN or to an existing user who moved to a new subnet by changing the TN of the IP Phone 2007 Procedure 29 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2007 1 Repower the IP Phone 2007 Note During the reboot sequence of a previously configured IP Phone the IP Phone 2007 displays the existing node number for approximately five seconds 2 Ifthe node password is enabled and NULL choose one of the following a Disable the password b Setthe password as non NULL 3 Press OK when the node number displays If Then the node password i
316. hich is the last message received by MVC 2050 before a normal session is started Recovering Server unreachable The Recovering Server unreachable message generates after MVC 2050 loses connection with the server It indicates that the UNIStim watchdog timer has expired and indicates loss of network connection Hard Reset The Hard Reset message indicates that the server has instructed MVC 2050 to reset and clear its UNIStim related memory This message maps directly to a UNIStim message 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 253 of 630 Hardware ID The Hardware ID screen is used to select the MAC address that MVC 2050 reports to the communication server The MAC address can be reset View the Hardware ID in the MVC 2050 Settings on the Hardware ID tab Hardware IDs are generated by reading MAC addresses from the PDA Network Interface Card NIC When MVC 2050 is used with most server types the Hardware ID must be unique Some software such as VPN client software creates artificial network interfaces with MAC addresses which are not unique Without a unique MAC address the following conflicts can occur e MVC 2050 cannot connect to a server MVC 2050 connects to the server but another device with the same Hardware ID is disconnected from the server e MVC 2050 disconnects from the server then automatically attempts to reconnect To prevent conflicts with other devices enable Au
317. holes by pressing the bottom of the stand cover firmly against the wall in the location where you wish to install the phone Four small pins on the bottom of the stand cover make the marks on the wall Use the marks as a guideline for installing the wall mount screws not provided Install the screws so that they protrude 3 mm 1 8 inch from the wall and then install the phone stand mounting holes over the screw heads You may need to remove the phone from the wall to adjust the lower screws When the lower screws are snug install the phone on the mounting screws and then tighten the top screws e Method B Attach the 15 cm 6 inch CAT5e cable position the stand over the mounting rivets and slide the phone down the wall so that the rivets fit into the slots on the stand 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 371 of 630 10 Replace the stand cover Ensure that all cables are neatly routed and press the stand cover into place until you hear a click 11 Putthe phone in the wall mount position optional If you wall mount the phone put it in the wall mount position by holding the Tilt Lever and press the phone towards the base until the phone is parallel with the base Release the Tilt Lever and continue to push the phone towards the base until you hare an audible click Ensure the phone is securely locked in to position Startup sequence When an IP Phone 1120E is connected to the network it must perform
318. hones download the firmware Nortel has tested the following TFTP Servers They are listed in order of preference e Nortel TFTP Server ONMS application e 3COM TFTP Server e Pumpkin TFTP Server Pre download checklist Ensure the following requirements are met before downloading firmware e ALAN must be properly configured and operational e The Nortel Telephony system must be connected to the network and completely operational A TFTP Server must be available on the network in order to load the appropriate firmware in the IP Phones Updating IP Phones firmware The latest IP Phone firmware files are found on the Nortel web site When the firmware is uploaded to the TFTP Server the files must be unzipped The zip file contains a configuration file cfg and a README text file txt with instructions to set up the TFTP Server and to modify the configuration file correctly so that the IP Phone downloads the firmware For future firmware upgrades update the firmware file which is stored on the TFTP Server Each time the IP Phone is powered on it checks with the TFTP Server to ensure it has the proper firmware version and it downloads the new software if necessary Use Procedure 129 to update the IP Phone firmware for IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 and IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 608 of 630 Appendix H TFTP Server For information about updating
319. ht DataVLAN combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 32 33 34 35 36 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 421 of 630 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e No VLAN e LLDP VLAN Name VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV e VLAN ID value Enter the VLAN ID manually This is a number between 1 and 4094 Note f LLDP is disabled LLDP VLAN Name does not appear in the list Press the Enter key Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight PC Port Untag All check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off If DATA VLAN is enabled the tag on all traffic destined for the PC port is stripped by default To override this action deselect the PC Port Untag All check box If DATA VLAN is disabled the tag on all traffic destined for the PC port is not stripped To override this action select the PC Port Untag All check box For information about PC port tag stripping see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Duplex combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box e Auto Link speed is auto negotiated with the network device and attached PC e 1OBT Full Link speed is available for up to 10 Megabit Full Duplex on th
320. ically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV You are not prompted for LLDP VLAN if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 Y 1 for Yes the VLAN ID is configured automatically to a value received from the DHCP server You are not prompted for DHCP if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Au or if DHCP is not enabled Default 0 for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTER if VLAN is not enabled Default 0 for Auto Default 0 for No Default O for No Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 61 of 630 Note You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000 Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 enter the TFTP Server IP address The IP Phone searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 The IP Phone 2001 can support primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes in P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3
321. ided by the DHCP server Enter Server 1 IP address Server 2 IP address Port Action Retry and PK numbers manually e Full IP network information Server 1 IP address Server 2 IP address and XAS information are provided by the DHCP server All items are dimmed to prevent manual entry Note A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Press the Enter key Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight SET IP Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Set IP a valid IP Phone 1150E IP address Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight NET MASK Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 465 of 630 Net Mask a subnet mask Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Gateway Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Gateway the default gateway for the IP Phone 1150E on the LAN segment to which it is connected Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 IP Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use
322. idle state or Call Timer if provisioned in the Telephone options menu The information in the display area changes according to the call processing state and active features Context sensitive soft key label The context sensitive soft key label has a maximum of seven characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a triangle icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a feature is enabled the icon state turns to On It remains in the on state until the feature key is pressed again This cancels the enabled feature and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state Use the More soft key to navigate through the layers of functions If only four functions are assigned to the soft keys the More key does not appear and all four functions are displayed IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 446 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Cleaning the IP Phone display screen Gently wipe the IP Phone display screen with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not use any liquids or powders on the IP Phone Using anything other than a soft dry cloth can contaminate IP Phone components and cause premature failure Headset support Press the Services key to open the Telephone Options menu and to access the Headset Type me
323. ied 192 MSHA aaadueat cosuekedL Ebpctrbs4Odkbgpoc bred bm bie 196 IP Phone KEM startup initialization 008 198 Operating parameters c oosceeccesesk ERG RERO RN XC RR aHRRY A 199 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 203 GONE Libauae Mead ined iab bed irbe ides inc sx eim 203 lios eco PTT 203 Dep a act pete dee ede E aed agde g iude We eke bom d 204 muppoded TeSblurea iu oseqapesiokbeiupt jite RerQbR E RPSL ES 206 CONDONE a cos oer bp eue u eudpd exp exu sd dei 207 Pes eq ute dpa ds des abu dco Ee RU EAIN EA EE eda 212 Key number sstgDmenis iussi kp RRRASRERESARERAGEEREN RR 220 Operating DArdiblefa uasa quee waseg amd Re bed d eid biu dd 222 Sye CORDOUUES etaeta dakoi ROTONDE gone 22A Deine yu DOS ca cc rontod eshi kerke R EEI npe E 224 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Contents Page 11 of 630 Piste Insballallon see eade r Edueirtesed EP UP rPE RP des 224 Installing or upgrading the IP Softphone 2050 226 Running the IP Softphone 2050 for the first time 230 Changing the TN of an existing IP Softphone 2050 231 Removing an IP Softphone 2050 from service 232 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 233 ge Mi uester popa p A ppt da Sd na btpuapadis 233 TatrGdBCUOoR iiio ua Ske PORK PpRERRdPFASWOP dad dad d 233 Vespa 61h oie E bU E Od VeRLE P Oque EE PPP du diu dd 234 Dysierm redii ekienl8 262s teen PE EESRDERESE
324. igured the DHCP lease expires and the IP address returns to the available pool IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 190 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 2 InLD 11 enter OUT at the TN prompt End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 191 of 630 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Contents Description This section contains information on the following topics Decl ue oxoessa eres bebe pRCRRACEER EPOR Ed Rui LEES 191 n P rm 192 Display characterisies 6y cod boeacecaasebaderd Bhabe ee dace 195 Key number assignments iioosadesbusxeseUbeRERERSA REG ERE pid 193 Package componens es rare ke re RR RE Y REOR E RO ace een 193 COnN bad akon Ske E ERA ES PRI ES RR dau SeoRE KES 194 IAGO PETERET 198 IP Phone KEM startup initialization esee m m 200 Operaning paramet ecg bbatQResER E RECERSAEEEQCE ERES 201 The Nortel IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM is a hardware component that connects to IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 and provides additional line appearances and feature keys see Figure 14 on page 192 Up to two IP Phone KEMs can be connected to an IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 With two IP Phone KEMs connected the IP Phone can have up to 48 additional line feature keys IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 192 of 630 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Note The IP Phone 2004 can also have up to 48 additional line feature keys using the Shift k
325. ilable There is no intervention required under normal operation 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 381 of 630 Note Changing the speed and or duplex mode on the phone changes both the LAN Ethernet port and PC Ethernet Port interfaces IMPORTANT It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch will result If the IP Phone is connected to a network configured for Full Duplex mode only the IP Phone cannot automatically negotiate the proper configuration Therefore in this instance to allow the IP Phone to work at the optimum speed and duplex mode Full Duplex mode must be enabled Use Procedure 67 to enable Full Duplex mode Procedure 67 Enabling Full Duplex mode 1 Double press the Services key to open the Local Tools menu 2 Press 3 on the dialpad to access the Network Configuration menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the Network Configuration option 3 Usethe Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the Duplex combo box 4 Press Enter to start the edit mode Press the Down navigation key to open list box Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e 10BT Full 10 BT Full Duplex mode e 100BT Full 100 BT Full Duplex mode 7 Press Enter to exit the
326. ill require a second CAT5 cable Only one cable is included with the IP Phone 1140E package Install the Ethernet cable connecting the PC to the phone optional Connect one end of the PC Ethernet cable to your phone using the RJ 45 connector marked with the symbol and thread it through the channel marked with the symbol Connect the other end to the LAN connector on the back of your PC CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug any device into your IP Phone 1140E PC Ethernet port other than a PC The IP Phone 1140E does not support multiple devices connected through the PC Ethernet port Install additional cables If applicable plug in optional USB devices Connect the Ethernet cable to the LAN Ethernet connection If you are using an AC power adapter plug the adapter into an AC outlet Note Complete steps 1 9 as needed before wall mounting the IP Phone Wall mount your phone optional Use Method A or Method B to wall mount the IP Phone See Method A using the mounting holes on the bottom of the phone stand or Method B using the traditional style wall mount box with a RJ 45 connector and a 15 cm 6 inch RJ 45 cord not provided e Method A Press the wall mount lever and pull away from the stand Using the stand cover see step 3 on page 409 mark the wall mount holes by pressing the bottom of the stand cover firmly against the wall in the location where you wish to install the phone Four small pins on the bott
327. in 8W 230 VAC A0619635 50 60 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Europe Power transformer 2 prong wall plug direct plug in AC to A0647042 AC 8W 240 VAC 50 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Australia and New Zealand Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 100 VAC A0828858 50 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA For more information and for information about previous versions of the IP Phone contact your Nortel representative Installation and Configuration The following sections provide a step by step guide through the IP Phone 2004 installation and configuration process e Before you begin First time installation e Configuring the IP Phone 2004 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 88 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 e Startup sequence e Installing the IP Phone 2004 Before you begin Before installing the IP Phone 2004 complete the following pre installation checklist Ensure there is one IP Phone 2004 boxed package for each IP Phone 2004 being installed The package contains IP Phone 2004 handset handset cord 2 1m 7 ft CATS Ethernet cable Getting Started Card e Ensure there is one Software License for each IP Phone 2004 being installed e Ensure the host Call Server is equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card or a Signaling Server with the Line TPS application e fan AC power adapter is required ensure the correct AC power transformer is used The voltage ra
328. in the future Use Procedure 35 on page 229 for a new installation of the IP Softphone 2050 Procedure 35 Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on the PC new installation 1 Insert the CD ROM disk into the CD ROM drive of your PC Note Installation should proceed automatically If it does not then continue with step 2 otherwise go to step 5 Double click the My Computer icon Double click the CD icon Double click the Setup icon Follow the instructions on screen to complete the installation o a Ff OQ N Select Start gt Programs gt Nortel gt IP Softphone 2050 to start the IP Softphone 2050 application 7 Select Settings to assign a server address select sound devices and select a server type Note f you are installing the IP Softphone 2050 on a Windows XP or Windows 2000 platform you must install the Windows QoS Packet Scheduler See Procedure 40 on page 232 End of Procedure Use Procedure 36 on page 230 to upgrade the IP Softphone 2050 on the PC IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 230 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Procedure 36 Upgrading the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC 1 Download the IP Softphone 2050 upgrade file from the Nortel web site and extract all files to a working directory Note See either the CS 1000 Release 4 5 Product Bulletin or the IP Line 4 5 Read Me First about download instructions Double click the My Computer icon and navigate to the working direct
329. ine of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN on the display Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more information see For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 and the P Phone 1140E User Guide End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 424 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Full Duplex mode In the Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup Typically the IP Phone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate and it selects the best speed and duplex mode available There is no intervention required under normal operation Note Changing the speed and or duplex mode on the phone changes both the LAN Ethernet port and PC Ethernet Port interfaces IMPORTANT It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch will result If the IP Phone is connected to a network configured for Full Duplex mode only the IP Phone cannot automatically negotiate the proper configuration Therefore in this instance to allow the IP Phone to work at the optimum speed and duplex mode Full Duplex mode must be enabled Use Procedure 74 to enable Full Duplex mode Procedure 74 Enabli
330. information about using Callers List with IP Phones see the appropriate user guide For more information about the Callers List feature see Features and Services 553 3001 306 Note Callers List is not supported on the IP Phone 2001 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 and IP Phone 1110 Password Administration Once the Station Control password SCPW has been set by the system administrator on the Call Server end users can operate this feature from IP Phones to protect private directory information stored on the Application Server For more information about using Password Administration from IP Phones see the appropriate user guide For information about the Password Administration feature see Features and Services 553 3001 306 IP Call Recording IP Call Recording enables an IP Call Recording Server to monitor the media stream for the active call and record it by providing the IP address and port IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 496 of 630 Features overview information for an IP Phone on an active call The following recording models are supported e bulk call recording records all calls on an IP Phone e quality monitor recording records individual calls on an IP Phone Note If the network connection between the IP Call Recording Server and the IP Phone is lost active calls cannot be recorded For more information about the IP Call Recording feature see JP Line Description Installation and O
331. ing the TN of the IP Phone 2004 Procedure 14 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 2004 1 Repower the IP Phone 2004 Note During the reboot sequence of a previously configured IP Phone the IP Phone 2004 displays the existing node number for approximately five seconds 2 Ifthe node password is enabled and NULL choose one of the following a Disable the password b Setthe password as non NULL IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 110 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 3 Press OK when the node number displays If Then the node password is enabled and a password screen displays Go to is not NULL step 4 the node password is disabled a TN screen displays Go to step 5 4 Enterthe password at the password screen and press OK A TN screen displays Note To obtain the password enter the nodePwdShow command in Element Manager For further information see Communication Server 1000 Element Manager System Administration 553 3001 332 5 Select the Clear soft key to clear the existing TN 6 Enter the new TN End of Procedure Replacing an IP Phone 2004 IMPORTANT Two IP Phones cannot share the same TN You must remove the IP Phone 2004 that is currently using the TN Procedure 15 Replacing an IP Phone 2004 1 Obtain the node and TN information of the phone you want to replace 2 Disconnect the IP Phone 2004 that you want to replace 3 Follow Procedure 9 on page 89 or Procedure 11 on p
332. install and configure an IP Softphone 2050 the host Call Server must be equipped with the Voice Gateway Media Card Understand the three configuration modes from which you can choose from as you proceed through the installation of the IP Softphone 2050 The 2 configuration modes are e Static IP address see Static IP address assignment e Partial DHCP see Dynamic IP address assignment Partial DHCP A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents if required must also be installed configured and running First time installation During the first time installation the two IP address parameters entered either manually or automatically depending on the installation configuration They are as follows Static IP address assignment 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 227 of 630 e Partial DHCP Static IP address assignment During the installation enter the IP Softphone 2050 parameters manually using the dialpad Enter the IP address subnet mask and default Gateway address You must also enter the Connect Server parameters including IP address port number action and retry count Dynamic IP address assignment Partial DHCP For a partial DHCP installation you must provide through the IP Phone dialpad the Connect Server parameters including IP address port number action and retry count Other parameters IP Phone IP address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from th
333. io clarity control audio quality This slider controls the number of audio buffers the PDA uses to smooth out incoming audio streams If you experience audio delay use the slider on the Audio screen to decrease the number of buffers 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 257 of 630 If you experience broken or choppy speech at either end of the call or the dial tone sounds choppy use the volume controls on the MVC 2050 toolbar to adjust volume while using the MVC 2050 If you experience reduced audio clarity in the receive audio stream increase the Audio clarity setting This increases the number of audio buffers used to process incoming audio If the delay is too large you can decrease the Audio clarity setting Advanced Audio Global IP Sound NetEQ software provides loss concealment and compensation NetEQ is the default setting and MVC 2050 Advanced Audio settings cannot be adjusted Table 26 provides information about the Advanced Audio screen Table 26 Advanced Audio screen Part 1 of 2 Selection Description NetEQ Global IP Sound NetEQ packet loss concealment software is the default mode of operation Jitter Buffer A Jitter Buffer is used to minimize a change in rate for arriving voice frames The Jitter Buffer sends voice frames to your PDA sound System at a fixed rate The rate of arrival of voice frames is variable The value of jitter is the normal numbe
334. ion Server 1000M Multi Group CS 1000M MG e Meridian 1 PBX 51C e Meridian 1 PBX 61C e Meridian 1 PBX 81 e Meridian 1 PBX 81C Related information This section lists information sources that relate to this document NTPs The following NTPs and documents are referenced in this document e IP Phone 2001 User Guide e IP Phone 2002 User Guide e IP Phone 2004 User Guide IP Phone 2007 User Guide IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 About this document Page 37 of 630 e IP Phone 1110 User Guide e IP Phone 1120E User Guide e IP Phone 1140E User Guide e Nortel Networks IP Phone Key Expansion Module User Guide e Nortel Networks WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration 553 3001 304 e Nortel Networks IP Softphone 2050 and Mobile Voice Client 2050 User Guide e Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 e Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 e IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 e Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 e System Security Management 553 3001 302 Features and Services 553 3001 306 Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Software Input Output Maintenance 553 3001 511 Online To access Nortel documentation online click the Technical Documentation link under Support on the N
335. ion of statistics and settings and retrieval of set information For further information about CLI see Using CLI Commands on page 557 Network diagnostic utilities include Network Diagnostic Tools Ping and traceRoute Ethernet Statistics IP Networking Statistics DHCP Information Process RUDP Statistics and Network QoS Process See Table 68 Network Diagnostic Utilities availability on page 527 for a description of diagnostic utilities available for each phone state Note Network diagnostic utilities are available on the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 in Remote Mode only For detailed information on Quality of Service QoS and Proactive Voice Quality Management PVQM see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 527 of 630 Table 68 lists the Network Diagnostic Utilities available on the IP Phone in different states Table 68 Network Diagnostic Utilities availability After IP Address assignment unregistered Local Mode Before IP Address assignment Function module Local diagnostic tools Yes Ping amp TraceRoute Registered TPS Remote Mode Yes Call in progress TPS Yes Ethernet statistics Yes Yes Yes IP Networking statistics Yes Yes Yes DHCP information process Yes part of information Yes Yes UNIStim RUDP N A statistics Yes Yes
336. iption Installation and Operation Page 132 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Procedure 18 Installing the IP Phone 2002 for the first time using manual configuration IMPORTANT Timing information There are only four seconds s between plugging in the IP Phone 2002 power transformer and the appearance of the Nortel logo in the middle of the display When you see the logo you have one s to respond by pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the one s response time the IP Phone 2002 attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the network diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current settings and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are presented the configuration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace backspace a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 Atthe prompt EAP Enable enter 1 Yes 1 for Yes if the network infrastructure supports 802 1x port based network access control Enter DevicelD and Pas
337. irmware is normally used only when you need to force the phone to restore an older firmware version To use this method the firmware must be placed on the TFTP Server and you must manually configure the phone to point to that TFTP Server The BootC firmware carries out the upgrade To initiate the firmware download task BootC must be triggered to run IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 616 of 630 Appendix H TFTP Server Note You can create the configuration file with a default file name such as 1140E img so you do not have to change the file name each time a new IP Phone 1140E firmware load is released However if you take this approach be sure to rename the released firmware file for example 0625Cxx bin to the default file name when the new firmware file is copied into the TFTP Server root directory and to update the VERSION string in the configuration file After the configuration file and the image file are in the TFTP Server root directory use Procedure 132 to upgrade the firmware using BootC Procedure 132 Upgrading the firmware for IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E using BootC 1 Hold down the Up and 2 keys and while doing so repower the phone When the phone restarts it will load and run BootC instead of the application When the Msg Waiting LEDs go off you can release the Up and 2 keys The following text menu on a white background appears
338. irmware upgrade When you enter Cfg TFTP 1 for yes and enter an IP address the phone searches for an upgrade file on the TFTP Server Note Users of CS 1000 Release 4 5 or later do not need to enter a TFTP IP address For more information about TFTP firmware upgrade see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol GARP Protection prevents the IP Phone 1110 from GARP Spoof attacks on the network In a GARP Spoof attack a malicious device on the network takes over an IP address usually the default gateway by sending unsolicited or Gratuitous ARP messages thus manipulating the ARP table of the victim s machine The malicious device launches a variety of attacks on the network resulting in undesired traffic routing For example a GARP attack can convince the victim machine that the malicious device is the default gateway In this scenario all traffic from the victim s machine flows through the malicious device To enable GARP Protection during configuration see Procedure 57 Configuring the IP Phone 1110 on page 319 Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is a general protocol that fulfills the protocol requirements defined by 802 1x For further information on 802 1x see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 20
339. is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Note The user should not make changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nortel Networks Any such changes could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 506 of 630 Regulatory and safety information Warnings e This is a Class B product In a domestic environment this product can cause radio interference in which case the user must take adequate measures e Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device V CC I B Table 66 lists EMC compliance for various jurisdictions Table 66 EMC compliance Part 1 of 2 Jurisdiction United States Standard Description FCC CFR 47 Class B Emissions FCC Rules for Radio Frequency Part 15 Devices Canada ICES 003 C
340. iss PIDQERXISRRRIBGRXNRAXRRECRR 294 Extensible Authentication Protocol wig csc ew ee gheed dawns en aand 296 Reinstalling an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 296 Replacing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 298 Removing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 from service 298 Connecting an extension microphone 2 000 299 Nortel IP Phone 1110 6 dice sca ck es od CAR CR 301 E IIR Cesar d ped Ua a greta be ace Su cw au ddp 301 lupus DCTTC T 302 Des mpi a dad eder og sobbed VERS Eos TEE KVeRbESepeE 302 Components and NENONS i sees ker ub EG Dr eO Ka topes 303 Supported Ieallies sissacsceeureveuerbesuaceq qs dabea pire 307 Peares aor Supported 2 62 o bob OR PP ed EP ep P did obi 309 Display characterises a esaet bae acras bea EEA ENER ers 309 Local Tools menu password protection lsleeeesees 311 Key mmber Ssarenmnenhls 51563 4 0 E CIR EO PESEE RP ET edd 2313 Package compon AS ss cassie eet Sr eR RR ERE an eR ARR 314 Installation and Configuration iicesestes area cepRRCEHRER E ORA 316 Full Duples Wilasosoosos ke Od Pao Pe EET Edda quse p A 338 TBIP ru waeupstade onse ox eR RR eX RR ien 340 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 340 Extensible Authentication Protocol 5 2224 RRRE Y 3X ER ERES 340 Redeploging an IP Phone 1110 sacco e RR ym 341 Replacing an IP Phone TITO 5 5 cccsnsseuresw a p RE RE CR CEdoR Rn 342 553 3001 368 Stan
341. ith the Communication Server For information about installing an IP telephony node see Signaling Server IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 408 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 or IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug your IP Phone 1140E into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result Configuring the IP Phone 1140E You must configure the IP Phone 1140E before you can use it Use Procedure 72 on page 408 to configure the IP Phone 1140E for the first time Procedure 72 Configuring the IP Phone 1140E 1 Configure a virtual loop on the Call Server using LD 97 For more information about configuring a virtual loop see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 and Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 2 Configure the IP Phone 1140E on the Call Server as IP Phone 2004 using LD 11 At the prompt enter the following REQ chg TYPE 12004 For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 CAUTION The IP Phone 1140E is shipped with the stand locked in position To avoid damaging the IP Phone press the wall mount lever located under the Handsfree key to release the stand and pull it away from the phone See Figure 38 on page 409 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 409 of 630 Fi
342. kets transmitted by the IP Phone have the same VOICE VLAN ID If DATA VLAN is enabled the IP Phone will add the DATA VLAN ID to untagged traffic However if the traffic arriving on the PC port is already tagged the frame will pass through unchanged Each VLAN ID is specified as follows e The default VLAN ID is 000 hex e The VOICE and DATA VLAN IDs can be specified in the manual configuration user interface e Or in the case of the VOICE VLAN ID the VOICE VLAN ID can also be configured by the DHCP parameter when using the Automatic VLAN discovery using DHCP approach Automatic VOICE VLAN ID configuration As part of the 802 1Q feature there is an option to automatically discover the VOICE VLAN ID using DHCP This process reduces the configuration steps since entering data manually the VOICE VLAN ID is not required IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 516 of 630 Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description When the Automatic VOICE VLAN Discovery using DHCP approach is used and the IP Phone has been configured as such the following steps are automatically taken to obtain the VOICE VLAN ID 1 The IP Phones perform an initial DHCP Discovery Request in the default VLAN The DHCP server returns a DHCP Ack message with an IP address in the data VLAN and one or more voice VLAN IDs in the vendor specific field The IP Phone reads and saves the VOICE VLAN IDs The IP Phone rejects the DHCP offer accepts it
343. l DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description set IP A valid IP Phone 2001 IP address net msk A subnet mask def gw The default Gateway for the IP Phone 2001 on the LAN segment to which the IP Phone 2001 is connected IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 58 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 5 Enter the information for the primary Connect Server 81 and the secondary Connect Server S2 S1 IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2001 S1 Port This is a fixed value 4100 1 action Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if S1 Action is set to 1 S1 retry count The number of times the IP Phone 2001 attempts to connect to the server Enter 10 1 PK Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Set 81 PK to 6or 1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number S2 IP The secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2001 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 200
344. l Load NTDU96AB NTYSO3AA NTYSO3BA NTYSO5AA NTYSO5BA NTYSO6AA NTYSO6BA NTYS15AAE6 Note 1 Heavy load is defined as all LEDs on and 1 kHz tone on the speaker Note 2 Normal load is defined as set powered up IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 504 of 630 Appendix A Specifications Environmental specifications Table 65 shows the environmental specifications of IP Phones Table 65 Environmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature 5 to 40 C ambient Operating humidity 5 to 95 RH 29 g m3 mean absolute humidity Storage temperature 40 to 470 C 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 505 of 630 Regulatory and safety information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user
345. l using the headset or to switch a call from the handset or Handsfree to the headset Press the Headset key twice to access Bluetooth Setup menu If Bluetooth wireless technology is not enabled this menu is not available Use the Volume control keys to adjust the volume of the handset headset speaker ringer and Handsfree feature Press the volume key with the loudspeaker icon to increase volume press the volume key without the loudspeaker icon to decrease volume Press the Copy Key to copy entries to your Personal Directory from other lists such as the Caller List Redial List and Corporate Directory Press the Handsfree key to activate the speaker Press the Handsfree key to activate handsfree The LED lights to indicate when the handsfree feature is active 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 393 of 630 Services menu Table 45 shows the Services menu Table 45 Services menu Services Press the Services key to access the following items Telephone Options see Notes 1 and 2 Volume Adjustment Contrast Adjustment Language Date Time Display diagnostics Local Dialpad Tone Set Info Diagnostics Call Log Options Ring type Call Timer OnHook Default Path Change Feature Key Label Name Display Format Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Branch Office is configured Password Admin
346. label display The feature key label area displays a ten character string for each of the twelve programmable line DN feature keys Each key includes the key label and an icon The icon state can be on off or flashing Key labels are left aligned for keys on the left side of the screen and right aligned for keys on the right side of the screen If a label is longer than ten characters the last ten characters are displayed and the excess characters are deleted from the beginning of the string 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 167 of 630 Context sensitive soft key label display The context sensitive soft key label has a maximum of six characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a triangle icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a soft key is enabled the icon state changes to on It remains in the on state until the soft key is pressed again This cancels the enabled soft key and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state Use the More key to navigate through the layers of functions If there are only four functions assigned to the soft keys the More key does not appear and all four functions are displayed Note Soft key labels support different languages Feature key lab
347. lass B Emissions Interference Causing Equipment Standard Digital Apparatus Australia New Zealand AS NZS 3548 Class B Emissions Information technology equipment CISPR 22 Radio disturbance 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 66 EMC compliance Part 2 of 2 Jurisdiction European Community Standard EN55022 Regulatory and safety information Page 507 of 630 Description Class B Emissions Information technology equipment Radio disturbance EN 55024 Information technology equipment Immunity characteristics Limits and methods of measurement EN 61000 3 2 Limits for harmonic current emissions equipment input current lt 16 A per phase EN 61000 3 3 Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current lt 16 A Table 67 VCCI Regulations for voluntary control measures Table 67 lists Safety compliance for various jurisdictions Safety compliance Jurisdiction United States Standard UL 60950 1 Description Safety of Information Technology Equipment Canada CSA 60950 1 03 Safety of Information Technology Equipment European Community EN 60950 1 ITE equipment Safety Part 1 General requirements Australia New Zealand AS NZS 60950 1 2003 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Other Safety Approvals IEC 60950 1 ITE equipment Safet
348. lay does not light up or lights up and then goes blank or fails to begin flashing check that the Expansion Modules is correctly installed and configured Note Expansion Module The Expansion Modules display flashes until it establishes establishes communication with the IP Phone communication with the IP Phone If the Expansion Modules display does not stop flashing communication is not established with the IP Phone Check that the Expansion Modules is correctly installed and configured Expansion Module The key labels download to the Expansion Modules During downloads key maps the download the display is blank When the three phases complete successfully you are ready to use the additional self labeled line programmable feature keys on the Expansion Module If you have a second or a third Expansion Module installed on your IP Phone the one to the immediate right of the IP Phone must be functional so that subsequent Expansion Module to work This is necessary because the second Expansion Module receives its power and communicates with the IP Phone through the first Expansion Module and the third Expansion Module receives its power and communicates with the IP Phone through the second Expansion Module IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 488 of 630 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Operating parameters If the Expansion Module does not respond and lines or features a
349. lay screen volume control bar for adjusting ringer speaker handset and headset volume speaker for on hook dialing or on hook listening four call processing fixed keys Hold Goodbye Handsfree Mute Call Duration Timer IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 160 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 e ability to change the user defined feature key labels Note Feature keys will support English characters only e Corporate Directory e Personal Directory e Redial List e Callers List e Password Administration e Virtual Office e Branch Office e Active Call Failover Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download The IP Phone 2007 supports the following data networking features e integrated switch for shared PC access LAN Ethernet port supports 10 100BT Mbps Full Duplex mode PC Ethernet port supports 10 100BT Mbps Full Duplex mode e automatic network configuration through DHCP For more information about automatic network configuration see Table 19 IP Phone 2007 IP parameters on page 176 e 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP For more information about LLDP Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 e Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP media encryption For more information about SRTP media encryption see Features overview on page 493 e 802 1Q VLAN and 802 1p priority support industry standards for managing bandwidth usage
350. lays the status of the configured DN Key labels are left aligned for keys on the left side of the screen and right aligned for keys on the right side of the screen To change the feature key label press the Services key to access Telephone Options gt Change Feature key label option For more information about changing the feature key label see the IP Phone 1140E User Guide 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 401 of 630 Note If a label is longer than ten characters the last ten characters are displayed and the excess characters are deleted from the beginning of the string Information line display The IP Phone 1140E has a three line information display area with the following information caller number caller name e feature prompt strings user entered digits e date and time information if the IP Phone is in an idle state or Call Timer if provisioned in the Telephone options menu The information in the display area changes according to the call processing state and active features Soft key label display The soft key label has a maximum of seven characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a triangle icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a feature is enabled the icon state turns
351. le is attached to the right side of the second Expansion Module IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 486 of 630 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series 5 Adjust the height of the IP Phone tilt adjustment to a comfortable viewing angle Then adjust each of the Expansion Module footstands so they are flush to the desk surface Turn the wheel on the back right side of the Expansion Module to the right if viewed from the front to tighten the Expansion Module CAUTION Do not over tighten the wheel on the Expansion Module 6 Connect power to the IP Phone The Expansion Module powers up Note The Expansion Module uses the electrical connection of the IP Phone for power It does not have its own power source End of Procedure Expansion Module startup initialization After the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series is been installed and powered up on the IP Phone the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series initializes 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Page 487 of 630 Table 59 lists the initialization process for the Expansion Module Table 59 Startup initialization process for the Expansion Module 1 Expansion Module The self test confirms the operation of the Expansion performs self test Modules local memory CPU and other circuitry While undergoing this self test the Expansion Modules display lights up Note f the Expansion Modules disp
352. lePriorityBoost Value 0 do not enable QoS Value 1 enable QoS Trace utilities can be used to verify QoS settings See Ethereal traces on page 221 QoS settings The IP Softphone Version 1 includes a QoS tab in the Configuration utility You can enable or disable 802 1Q p settings The QoS tab provides the following settings e Enable sends 802 1Q p whether it is supported by the network or not e Disable does not send 802 1Q p whether it is supported by the network or not e Automatic Detection sends 802 1Q p packet which requires a response from the TPS If the TPS replies 802 1Q p is used If the TPS does not reply the same packet is sent without 802 1Q p If the TPS replies then 802 1Q p is not used To prevent improper assignment of these settings this tab is removed in IP Softphone Version 2 The 802 1Q p settings are automatically detected QoS is otherwise supported in IP Softphone 2050 Version 2 as it was in IP Softphone 2050 Version 1 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 220 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 i2050QosSvc exe 12050QosSvc exe provides QoS tagging to outgoing 2050 IP packets When the IP Softphone 2050 application opens a socket the 12050QosS vc software monitors traffic destined for the specified IP address and port 12050QosSvc software sets DiffServ QoS priority bits 802 1 p priority bits in the 802 1Q header can be set 802 1Q headers must be enabled by the
353. lementation of behavioral requirements specified by LLDP MED The 802 1ab feature provides automatic configuration of the IP Phone s network policy parameters such as VLAN ID as well as automatic detection of misconfigurations such as Duplex discrepancies The 802 1ab feature is enabled by default However you can disable the feature during manual configuration For information about 802 1ab configuration see the applicable IP Phone section 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 525 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics IntfOdBCUof dise esse pE RR soedn eee PR RPG AERE doi ea 525 Text based diagnostic UtilvDes iure odie be b REY 3S hinar Gtk 526 Network diagnostic nes iuridicae bu eximie RARE 526 Accessing Network Diagnostic utilities from the IP Phone 529 Network Diagnostic Utilities data display pages 540 Network Address Translation Traversal 4 3553 General Information acces esee RR RR EROR ERG COO RR 554 Using CLE Commands ico iso eX D Pes ERedqapPESi Ed 357 Graphic based diagnostics UUNUCS iiu usce ko e RD ER ER 559 Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 2007 560 Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone LIS0 LLL osudrsa dE elise EUR E RO ARE ance dans diatur dead 566 Two methods of accessing IP Phone diagnostic utilities are text b
354. line The Info Line is the first top line of display text The left ten character area shows the Call Server type The right part of the Info Line shows the current time and date Info window The Info Window display area that shows prompts and information about calls During a call the information area is used to display dialed digits calling line ID called party name application specific information and various messages such as Release and Try Again When the information exceeds 3 x 24 characters a scroll icon tells the user to press the scroll keys to view the second line of the display Soft key label display A maximum of ten functions can be assigned to the soft keys Functions are assigned to the soft keys in layers in LD 11 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 215 of 630 Use the More soft key to navigate through the layers of functions If only 4 functions are assigned to the soft keys the More key does not appear and all four functions are displayed The soft key label has a maximum of 7 characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a flashing icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a feature 1s enabled the icon state turns to ON It remains in the ON state until the feature key is p
355. ll Server associates the new IP Phone 1120E with the existing TN End of Procedure Removing an IP Phone 1120E from service Procedure 71 Removing an IP Phone 1120E from service 1 Disconnect the IP Phone 1120E from the network or turn off the power Note The service to the PC is disconnected as well if the PC is connected to the IP Phone 1120E If the IP Phone 1120E was automatically configured the DHCP lease expires and the IP address returns to the available pool 2 InLD 11 enter OUT at the TN prompt End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 386 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 387 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Contents This section contains information on the following topics INGCIMENON soo cag oboe P breiqbsesares42Q eqaiX Re SERE pred 388 beg M P EET 388 Components and Tunctiofns eeslsss ee eR mn 389 Supporti TEAMS eii oue ced ibPeerceed dms reu ire dd dud 395 Features not curently suppomted 64 5260 40d causa Cased e rikete 399 Display characteristics a esces secre meh RR eR RR RR dee a 400 Local Tools menu password protection 0 0 00 402 Key number du EDI a2 403 9 99 b EEXORH RO d EE E IHERES 404 Package components ee risers neci Ree uae de dens Ree eR a 405 Installation and Configuration ssscrriccsrsrireisissanisss 406 Full Duplcs mode suras dd p EPA RU etone e ie Ke ded edid 424 TEIP rawere Upgrade
356. llowing web site to obtain the telephone number for your region www nortel com callus Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers you can use an Express Routing Code ERC to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service To locate the ERC for your product or service go to www nortel com erc Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 33 of 630 About this document Subject This document is a global document Contact your system supplier or your Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described is supported in your area This document contains description installation and administration information for the following Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Nortel IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 and IP Phone 2007 Nortel IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 for Personal Digital Assistants PDAs Nortel IP Phone 1110 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Nortel IP Phone 1140E Nortel IP Phone 1150E Nortel Expansion Module 1100 Note on legacy products and releases This NTP contains information about systems compone
357. lowing figures illustrate the Network Diagnostic Utilities data display pages in Local Mode Ping Figure 53 illustrates the data displayed from the Ping diagnostic tool Figure 53 PING data display page Pinging XXX XXX XXX XXX Ping Statistics Packet Tx Xxxxxxxxxx Packet Rx XXXXXXXXXX Packet Loss xx 96 Round Trip Times ms Min xxxxx Max xxxxx AVg XXXXX In Figure 53 e PacketTx packets sent e PacketRx packets received TraceRoute Figure 54 on page 542 illustrates the data displayed from the TraceRoute diagnostic tool Browse through the last 30 items by pressing the Navigation keys IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 542 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Figure 54 TraceRoute data display screen XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX IP XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX IP XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX IP XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX IP XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX IP XXX XXX XXX XXX In Figure 54 e xxx Time To Live TTL Round Trip Timel Round Trip Time2 Round Trip Time3 e IP IP address Ethernet Statistics Figure 55 on page 543 illustrates the data displayed from the Ethernet Statistics submenu item 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 543 of 630 Figure 55 Ethernet Statistics data display page 1 Link UP Down 2 Duplex Full Half 3 Speed xxx MB 4
358. ly configured the DHCP lease expires and the IP address returns to the available pool 2 InLD 11 enter OUT at the TN prompt End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 73 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Contents This section contains information on the following topics InttGdlctioli acies ize bRORTURS E FERA ECESG da VR dp Ede 74 Lesen ves pav Ve Hide eee En dp Id eet eases 74 Components and MUNCHONS eese eee ewe saree hs T3 Supported CAMES i enc Gace EpPREEEQAU CCELI Fd dors 79 Features not currently supported ioo ceo ad S EE AR ERS 82 Key number assisnments ccesoocexe exer e Rr ees 84 Pockape componens os coe ca hese deswae EP E E Rider doppi ges 85 Tastallaton and Coneurdbi bl eneee ciet debe enei 87 Full Duplex mode iiscae sek eee bk R45 OP CHER REN Vac de ee 107 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 108 Extensible Authentication Protecol isses der ren 109 Reinstalling an IP Phone 2004 52 esses esee re ms 109 Replacing an IP Phone 2004 icsuseizkRiiR RR Rer Race ERREFE 110 Removing an IP Phone 2004 from service 004 111 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 74 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Introduction This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Phone 2004 For information on using the IP Phone 2004 see the JP Phone 2004 User Guide This section contains the following procedures Description Procedure 9
359. matically to the value received in the Network Policy TLV You are not prompted for LLDP MED if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV You are not prompted for LLDP VLAN if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled Description Installation and Operation Page 144 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 DHCP 0 No 1 Yes VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes PC Port 1 On 0 Off Data VLAN 0 No 1 Yes Data VLAN Cfg 0 A 1 M Data VLAN ID Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 If you select 1 Y 1 for Yes the VLAN ID is configured automatically to a value received from the DHCP server You are not prompted for DHCP if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Au or if DHCP is not enabled Default O for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTER if VLAN is not enabled Default 1 for On Select 0 for Off to disable the PC port If you select 1 Y 1 for Yes and if LLDP is enabled the Data VLAN Cfg prompt appears on the display This prompt is not displayed if the PC port prompt is set to OFF If you select 0 0 for A VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV This prompt is not displayed if Data VLAN or LLDP is not enabled This prompt is displayed if Data VLAN is enabled but LLDP is not enabled
360. mation if the IP Phone is in an idle state or Call Timer if provisioned in the Telephone options menu e Set information IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 48 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 The information area changes according to call processing state and active features Soft key label display The soft key label has a maximum six characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a triangle icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a feature is enabled the icon state turns to On It remains in the on state until the feature key is pressed again This cancels the enabled feature and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state Use the More soft key to navigate through the layers of functions If there are only four functions assigned to the soft keys the More key does not appear and all four functions are displayed Key number assignments A maximum of nine functions can be assigned to the four soft labeled pre defined soft keys Because they are pre defined the user cannot change the key number assignment Functions are assigned to the soft keys in layers in LD 11 The Message key is numbered 16 Key numbers 17 to 31 are the four soft key labels below the display area See Figure 1 on page
361. menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup Typically the IP Phone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate and it selects the best speed and duplex mode available There is no intervention required under normal operation Note Changing the speed and or duplex mode on the phone changes both the LAN Ethernet port and PC Ethernet Port interfaces IMPORTANT It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch will result IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 186 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 If the IP Phone is connected to a network configured for Full Duplex mode only the IP Phone cannot automatically negotiate the proper configuration Therefore in this instance to allow the IP Phone to work at the optimum speed and duplex mode Full Duplex mode must be enabled Use Procedure 27 on page 186 to enable Full Duplex mode Procedure 27 Enabling Full Duplex mode 1 Tap the Tools icon 2 Enterthe Tools menu password if Password protection is enabled For information about Password Protection see Local Tools menu password protection on page 168 Tap the Network Configuration menu entry Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the Duplex combo box 5 Press the Down navigation key to open list
362. ming Packets discarded Outgoing Packets discarded Unknown protocols Unknown protos Last Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP message type and code The Last ICMP Type Code Figure 70 on page 576 shows IP Networks Statistics screen IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 576 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Figure 70 IP Networks Statistics screen NORTEL 1 Packets Sent 1740 2 Packets Received 1913 3 Incoming Packets Error 0 4 Outgoing Packets Error 0 5 Incoming Pkts Discarded 0 6 Outgoing Pkts Discarded 0 7 Unknown Protos 0 8 The last ICMP Type Code 1 Reset Refresh 5 To reset the NiPort counters to 0 press the Reset soft key The display counter values are a snapshot and the displayed counter values will not change while the display is shown To refresh them as you view the counter display press the Refresh soft key 7 Youcan press the Return soft key exit the menu to return to the Local Diagnostics submenu or you can press the Stop key to close the menu and return to the telephone display End of Procedure 5 USB Devices The USB Devices tool provides information about an Universal Serial Bus USB devices that connect to your IP Phone The IP Phone automatically detects USB devices when they are connected to the USB port in the back of the IP Phone The IP Phone will enumerate and list any USB device but only 553 3001 368 Standard
363. ministrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E If only one Expansion Module is configured in LD 11 but two or three Expansion Modules are detected on the IP Phone the Terminal Proxy Server TPS assigns keys 50 to 67 to the second Expansion Module The third Expansion Module does not have keys assigned until it is configured in 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Page 489 of 630 LD 11 Anerror message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration If two Expansion Modules are configured in LD 11 but only one Expansion Module responds the TPS assigns keys 32 to 67 to the single Expansion Module using the Shift key functionality An error message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration When a second Expansion Module is detected the TPS changes the key assignments to display across both Expansion Modules If two Expansion Modules are configured in LD 11 but three Expansion Module respond the TPS assigns the keys 32 to 67 to the first two Expansion Modules The third Expansion Module does not have keys assigned until it is configured in LD 11 An error message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration
364. mode must be enabled 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 341 of 630 Use Procedure 60 to enable Full Duplex Procedure 60 Enabling Full Duplex 1 2 Reset the phone by disconnecting and re connecting power When the Nortel logo appears press each of the soft keys in sequence See Procedure 58 on page 327 If no other configuration changes are required press OK repeatedly until the Duplex network option appears Select 1 to enable Full Duplex mode When the Speed option appears select one of the following e Ofor10 Mbps e 1for 100 Mbps default Select OK to confirm the change Restart the IP Phone 1110 The firmware settings are read and are applied to UPLINK and the PC Ethernet Port End of Procedure When the IP Phone is restarted the firmware reads the setting for Full Duplex mode and sets the LAN Ethernet port PC Ethernet port duplex and speed accordingly Use Procedure 61 to confirm activation of Full Duplex mode Procedure 61 Checking Ethernet Statistics 1 2 Double click the Services key The Network Diagnostics menu appears Select Ethernet Statistics e If Full Duplex mode is active the following is displayed Link UP Duplex Full Speed 10 Mb or 100 Mb IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 342 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Auto Negotiate Capability N Auto Negotiate Completed N End of Procedure TFTP f
365. mode must be enabled Use Procedure 12 to enable Full Duplex mode Procedure 12 Enabling Full Duplex mode 1 Resetthe IP Phone 2004 by disconnecting and reconnecting power 2 When the Nortel logo appears in the middle of the display press each of the soft keys in sequence See Procedure 11 on page 100 3 If no other configuration changes are required press OK repeatedly until the Duplex network option appears 4 Select 1 to enable Full Duplex mode IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 108 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 5 When the Speed option appears select one of the following e Ofor10 Mbps e 1for 100 Mbps default 6 Select OK to confirm the change 7 Restart the IP Phone 2004 The firmware settings are read and are applied to UPLINK and the PC Ethernet Port End of Procedure When the IP Phone is restarted the firmware reads the setting for Full Duplex mode and sets the LAN Ethernet port PC Ethernet port duplex and speed accordingly Use Procedure 13to confirm activation of Full Duplex mode Procedure 13 Checking Ethernet Statistics 1 Double click the Services key The Network Diagnostics menu appears 2 Select Ethernet Statistics e If Full Duplex mode is active the following is displayed Link UP Duplex Full Speed 10 Mb or 100 Mb Auto Negotiate Capability N Auto Negotiate Completed N End of Procedure Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection
366. mple 47 249 48 20 Press the Select soft key Use the Navigation keys to scroll to the destination IP address Ifthe destination IP address is in the list press the Select soft key to select the IP address Press the Select soft key again to return to the Ping submenu Ifthe destination IP address is not in the list continue scrolling through the available IP address list until the IP address 0 0 0 0 appears Press the Select soft key Tip To edit the IP address use the dialpad and the Delete soft key and the Cancel soft key Use the key for dots Press the Select soft key to save the new IP address or press the Cancel Soft key to return to the Ping submenu End of Procedure Procedure 96 Changing the number of Pings 1 From the Ping submenu use the Navigation keys to scroll to the Nr of Pings submenu item Press the Select soft key Tip Use the Delete and Clear soft keys to enter the number of pings Do one of the following e Press the Select soft key to accept the change and return to the Ping submenu e Press the Cancel soft key to return to the Ping submenu End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 535 of 630 Procedure 97 Pinging an IP address 1 3 From the Ping submenu use the Navigation keys to scroll to the Ping submenu item Press the Select soft key Pinging starts Tip Press the Stop soft key to stop pinging
367. n page 525 Note Network diagnostic utilities is available in Remote Mode only Note 1 lf a call is presented while the user is manipulating information the phone rings However the screen display is not updated with Caller ID and the programming text is not disturbed Note 2 The user can originate a call using Last Number Redial while manipulating an option Supported features The Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 supports the following telephony features three soft keys providing access to a maximum of nine features Note Functions for the soft keys are configured in LD 11 e volume control keys for adjusting ringer speaker volume e two specialized feature keys Message Inbox Services e three call processing keys Mute Goodbye Hold e Virtual Office e Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download e P Call Recording e UNIStim encryption IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 272 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 DTMF Tones The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 supports the following data network features 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex mode automatic network configuration through DHCP For more information about automatic network configuration see Table 33 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 IP parameters on page 284 802 1Q VLAN and 802 1p priority support industry standards for managing bandwidth usage VLAN filtering which allows the IP Phone to onl
368. n IP Phone sharing a LAN access with a PC Connect one end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable to the LAN Ethernet port located on the back of the IP Phone identified with a LAN icon see Figure 13 on page 175 and the other end to the IP network Insert one end of a second CAT5 Ethernet cable into the PC Ethernet port located on the back of the IP Phone identified with a PC icon see Figure 13 on page 175 and the other end into the computer s Ethernet port 5 Secure the IP Phone footstand to the base of the IP Phone Use the angle adjustment grip on the top back of the IP Phone to adjust the position CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug any device into your IP Phone 2007 Ethernet port other than one PC The IP Phone 2007 does not support multiple devices connected through the PC Ethernet port 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 175 of 630 Figure 13 IP Phone 2007 connections USB port zs d LAN Ethernet port zm PC Ethernet port ze AC Adapter jack EJ Headset jack zs Handset jack zm 6 Powerthe IP Phone 2007 using either the Power over Ethernet or the Global power adapter local power a Touse local power plug the Global power adapter into the nearest power outlet See Table 18 IP Phone 2007 component list on page 171 b Connectthe power jack as shown in Figure 13 on page 175 Note The IP Phone 2007 supports both AC power and Power over LAN options including IEEE 802 3af
369. n Module display Diagnostic st veu Sep display area area initial screen blank blank Full Contrast set to highest contrast set to highest contrast LED Test blank blank Character Test Characters display across the Characters display across display areas the telephone the display areas the on hook icon is displayed telephone on hook icon is displayed Set Info The Set Info menu displays the firmware version for the IP Phone and any attached Expansion Modules The attached Expansion Modules are identified as KEMI KEM2 and KEM3 KEMI is the closest to the IP Phone The Expansion Module identifies the firmware as a three character string the TPS displays the firmware in an n nn format Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll the list to display the firmware for each attached Expansion Module The firmware version is displayed even if the Expansion Module is not configured in LD 11 In this case the Expansion Module is identified in the display area by an asterisk after the Expansion Module number for example KEM1 If an Expansion Module is configured but does not respond the firmware version displays as unknown IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 492 of 630 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Firmware The Expansion Module uses a TFTP or UFTP Server to upgrade the firmware The firmware is downloaded to the IP Phone which is then distributed to the each attached Expansion Module
370. n an IP Phone 2004 the Terminal Proxy Server TPS assigns keys 56 79 to the second IP Phone KEM An error message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration If two IP Phone KEMs are configured in LD 11 but only one IP Phone KEM is responding the TPS assigns keys 32 79 to the single IP Phone KEM using the Shift key functionality An error message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration When a second IP Phone KEM is detected the TPS changes the key assignments to display across both IP Phone KEMs as expected Virtual Office When a Virtual Office VO login occurs from an IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 that does not have the same number of IP Phone KEMs responding as configured on the IP Phone used to log in call processing may terminate on a key that is not physically available In other words the IP Phone rings but the call cannot be answered During the VO login process the existence of any IP Phone KEM is verified If a mismatch is detected the login proceeds normally however an error message is generated to alert the administrator of the mismatch 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Page 203 of 630 Firmware The IP Phone KEM firmware is not downloadable In the event that the IP Phone KEM firmware must be upgraded or changed the IP Ph
371. n display is not updated with Caller ID and the programming text is not disturbed Note 2 The user can originate a call using Autodial or Last Number Redial while manipulating an option However the display is not updated with the dialed digits or Caller ID and Autodial and Last Number Redial intercept the dialpad Supported features The IP Phone 2001 supports the following telephony features e three soft keys providing access to a maximum of nine features Note Functions for the soft keys are configured in LD 11 e volume control bar for adjusting ringer speaker handset and headset volume e two specialized feature keys Message Inbox Services e two call processing keys Goodbye Hold e Virtual Office e Branch Office e Active Call Failover e Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download The IP Phone 2001 supports the following data network features e 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex mode 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 45 of 630 automatic network configuration through DHCP For more information about automatic network configuration see Table 5 IP Phone 2001 IP parameters on page 54 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP media encryption For more information about SRTP media encryption see Features overview on
372. n the IP Phone 2001 power transformer and the appearance of the Nortel logo in the middle of the display When you see the logo you have one s to respond by pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the one s response time the IP Phone 2001 attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the network diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current settings and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are presented the configuration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace backspace a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 When the Nortel logo appears in the middle of the display immediately press the four keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right 2 Atthe prompt EAP Enable enter 1 Yes 1 for Yes if the network infrastructure supports 802 1x port based network access control Enter DevicelD and Password 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 63 of 630 If yo
373. n time expires the Local Tools menu and any open submenus are closed Double press the Services key to open the password prompt window to reaccess the Local Tools menu If you enter an incorrect password the Local Tools menu will not open Double press the Services key to open the password prompt window Only three incorrect password entries are allowed Any entry after the three attempts is ignored for 5 minutes The password prompt window is visible and you can reenter the password but the password is not processed until the 5 minute time expires Note Some text appears dimmed depending on the current state of the menu lock and the configuration of the IP Phone Only configuration options which are enabled from the current state appear active Menu options that are not available appear dimmed For more information about configuring the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 2007 see Appendix Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Key number assignments A maximum of nine functions can be assigned to the four soft labeled pre defined soft keys Because they are pre defined the user cannot change the key number assignment Functions are assigned to the soft keys in layers in LD 11 The Message key is numbered 16 Key numbers 17 to 31 are the four soft key labels below the display area See Figure 11 on page 165 Key numbers 17 to 31 support the features A03 A06 CFW CHG CPN PRK PRS RGA RNP SCC SCU SSC S
374. n to the Local Diagnostics submenu The screen displays Reset Nlport PCport and Return soft keys The NIport PCport soft key is used to select the Network NI Port or the PC PC Port The soft key label indicates the current display page For example when Nlport appears on the soft key label the information showing on the display is for the network interface port IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 572 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities When Nlport appears on the second soft key label the following statistics are displayed e Link Status e Duplex Mode e Network Speed 10 Mb 100 Mb or 1G e AutoSense Negotiate AutoSense Negotiate Capability AutoSense Negotiate Completed e Port VLAN Priority e Port VLAN ID e Packet Collision e CRC Error count e Frame Error count Unicast Packets Sent e Unicast Packets Received e Broadcast Packets Received e Multicast Packets Received e 802 1x Status EAP Status 4 Toresetthe NiPort counters to 0 press the Reset soft key 5 Press the NIPort soft key 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 573 of 630 The NiPort soft key changes to the PCPort soft key and the tool displays the statistics for the Personal Computer port PCPort The following PCPort statistics are displayed e LinkStatus e Duplex Mode e Network Speed e AutoSense Negotiate Capability e AutoSense Negotiate Comple
375. nabled Use Procedure 51 to enable Full Duplex mode Procedure 51 Enable Full Duplex mode 1 Resetthe IP Phone by disconnecting and re connecting power 2 When the Nortel logo appears press each of the soft keys in sequence See Procedure 50 on page 291 3 If no other configuration changes are required press the OK soft key repeatedly until the Duplex network option appears 4 Select 1 to enable Full Duplex mode 5 When the Speed option appears select one of the following e Ofor10 Mbps e 1for 100 Mbps default 6 Select OK to confirm the change IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 298 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 7 Restart the IP Phone The firmware settings are read and are applied to UPLINK and the PC Ethernet Port End of Procedure When the IP Phone is restarted the firmware reads the setting for Full Duplex mode and sets the LAN Ethernet port PC Ethernet port duplex and speed accordingly Use Procedure 52 to confirm activation of Full Duplex mode Procedure 52 Checking Ethernet Statistics 1 Click the Services key The Network Diagnostics menu appears 2 Select Telephone Op gt Diagnostics gt Ether Stats e If Full Duplex mode is active the following is displayed Duplex Full Speed 10 Mb or 100 Mb Auto Negotiate Capability N Auto Negotiate Completed N End of Procedure Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Pr
376. nd Operation Page 154 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Keys and functions Table 14 Table 14 lists the keys and functions for the IP Phone 2007 IP Phone 2007 keys and functions Part 1 of 2 Hold Goodbye Handsfree Headset Mute Volume control bar Message waiting light incoming call indicator Programmable line DN feature keys self labeled Function Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Tap the flashing line DN soft key to return to the caller on hold Press the Goodbye key to terminate an active call Press the Handsfree key to activate handsfree The LED lights to indicate when the handsfree feature is active Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to switch a call from the handset or handsfree to the headset Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to a two way conversation The Mute key applies to handsfree handset and headset microphones The Mute LED flashes when the Mute option is in use Use the Volume control bar to adjust the volume of the ringer handset headset speaker and the Handsfree feature Press the right side of the rocker bar to increase volume the left side to decrease volume The Message waiting indicator turns ON to indicate that a message has been left for the user This indicator also flashes when the set ringer is ON Programmable line DN feature keys self la
377. nd Operation 553 3001 365 The current system date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear 6 Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display 7 Optional Customize the soft keys as required For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 and P Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 297 of 630 Full Duplex mode In the Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup Typically the IP Phone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate and it selects the best speed and duplex mode available There is no intervention required under normal operation Note Changing the speed and or duplex mode on the phone changes both the LAN Ethernet port and PC Ethernet Port interfaces IMPORTANT It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch will result If the IP Phone is connected to a network configured for Full Duplex mode only the IP Phone cannot automatically negotiate the proper configuration Therefore in this instance to allow the IP Phone to work at the optimum speed and duplex mode Full Duplex mode must be e
378. nents The IP Phone 1110 includes integrated support for a number of Power over Ethernet options including support for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 2 Table 37 lists the IP Phone 1110 package components and product codes Table 37 IP Phone 1110 components list Part 1 of 3 IP Phone 1110 package contents include P Phone 1110 Handset Handset cord e 2 1 m 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Number plate and lens Getting Started Card IP Phone 1110 with icon key caps without power supply RoHS NTYSO2AAE6 IP Phone 1110 with English key caps without power supply RoHS NTYSO2BAE6 Replacement parts Handset Charcoal NTYSO9AA70 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 317 of 630 Table 37 IP Phone 1110 components list Part 2 of 3 Handset cord Charcoal NTYS10AA70 Footstand kit Charcoal includes the stand and stand cover NTYS11AA70 Phone number label and lens kit NTYS12AA 2 1 m 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable NTYS13AA Power adapter Global power supply for local power N0089601 IEC cables RoHS Non RoHS 1 8 m 5 9 ft 10 amp IEC320 C13 NTYS14AAE6 NTYS14AA North America Note Nortel recommends you use the thinner cord NTYS14AA as an alternative to NTTK14AB 3 m 9 9 ft 125 VAC 13 amp NA power cord NEMA NTTK14ABE6 NTTK14AB North America Middle East Taiwan Philippines Thailand and Japan 2 4 m 8 ft 240 V
379. nes The Mute LED flashes when the Mute option is in use Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to switch a call from the handset or Handsfree to the headset Use the Volume control bar to adjust the volume of the handset headset speaker ringer and Handsfree feature Press the right side of the rocker bar to increase volume the left side to decrease volume Press the Handsfree key to activate handsfree The LED lights to indicate when the handsfree feature is active IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 78 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Services menu Table 7 shows the Services menu Table 7 Services menu Services key Press the Services key to access the following items Telephone Options see Notes 1 and 2 Volume Adjustment Contrast Adjustment Language Date Time Format Display diagnostics Local Dialpad Tone Ring type Call Timer OnHook Default Path Change Feature Key Label Set Info Password Administration Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Branch Office is configured 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 7 Services menu Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 79 of 630 Double press the Services key to access Network diagnostic utilities For more information on Network diagnostic utilities see Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525
380. nes 1100 Series attached to the IP Phone For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 CAUTION The IP Phone 1150E is shipped with the stand locked in position To avoid damaging the IP Phone press the wall mount lever located under the base to release the stand and pull it away from the phone See Figure 45 on page 456 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 456 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Figure 45 Release the IP Phone 1150E from the stand Tilt lever button Wall mount lever Center catch 1 Remove the stand cover Pull upward on the center catch and remove the stand cover The cable routing tracks are now accessible See Figure 46 on page 457 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 457 of 630 Figure 46 Release the IP Phone 1150E from the stand Tilt lever button Supervisor headset port Stand cover USB port Wall mount lever 2 Connectthe AC power adapter optional Leaving the AC adapter unplugged from the power outlet connect the adapter to the AC adapter jack in the bottom of the phone Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the adapter cord through the channels in the stand WARNING Use your IP Phone 1150E with the approved Nortel global power supply model N0089601 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 458 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Figure 47
381. net Control Message Protocol ICMP message type and code ICMP Type Code To reset the PCPort counters to 0 tap the Reset soft key 7 Tapthe Exit soft key to return to the Local Diagnostics menu End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 565 of 630 Procedure 114 Using the IPSet amp DHCP Information tool 1 2 3 Tap the Tools icon Tap the Local Diagnostics soft key Tap the IPSet amp DHCP Information soft key The tool displays the Exit soft key at the bottom of the display and the following information Configuration Network data validated MAC address stored DHCP setting Voice VLAN status type of configuration and discovery status Primary Server identification Firmware version and Hardware Identification number Telephone Set IP address Network subnet mask Gateway IP address EPROM Server S1 and S2 IP addresses ports actions and number of retries Voice VLAN priority and VLAN ID DHCP Respond String Server Information for S01 S02 S03 and S04 including IP addresses ports actions number of retries and failover values Use the scroll bar to display all the information Tap the Exit soft key to return to the Local Diagnostics menu End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 566 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and
382. nformation about VLAN tagging see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 Note The VLAN Filter check box will appear dimmed if you select No in the VoiceVLAN combo box Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Disable PC Port check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight DataVLAN combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 468 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E 32 33 34 35 36 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e No VLAN e LLDP VLAN Name VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV e VLAN ID value Enter the VLAN ID manually This is a number between 1 and 4094 Note If LLDP is disabled LLDP VLAN Name does not appear in the list Press the Enter key Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight PC Port Untag All check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off If DATA VLAN is enabled the tag on all traffic destined for the PC port is stripped by default To override this action deselect the PC Port Untag All check box If DATA VLAN is disabled the tag on all traffic destined for the PC port is not stripped To override this action select the PC Port Untag All check box For information about PC port
383. ng Full Duplex mode 1 Double press the Services key to open the Local Tools menu 2 Press 3 on the dialpad to access the Network Configuration menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the Network Configuration option 3 Usethe Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the Duplex combo box Press Enter to start the edit mode 5 Press the Down navigation key to open list box 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 425 of 630 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e 10BT Full 10 BT Full Duplex mode e 100BT Full 100 BT Full Duplex mode Press Enter to exit the edit mode Press the Apply amp Reset soft key to save the changes and to restart the IP Phone 1140E The firmware settings are read and are applied to UPLINK and the PC Ethernet Port End of Procedure When the IP Phone is restarted the firmware reads the setting for Full Duplex mode and sets the LAN Ethernet port PC Ethernet port duplex and speed accordingly Use Procedure 75 to confirm activation of Full Duplex mode Procedure 75 Checking Ethernet Statistics 1 2 Double press the Services key to open the Local Tools menu Press 2 to select Local Diagnostics then press 3 to open the Ethernet Statistics menu If Full Duplex mode is active the following is displayed e Link Status UP e Duplex Mode Full e Network Speed 10 Mb 100 Mb or 1G e Auto S
384. ng topics TRIPOUNCUOBR 3 beu wears Ed DP ERG Fe RXPENRIHE MAE OR AE LEE 523 D Scptloll 50600424084 OP ELLER EEE HERR TRE Ede REP 323 Introduction 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol is available for the following IP Phones IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 IP Phone 2007 IP Phone 1120E e P Phone 1140E IP Phone 1150E Description The IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP defines a standard method for Ethernet network devices such as IP Phones switches and IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 524 of 630 Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol routers to exchange information about their capabilities with other devices and to store this information in a Management Information Base MIB LLDP also enables the system administrator to view the entire network infrastructure The Telecommunications Industry Association TIA developed the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED extension of 802 1ab LLDP for VoIP networks as defined by ANSI TIA 1057 This extension enables media devices such as IP Phones IP media gateways IP media servers and IP media controllers to transmit and receive media related information LLDP provides the following functionality periodic transmission of advertisements containing device information device capabilities and media specific configuration information to neighbors in the same network e imp
385. nt key IP Softphone 2050 221 Checking Ethernet Statistics IP Phone 2001 69 Clear Type 236 Closet power 172 Codecs and jitter buffer 216 IP Softphone 2050 219 Conference key IP Softphone 2050 220 Context sensitive soft keys 304 Controls 191 Corporate Directory 492 cursor control 238 D Default gateway IP Phone 2002 57 131 284 327 def gw See Default gateway Desk mount bracket 196 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 626 of 630 DHCP Ack message 514 Discovery request 514 VLAN ID discovery 513 Diagnostic Utilities Network diagnostic utilities availability 525 Diagnostic utilities Authentication State 527 Authenticator ID 527 Command Line Interface CLI 524 data display pages 538 DeviceID 527 DHCP information process 526 Ethernet statistics 526 IDU command printout in LD 32 for IP Phone with a NAT 556 IDU command printout in LD 32 for IP Phone without a NAT 556 IP Networking statistics 526 Network Address Translation NAT Traversal 551 Network QoS Process 526 Ping and TraceRoute 525 RTP RTCP statistics 526 UNIStim RUDP statistics 526 Using CLI Commands 555 diagnostic utilities 523 Diagnotic utilities Supplicant Status 526 Display area IP Softphone 2050 212 Display label 191 Driver software headset adapter 226 E Echo cancellers 215 Emergency Services for Virtual Office 494 Enabling Full Duplex mode IP Phone 2001 69 295 Ethernet fr
386. nt state of the menu lock and the configuration of the IP Phone some items appear with a black box at the beginning of the menu item Only configuration options which are enabled from the current state appear active Menu options that are not available appear with a black box For more information about configuring the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1110 see Appendix Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Key number assignments You can assign a maximum of nine functions to the four soft labeled predefined context sensitive soft keys Because the context sensitive soft keys are predefined the user cannot change the key number assignment Functions are assigned to the context sensitive soft keys in layers in LD 11 The Message Waiting key is numbered 16 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 316 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Functions mapped to key numbers 17 to 26 are assigned to the four context sensitive soft keys Labels for the context sensitive soft keys appear in the display area For further information see Context sensitive soft key label display on page 312 Figure 25 on page 312 shows the IP Phone 1110 display area Key number mappings at the Call Server are aligned with that of the IP Phone 2001 For a description of the IP Phone function assignment for each of the context sensitive soft keys see Appendix Appendix I IP Phone soft keys on page 619 Package compo
387. ntain the MVC 2050 connection to the server deactivate ActiveSync Otherwise the connection is lost because ActiveSync uses Point to Point Protocol PPP This will cause the PDA connection to the voice network to be dropped and connected to the PC Roaming and handover If you experience slight gaps and pauses in transmission and reception during calls MVC 2050 may be experiencing roaming handover difficulties attributable to the wireless network 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 263 of 630 Nortel WLAN Handset 2210 WLAN Handset 2211 and WLAN Handset 2212 For information about WLAN Handset 2210 WLAN Handset 2211 and WLAN Handset 2212 see Nortel Networks WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration 553 3001 304 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 264 of 630 Nortel WLAN Handset 2210 WLAN Handset 2211 and WLAN Handset 2212 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 265 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Contents WHEN carci do eeepc Rat ud doe Hee 266 DescHpIH iai eo es tbesirpeg Ghee eas eegesws4sawdwae eas ened 266 Extension crohn 4 4 Equos Pee REV edad e eet teenies 268 Components and TUNCHONS ssri crara aaa beEsq E ye ac EX ape acd 268 Supported TEAMS eiisaaceked aedes kradnie ksi Sede IP Edd dures 271 Display characteris 04 2 LEASGLE nid ps ebd She EERE TRS 213 Key m mber ASSLEDIIBI S 225 ko sas d R4 EORR RR ERE dd 276 Package components iuessae
388. nted the configuration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace backspace a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 Toenter the configuration menu press the three soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right 2 Atthe prompt DHCP ves No enter 1 1 for Yes By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments e Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 292 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 3 Atthe prompt Cached IP select 0 0 No default to conform to the DHCP standard and to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server Only select 1 1 for Yes to force th
389. nter the XAS IP address Enter the IP address of the XAS server 1 Man Enter the VLAN ID manually This is a number between 1 and 4094 0 Auto Automatically obtains VLAN ID using DHCP or the 802 1ab data switch LLDP MED 0 No 1 Yes LLDP VLAN 0 No 1 Yes DHCP 0 No 1 Yes VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes PC Port 1 ON 0 OFF Data VLAN 0 No 1 Yes IP Phones Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 97 of 630 If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the Network Policy TLV You are not prompted for LLDP MED if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV You are not prompted for LLDP VLAN if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 Y 1 for Yes the VLAN ID is configured automatically to a value received from the DHCP server You are not prompted for DHCP if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Au or if DHCP is not enabled Default O for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTER if VLAN is not enabled Default If you select 1 Y 1 for Yes and if LLDP is enabled the Data VLAN Cfg prompt appears on the display This prompt is not displayed if the PC port prompt is set to OFF Description Installation and Operation Page 98 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Data VLAN Cfg 0 A 1 M If you select 0 0 fo
390. nter 0 for No You are not prompted to enter the XAS IP address Enter the IP address of the XAS Note The IP Phone 1110 currently does not support an XAS 0 Auto Automatically obtains VLAN ID using DHCP or the 802 1ab data switch 1 Man Enter the VLAN ID manually This is a number between 1 and 4094 Description Installation and Operation Page 338 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 LLDP MED 0 No 1 Yes LLDP VLAN 0 No 1 Yes DHCP 0 No 1 Yes VLANFILTER 0 No 1 Yes PC Port 1 ON 0 OFF PC Port Untag All 1 ON 0 OFF Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the Network Policy TLV You are not prompted for LLDP MED if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV You are not prompted for LLDP VLAN if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes the VLAN ID is configured automatically to a value received from the DHCP server You are not prompted for DHCP if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Au or if DHCP is not enabled Default 0 0 for No You are not prompted for VLANFILTER if VLAN is not enabled Default 1 for ON Default 1 for ON Default 0 for Auto Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page
391. nter key to select the headset and close the list Press the Enter key to exit edit mode 11 Choose one of the following e f only one headset is paired proceed to step 12 e f more than one wireless headset is paired the first headset paired is automatically made the active device To make a different headset active press the Right navigation key one or more times to highlight the Set button next to the Set Active Device item Press the Enter key The message Set active device name appears This means the headset named is now the active wireless headset and is used when you press the headset key 12 Press the Exit soft key to exit to the main display Changes are saved automatically IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 602 of 630 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Note 1 Paired headset information is saved and restored when a reboot of the IP Phone occurs therefore the active wireless headset will remain paired and active Note 2 lt is not recommended to pair more than one headset of the same model because they will have identical names in the Paired list End of Procedure Dual Pairing Headsets Take special care when using a dual pairing type of Bluetooth wireless technology headset This headset can be paired to its base as well as to the IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E If the headset is paired to both the IP Phone is the second device When you press the headset telephone ke
392. nts and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 34 of 630 About this document software For more information on legacy products and releases click the Technical Documentation link under Support on the Nortel home page http www nortel com Applicable systems This document applies to the following systems Communication Server 1000S CS 1000S Communication Server 1000M Chassis CS 1000M CH Communication Server 1000M Cabinet CS 1000M CA Communication Server 1000M Half Group CS 1000M HG Communication Server 1000M Single Group CS 1000M SG Communication Server 1000M Multi Group CS 1000M MG Communication Server 1000E CS 1000E Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet Meridian 1 PBX 51C Meridian 1 PBX 61C Meridian 1 PBX 81 Meridian 1 PBX 81C Note When upgrading software memory upgrades may be required on the Signaling Server the Call Server or both System migration When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run CS 1000 Release 4 5 software and configured to include a Signaling Server they 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 About this document Page 35 of 630 become CS 1000M systems Table 1 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000M system Table 1 Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000M systems This Meridian 1 system Maps to this CS 1000M system
393. nu item The IP Phone 1150E supports the following headsets e Type 1 Plantronics P251N P261N CS55 Voyager 5108 e Type 2 GNNetcom GN 2120 NCD GN9120 Flex GNNetcom Liberation Local Tools menu password protection If the SECUREMENU parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration the Local Tools menu is locked to prevent accidental or unwanted changes You are prompted to enter the fixed password 26567 738 color set whenever the Services key is double pressed or whenever the Local Diagnostics and Network Configuration sub menus are accessed If the PARTSECURE parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration you are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access 2 Local Diagnostics or 3 Network Configuration menu items from the Local Tools menu You are always prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access the 4 Lock Menu sub menu 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 447 of 630 Two ways to control the menu lock are as follows e DHCP Secure Menu option the IP Phone processes the secure menu setting retrieved from the Full DHCP response e Lock Menu option double press the Services key to access the Local Tools menu Press 4 on the dialpad to access the Lock Menu items or use the up down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following Lock Menu options Manual Secure Local Menu 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu 3 Manual Disable Secure
394. nu lock are as follows e DHCP Secure Menu option the IP Phone processes the secure menu setting retrieved from the Full DHCP response e Lock Menu option double press the Services key to access the Local Tools menu Press 4 on the dialpad to access the Lock Menu items or use the up down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following Lock Menu options 1 Manual Secure Local Menu 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 403 of 630 4 DHCP Secure Menu 5 Lock Now The settings configured in the Lock Menu sub menu override the settings received from the DHCP string For more information about 4 Lock Menu manual user settings see Appendix Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Configuring Secure Local Menu through Full DHCP Password protection is enabled during Full DHCP configuration if the SECUREMENU parameter or the PARTSECURE parameter are present at the end of the S4 part of the Full DHCP string If neither the SECUREMENU parameter nor the PARTSECURE parameter is present password protection is not enabled The SECUREMENU PARTSECURE item is an optional parameter If it is present then the full S4 string needs to be present including the action and retries The S4 string will already be present if the XAS support has been configured through the DHCP If XAS is not configur
395. nu remains active for 5 minutes You can freely navigate exit and reenter the Local Tools menu without being prompted to reenter the password To reset the timer before the 5 minute time expires double press the Services key You can also press the 5 key to select the Lock Now item from the Lock Menu The Lock Now item immediately exits the Local Tools menu closes any open Local Tools menu pages and locks the Local Tools menu Alternatively when time expires the Local Tools menu and any open submenus are closed Double press the Services key to open the password prompt window to reaccess the Local Tools menu If you enter an incorrect password the Local Tools menu will not open Double press the Services key to open the password prompt window Only three incorrect password entries are allowed Any entry after the three attempts is ignored for 5 minutes The password prompt window is visible and you can reenter the password but the password is not processed until the 5 minute time expires Note Some text appears dimmed depending on the current state of the menu lock and the configuration of the IP Phone Only configuration options which are enabled from the current state appear active Menu options that are not available appear dimmed 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 449 of 630 For more information about configuring the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1150E see Appendix Appendix F Configuring t
396. nually entered for first time configuration Retrieved and TN from local storage on subsequent power cycles Installing the IP Phone 2001 To install the IP Phone 2001 for the first time using manual configuration use Procedure 2 To install the IP Phone 2001 for the first time using DHCP use Procedure 3 on page 62 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 56 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Procedure 2 Installing the IP Phone 2001 for the first time using manual configuration IMPORTANT Timing information There are only four seconds s between plugging in the IP Phone 2001 power transformer and the appearance of the Nortel logo in the middle of the display When you see the logo you have one s to respond by pressing the four soft keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right one at a time If you miss the one s response time the IP Phone 2001 attempts to locate the connect server You can begin the power up sequence again or you can double press the Services key to open the network diagnostic utilities to access the IP Phone settings See Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities on page 525 To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current settings and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are presented the configuration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace back
397. number limits that can be assigned are as follows 0 7 for Meridian Communications Adapter MCA 0 5 for M2006 0 7 for M2008 0 59 for M2616 varies with number of add on modules 0 79 for i2002 varies with value of KEM 0 79 for i2004 varies with value of KEM Note The first IP Phone KEM is assigned keys 32 55 and the second IP Phone KEM is assigned keys 56 79 If either the Meridian Programmable Data Adapter MPDA or the Display Module is equipped then key 7 on sets M2008 M2216 and M2616 and key 5 on set M2006 will become Program keys which cannot be used as function keys Any printout of the TN block will not show key 7 because it is a local function key On the M2616 if CLS HFA key 15 on the voice TN defaults to the Handsfree key No other feature assignment is accepted Primary and secondary data DNs must be unique A station SCR SCN MCR or MCN DN must be removed as a member from all Group Hunt lists before the DN can be modified 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Page 197 of 630 LD 11 Configure the IP Phone KEM Part 4 of 5 Response Description On the M3903 keys 4 15 are blocked No feature assignment is accepted for keys 2 15 On the M3903 M3904 and M3905 keys 29 31 are reserved No feature assignment is accepted for keys 29 31 other than NUL On M3904 no feature assignment is accepted for keys 12 15 On M3905 the craftsperson can assign N
398. o enable the Bluetooth wireless technology for select phones The configuration files for the specific phones use the IP Phone MAC address as the file name with the cfg file extension IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 598 of 630 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Table 74 lists the DEVICE CONFIG section field names and definitions Table 74 DEVICE CONFIG field name definitions Field name Field value Definition DEVICE CONFIG Section header for device configuration file information DOWNLOAD MODE FORCED Recommended setting The version is ignored and the DEVICE CONFIG file is always read or VERSION 000001 The version of the device config file FILENAME 1140eDEV cfg Device config filename The file name can be anything If a file name is specified the file name is loaded to every IP Phone 1140e A wildcard file name enables a different setting to be configured for every IP Phone The IP Phone checks for a file with the MAC address as the file name for example 001365FEF1C6 cfg SERVER IP XXX XXX XXX XXX The IP address of the TFTP Server that will download the FILENAME file Pairing your headset Use Procedure 126 to pair the Bluetooth wireless technology headset with your IP Phone 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Page 599 of 630 Procedure 126 Pairing the Bluetooth wireless technology headset with your IP Phone 1 Rest
399. o return to the EtherStats submenu e Use the Navigation keys to browse the data Press the Cancel soft key to return to the EtherStats submenu End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 539 of 630 Procedure 107 Checking Authenticator ID 1 Select EtherStats from the Diagnostics submenu 1 Scroll through the EtherStats menu and select Authenticator ID 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Do one ofthe following 4 Pressthe OK soft key to return to the EtherStats submenu e Use the Navigation keys to browse the data 5 Press the Cancel soft key to return to the EtherStats submenu End of Procedure IP Statistics Use Procedure 108 to access the IP Stats submenu item in Remote mode Procedure 108 Browsing IP Statistics 1 Select IP Stats from the Diagnostics submenu The IP Statistics appear on the display 2 Doone ofthe following e Press the OK soft key to return to the Diagnostics submenu e Use the Navigation keys to scroll through the data display results See Figure 63 on page 551 e Press the Cancel soft key to return to the Diagnostics submenu End of Procedure RUDP Statistics Use Procedure 109 to access the RUDP Stats submenu item in Remote mode IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 540 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Procedure 109 Browsing RUDP Statistics 1 Select RUDP Stats from the Diagnostics submenu The RUDP sta
400. obile Voice Client 2050 Macros The Mobile Voice Client MVC 2050 Macros tab enables you to record and use macros A macro is a recorded sequence of steps that saves you keystrokes For example you can create macros that select a particular line and then dials the telephone number automatically or program voicemail access numbers and codes for faster access Macro screen To enter a new macro name or to select an existing macro to modify or delete select the New icon to the right of the list box To select an existing macro tap the down arrow in the Macro list box and make your selection To delete a selected macro tap the Delete icon the button to the right of the list box Keys Once you have selected a macro name tap the down arrow in the Keys drop down list to select a key to add to the macro Press the Add button to add the key Use the Pause key to insert a short pause in the macro A pause introduces a delay which may be required to access some Interactive Voice Response IVR applications and the voicemail systems Contents A list of the macro contents appears in the Contents list box Once there are two or more entries in this box use the up and down buttons which appear on the right of the box to move around the keystrokes To remove keystrokes from the Contents box select the keystroke and press the Remove button 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 261 of
401. ocated at the top center of the Call Handling screen Goodbye Select Goodbye to end a call You can also use the Goodbye icon located at the top right of the screen Hold Select Hold to place a call on hold You can also use the Hold icon located at the top left of the screen Features Select Features from the Keys menu to access a menu of interface keys To re arrange items in the Features list open the Settings menu and select the Features tab Items in the Features list cannot be added or removed Macros Select Macros from the Keys Features submenu to access macros also available through the Settings Macros dialog box Macros can be used to make speed dials access voicemail and other routine functions faster and easier For more information about macros see Macros on page 260 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 244 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Help Select Help to access the MVC 2050 PDA specific version of Help The Help menu provides the following items e Contents Diagnostics e About MVC 2050 Contents Select the Contents menu item to access the Help system Diagnostics Select Diagnostics to access to a list of methods to determine server connection state Diagnostic methods are as follows e Ping e TraceRoute e RUDP Ping See Profiles on page 255 for information on importing and exporting profiles to assist in troubleshooting About MVC 2050 Abou
402. ocket PC screens and flat panel monitors MVC 2050 components MVC 2050 includes the following components e MVC 2050 application software including Global IP Sound NetEQ software 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 239 of 630 e user supplied compatible PDA e user supplied headset Compatible PDAs Because the PDA industry evolves at a rapid pace go to www nortel com to determine the latest PDA models tested and supported along with any known issues Alternatively follow the links on www nortel com to Products Phones Clients and Accessories IP Phones and Clients Mobile Voice Client 2050 Technical Specifications For Nortel Technical Support go to www nortel com support Headsets A headset is required in order to send and receive telephone calls using the MVC 2050 and your PDA The headset is an important part of audio quality PDAs that support stereo headphones with microphones are recommended The Dell specific headset with a button on the wire when used with the X51v enables you to answer or release an incoming call by pressing the button Note Bluetooth and 802 11b operate on the same frequency band and use the same WLAN hardware on the PDA Therefore the use of Bluetooth accessories with MVC 2050 can lead to poor call quality Contact your PDA vendor to obtain headset recommendations Automatic Gain Control and feedback Because MVC 2050 re
403. ocument are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Nortel the Nortel Logo the Globemark SL 1 Meridian 1 and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Nortel Networks is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners Publication number 553 3001 368 Document release Standard 26 00 Date August 2007 Produced in Canada To provide feedback or report a problem in this document go to www nortel com documentfeedback NORTEL
404. oft keys in layers inLD 11 The Message key is numbered 16 Key numbers 17 to 31 are the four soft key labels below the display area See Figure 5 on page 83 Key numbers 17 to 31 support the features A03 A06 CFW CHG CPN PRK PRS RGA RNP SCC SCU SSC SSU and TRN See Appendix Appendix I IP Phone soft keys on page 619 for a description of these features Package components The following information applies to Phase II IP Phones Product codes for Phase II IP Phones are different from previous sets See the product code on the back of the phone to confirm whether it is a Phase II IP Phone The product code for Phase II IP Phones appears as IP Phone 200x The product code for previous versions of the IP Phone appears with an i in front of the model number for example 1200x The AC power adapter must be ordered separately if local power using the AC adapter is required because Phase II IP Phones include integrated support for a number of power over LAN options including support for IEEE 802 3af standard power IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 86 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Table 8 lists the IP Phone 2004 package components and product codes Table 8 IP Phone 2004 component list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 2004 package contents includes e IP Phone 2004 handset handset cord e footstand e 7 ft Ethernet cable Getting Started card IP Phone 2004 Ethergray with Icon ke
405. ol GARP Protection protects the IP Phone 1120E from GARP Spoof attacks on the network In a GARP Spoof attack a malicious device on the network takes over an IP address usually the default gateway by sending unsolicited or Gratuitous ARP messages thus manipulating the ARP table of the victim s machine This allows the malicious device to launch a variety of attacks on the network resulting in undesired traffic routing For example a GARP attack can convince the victim machine that the malicious device is the default gateway In this scenario all traffic from the victim s machine flows through the malicious device To enable GARP Protection during configuration see Procedure 65 Configuring the IP Phone 1120E on page 365 Extensible Authentication Protocol Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is a general protocol that fulfills the protocol requirements defined by 802 1x For further information on 802 1x see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Reinstalling an IP Phone 1120E You can reinstall an existing previously configured IP Phone 1120E on the same Call Server For example the IP Phone 1120E can be assigned to a new user new TN or to an existing user who moved to a new subnet by changing the TN of the IP Phone 1120E IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 384 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Procedure 69 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1120E 1 Rep
406. ollowing e Set 81 PK to6or 1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1110 Same as S1 Same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if S2 Action is set to 1 Same as S1 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto 6 or 1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes XAS IP VLAN Cfg 0 No 1 Yes VLAN Cfg 0 Auto 1 Man LLDP MED 0 No 1 Yes LLDP VLAN 0 No 1 Yes IP Phones Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 331 of 630 Default O for No Note If there is no External Application Server XAS enter 0 for No You are not prompted to enter the XAS IP address Enter the IP address of the XAS server Note The IP Phone 1110 currently does not support XAS 0 Auto Automatically obtains VLAN ID using DHCP or the 802 1ab data switch 1 Man Enter the VLAN ID manually This is anumber between 1 and 4094 If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the Network Policy TLV You are not prompted for LLDP MED if VLAN is not set to Auto 2 Auto or if LLDP is not enabled If you select 1 1 for Yes VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV You are not prompted for LLDP VLAN i
407. om of the stand cover make the marks on the wall Use the marks as a guideline for installing the wall mount screws not provided Install the screws so that they protrude 3 mm 1 8 inch from the wall and then install the phone stand mounting holes over the screw heads You may need to remove the phone from the wall to adjust the IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 414 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E lower screws When the lower screws are snug install the phone on the mounting screws and then tighten the top screws e Method B Attach the 15 cm 6 inch CAT5e cable position the stand over the mounting rivets and slide the phone down the wall so that the rivets fit into the slots on the stand 11 Replace the stand cover Ensure that all cables are neatly routed and press the stand cover into place until you hear a click 12 Putthe phone in the wall mount position optional If you wall mount the phone put it in the wall mount position by holding the Tilt Lever and press the phone towards the base until the phone is parallel with the base Release the Tilt Lever and continue to push the phone towards the base until you hare an audible click Ensure the phone is securely locked in to position Startup sequence When an IP Phone 1140E is connected to the network it must perform a startup sequence The elements of the startup sequence include e obtaining VLAN ID if supported by the network infrastructure ob
408. on Page 320 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 CAUTION The IP Phone 1110 is shipped with the stand and stand cover locked in position To avoid damaging the IP Phone press the wall mount lever as indicated in Figure 26 on page 320 to release the stand and tilt the phone away from the base using the Tilt lever To release the stand cover see step 3 on page 321 and Figure 27 on page 321 Figure 26 Release the IP Phone 1110 from the stand Wall mount Tilt lever lever 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 321 of 630 3 Pull upward on the center catch and remove the stand cover as indicated in Figure 27 on page 321 The cable routing tracks are now accessible Figure 27 Stand cover removed Tilt Lever ice Button cord channel IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 322 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 4 Connectthe AC power adapter optional Leaving the AC adapter unplugged from the power outlet connect the adapter to the AC adapter jack in the bottom of the phone Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the adapter cord through the channels in the stand WARNING If using local power use your IP Phone 1110 with the approved Nortel AC adapter model N0089601 Note The IP Phone 1110 supports both AC power and Power over LAN options including IEEE 802 3af Pow
409. on on page 446 To make a selection press the number associated with the menu item or use the navigation keys to scroll through the menu items Press the Enter key to select the highlighted menu item Press the Quit Stop key to exit from any menu or menu item For information on configuring IP Phone 1150E Local Tools menu see Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Supported features The IP Phone 1150E supports the following telephony features e six self labeled line programmable feature keys with labels and indicators Note Supports up to twelve DNs or features on 2 pages Use the Shift Outbox key to access the second page of DNs or features e four context sensitive soft keys providing access to a maximum of nine features Note Functions for the context sensitive soft keys are configured in LD 11 e seven specialized feature keys Copy IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 440 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Services Quit Stop Shift Outbox Inbox Message Directory Feature key Inbox Message e seven dedicated Automatic Call Distribution ACD fixed keys for default Agent key configuration with an integrated LED Supervisor Talk Listen Emergency Supervisor Make Busy Not Ready In Calls Activity reserved for future implementation e eight dedicated ACD fixed keys for Supervisor key configuration with an integra
410. on keys to browse the data See Figure 53 on page 541 Tip Press the Ping soft key again to stop the pinging Press one of the following soft keys e Reset to clear the data e Exit to return to the Network Diagnostic Tools menu End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 531 of 630 Procedure 89 Executing TraceRoute 1 Select TraceRoute from the Network Diagnostic Tools submenu 2 Pressthe IP soft key and enter the IP address to trace 3 Press the Tracert soft key The results of the TraceRoute appear on the display 4 Usethe Navigation keys to browse the data See Figure 54 on page 542 Tip Press the Tracert soft key again to stop the route tracing 5 Press one of the following soft keys e Reset to clear the data e Exit to return to the Network Diagnostic Tools menu End of Procedure Procedure 90 Accessing Ethernet Statistics 1 Select Ethernet Statistics from the Network Diagnostic Tools menu The Ethernet statistics appear on the display 2 Usethe Navigation keys to browse the data See Figure 55 on page 543 3 Press one of the following soft keys e Reset to clear the data and reset the statistic counter e Exit to return to the Network Diagnostic Tools menu End of Procedure Procedure 91 Accessing IP Network Statistics 1 Select IP Network Statistics from the Network Diagnostic Tools menu The IP Network Statistics appear
411. on the display 2 Use the Navigation keys to browse the data See Figure 56 on page 544 3 Press one of the following soft keys e Reset to clear the data and reset the statistic counter e Exit to return to the Network Diagnostic Tools menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 532 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Procedure 92 Accessing IP Set amp DHCP Information 1 Select IP Set amp DHCP Information from the Network Diagnostic Tools menu The IP Set and DHCP information appears on the display Use the Navigation keys to browse the data See Figure 57 on page 545 Note In Local Mode Exit is the only soft key available in this submenu End of Procedure Remote Mode When the IP Phone is registered to the signaling server diagnostics are available through the Telephone Options menu in Remote Mode This menu is controlled by the TPS Note 1 Diagnostics are available on the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 in Remote Mode only Note 2 When the user selects Diagnostics from the Telephone Options menu if an IP Phone Installer Password is enabled in the Signaling Server the Diagnostics menu is locked and the message Access denied displays on the IP Phone display Use Procedure 93 to access the Diagnostics submenu in Remote Mode Procedure 93 Accessing the Diagnostics submenu in Remote Mode 1 2 3 4 Press the Services key Select Telephone Options Select Diagno
412. one KEM must be replaced with a new IP Phone KEM containing the updated firmware IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 204 of 630 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 205 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics InttodBCUol sdcueedclse iR bre3QqLsewareeisbesi4de AERE d pb 205 Ds PIBUON quce ede Eb I RE EE EE ORI PE REC RO HV RP dE 206 Supported TEAMS soso aces ee eR ERR CREER ER Ea E Reha 208 Pernille acces reps E 4 UP PUeRE QUE RPSRA EQ DEN dd bid 214 Key snutber dSetemmenls 4 4 4b s pF AE SOR V e E X dd 222 Operating parattielelS Losocooa esee ee edPRR UR ERR en 224 System components iua 4d se rek ds Sede tee RA RR ROC bo ges 225 Bete you DEI 6 aioe o i eod VER E ORE EPA TEES EPEV D tpe 226 First tiie installation esee rrari Ree Y EIC sore ees 226 Installing or upgrading the IP Softphone 2050 228 Running the IP Softphone 2050 for the first time 232 Changing the TN of an existing IP Softphone 2050 233 Removing an IP Softphone 2050 from service 234 This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Softphone 2050 For information about using the IP Softphone see the CS 1000 Nortel Networks IP Softphone 2050 User Guide IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 206 of 630 Description Nortel I
413. one has been installed and configured if power to the phone is interrupted re entry of the IP parameters Node Number TN or re acquisition of firmware is not required Description The IP Phone 1120E uses the customer IP data network to communicate with the Communication Server 1000 The IP Phone 1120E translates voice into data packets for transport using Internet Protocol A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide information that enables the IP Phone 1120E network connection and connection to the Communication Server 1000 Figure 30 on page 347 shows the IP Phone 1120E 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 347 of 630 Figure 30 IP Phone 1120E User defined feature keys Data message waiting indicator Message waiting indicator Handset High resolution graphical display screen Soft keys Navigation keys Copy key Em a Message Inbox key Services key S25 amp Shift Outbox key Quit Stop key 5 co Directory key Goodbye key Expand to PC key Volume control Mute key F J EIL CD Headset key Handsfree K amp U ES Hold key Components and functions This section describes the following components of the IP Phone 1120E e Keys and functions e Services menu Local Tools menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 348 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Keys and functions Table 39 lists the keys and functions for th
414. ones Page 627 of 630 K Key expansion module configuration 192 connection 197 Description 189 475 display 191 features 190 initialization 198 installation 196 key number assignments 191 operating parameters 199 package components 191 Key expansion module KEM 189 L Language IP Softphone 2050 Application menu 207 Terminal Proxy Server 207 Line feature keys 191 Local power 172 local power 499 Loss Plan IP Softphone 2050 215 M Message waiting key 617 IP Softphone 2050 220 MVC 2050 WLAN Access Point WAP 234 Description Installation and Operation Page 628 of 630 MVC 2050 Application software 236 automatic gain control and feedback 237 compatible PDAs 237 Components 236 Menus 239 Personal Digital Assistant PDA 234 Pocket PC 2003 234 skins 243 software 234 Supported features 235 Virtual Private Network client 234 Windows Mobile 5 0 234 MVc 2050 audio quality 238 Call handling screen 238 N navigation buttons 238 Net mask net msk 55 91 128 173 282 324 369 412 460 Node ID 225 P Party conference key IP Phone 2004 617 Password installer 61 136 288 Password Administration 493 p bits 510 Personal Directory 492 Power over Ethernet PoE 499 Power over LAN 172 Power requirements Phase II Phones power over Ethernet 501 power splitters 499 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 April 2007 Power supply 50 124 IP Phone 20
415. onference Phone 2033 Use Procedure 48 to configure the IP Phone 2001 for the first time Procedure 48 Configuring the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 1 Configure a virtual loop on the system using LD 97 For more information about configuring a virtual loop see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 and Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 2 Configure the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 on the system using LD 11 At the prompts enter the following REQ chg TYPE 12001 TN cc uu ECHG yes ITEM cls ITEM For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 3 Connect one end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable to the network interface located on the back of the Power over Ethernet PoE module See Figure 22 Plug the other end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable into your IP network interface 4 Connect the CAT5 Ethernet cable attached to the PoE module to the IP Phone Thread the CAT5 Ethernet cable through the channel on the bottom of the IP Phone and plug it into the PoE module port on the IP Phone IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 282 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 5 Connect the AC power adapter optional to the power supply port located on the back of the PoE module leaving the AC power adapter unplugged from the power outlet Thread the cord through the channel on the bottom of the PoE module then plug the other
416. onversation Note headset must be connected to the Supervisor port on the IP Phone 1150E to use this feature In Calls key Press the In Calls key to answer incoming calls This mirrors the key function and state of the Primary DN key The In Calls LED lights when the In Calls key is in use Agent default configuration Table 50 shows IP Phone 1150E keys and functions for default Agent key configuration You can configure these keys for different functions Table 50 IP Phone 1150E keys and functions for default Agent key configuration Function Activity key Press the Activity key and enter the appropriate activity code to record the activity the agent is performing Feature key The Feature key supports the assignment of any telephony feature Not Ready Press the Not Ready key to exit the Automatic Call Distribution ACD queue without logging out Make Set Busy Press the Make Set Busy key to log out of the ACD queue and agent position Supervisor Press the Supervisor key to open a direct line between the agent IP Phone and the supervisor IP Phone Emergency Press the Emergency key to place an emergency call to the Supervisor IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 436 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Supervisor key configuration Table 51 shows IP Phone 1150E components and functions for Supervisor key configuration You can configure these keys for different functions Table 51 IP Phone 1150E key
417. operties gt QoS Packet Scheduler Running the IP Softphone 2050 for the first time Start the IP Softphone 2050 in one of the following ways e Select Start gt Programs gt Nortel gt IP Softphone 2050 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 233 of 630 e Click the desktop shortcut if one was created during the installation e Click Automatic startup sequence Note If you want the IP Softphone 2050 to start automatically when the PC starts create a shortcut to the application in the Startup folder When an IP Softphone 2050 is started for the first time and connects to the network the IP Softphone executes the following start up sequence 1 Obtain the IP parameters 2 Find a Media Gateway server and authenticate the user As the IP Softphone 2050 registers with the Voice Gateway Media Card one of the following occurs e Ifa non null node password is enabled you are prompted to enter the node number and password Use the keyboard or numeric keypad to enter the prompts for a node number and password After the password is verified enter the TN of the IP Softphone 2050 See IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 for further information about the password feature e Ifthe null node password is configured and enabled these screens are skipped and no option is provided to change the password e fthe node password is disabled or not configured it prompts for a no
418. or Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 the TFTP Server is required to download the current firmware Enter the TFTP Server IP address at the prompt e For CS 1000 Release 4 5 and later use either a TFTP Server to upgrade the firmware at the prompt accept the default entry of 0 0 0 0 or UFTP to download the current firmware For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 For Succession Release 3 0 and CS 1000 Release 4 0 the IP Phone 1140E searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in 1140e cfg is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone 1140E reboots Note The Enhanced UNIStim firmware download is only supported on CS 1000 Release 4 5 or later The Enhanced UNIStim firmware download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 1140E searches for the connect server The IP Phone 1140E registers with the Terminal Proxy Server TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When download is complete the IP Phone 1140E resets The current Call Server date and time appear on the top l
419. or the Local Tools menu and in all local features the language is controlled locally by the phone Thus the two language selection mechanisms on the phone are one for local features which is selected in the Local Tools menu and another for TPS features which is selected in the Telephone Options menu For information about selecting the languages for local features and TPS features see the JP Phone 1140E User Guide Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series Features not currently supported The following features are not supported on the IP Phone 1140E Live Dialpad Group Listening Set to Set messaging Context sensitive soft keys IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 400 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Display characteristics The IP Phone 1140E has three major display areas e user defined feature key label e information line e soft key label Figure 37 on page 400 shows these three display areas Figure 37 IP Phone 1140E display area NORTEL Upper display area User defined feature key labels 41798 44759 49521 Middle display area 09 16 2 32pm Information lines Lower display area Trans Conf Forward More Soft key labels User defined feature key label display The feature key label area displays a 10 character string for each of the six feature keys Each feature key includes the key label and an icon The icon state can be on off or flashing A telephone icon disp
420. ortel home page http www nortel com CD ROM To obtain Nortel documentation on CD ROM contact your Nortel customer representative IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 38 of 630 About this document 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 39 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Contents This section contains information on the following topics InttGdlctioli oo ag oboe Skee Eee ba FRA ECESJ ia VER d prp 39 Desc PIpBoN o3 caret ine ero cena eOr d E EU d 40 Components and MUNCHONS eese es 41 Supported CAMES oed acess eds SKU Re KN REPE DER d ud 44 Features not cumentby suppaited iiio cteosda Gade E EP AN bens 46 Display characteristics ecseaeecec meth RR ERE RX REX dee eR 46 Key number assignments 2 is04 iseccsieduiseruisendiseceagns 48 Package COMmpONnenlss 440344 ead d send OE PS EP dd dipud dn 49 Installation and Configuradoti soccer mea 51 Pull Duplek modes uices Lese ce pitira tint dob Ed Edd 68 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 70 Extensible Authentication Protocol sscercirerietsriscsrreeis 70 Reinstalling an IP Phone 2001 Li coeieshRhieRRAReRR RR ERO wes 70 Replace an IP Phong 200l Ss cepas ky ert prb ER Stone aes ies 72 Removing an IP Phone 2001 from service 040 TA Introduction This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Phone 2001 For information on using the IP Phone 2001 see the JP Phone 2001 User Guide IP Phones Description
421. ory Double click the Setup icon Follow the instructions on screen to complete the installation Note Compare the values currently in the configuration utility to the values recorded prior to the upgrade These should be identical Select Start Programs Nortel IP Softphone 2050 to start the IP Softphone 2050 application Select Settings to assign a server address select sound devices and Select a server type End of Procedure Use Procedure 37 to uninstall IP Softphone 2050 Version 1 Procedure 37 Uninstalling the IP Softphone 2050 Version 1 1 2 3 Select Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs Choose Nortel Networks i2050 Software Phone Select Remove Select Yes to confirm End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 231 of 630 Procedure 38 Uninstalling the IP Softphone 2050 Version 2 1 2 3 4 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs Choose Nortel Sofphone 2050 Select Remove Select Yes to confirm End of Procedure Visually impaired users can follow Procedure 39 to install the Accessibility Interface from the IP Softphone 2050 CD ROM Procedure 39 Installing the Accessibility Interface 1 2 3 Press and hold Shift Insert the IP Softphone 2050 installation CD into your CD ROM drive Press and hold Shift for several seconds to prevent Autorun from starting If the Installation Wiza
422. otocol EAP is a general protocol that fulfills the protocol requirements defined by 802 1x For further information on 802 1x see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Reinstalling an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 You can reinstall an existing previously configured IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 on the same system For example the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 can be assigned to a new user new TN or to an existing user 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 299 of 630 who moved to a new subnet by changing the TN of the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Procedure 53 Changing the TN of an existing IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 1 Repower the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Note During the reboot sequence of a previously configured the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 displays the existing node number for approximately five seconds If the node password is enabled and NULL choose one of the following a Disable the password b Setthe password as non NULL Press OK when the node number displays If Then the node password is enabled and a password screen displays Go to is not NULL step 4 the node password is disabled a TN screen displays Go to step 5 Enter the password at the password screen and press OK A TN screen displays To obtain the password enter the nodePwdShow command in Element Manager For further information
423. ou are prompted to enter a password after you double press the Services key if PARTSECURE is present you are prompted to enter a password whenever you select Local Diagnostics and Network Configuration e if neither SECUREMENU nor PARTSECURE is present then the menu is not locked For information about Password Protection of the Local Tools menu in the applicable IP Phone section 5 Lock Now The Lock Now item immediately exits the Tools menu closes any open Tools menu pages and locks the Tools menu Procedure 122 Locking the Tools menu 1 Press the Services key twice 2 Press4onthe dialpad to access the Lock Menu item or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the Lock Menu options 3 Press the Select soft key End of Procedure Procedure 123 Unlocking the Tools menu 1 Press the Services key twice 2 Enter the password 26567 738 color set in the prompt window S8 The Tools menu is unlocked and will remain active for five minutes End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 590 of 630 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 591 of 630 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Contents Introduction Description This section contains information on the following topics I traductloll adeo E bebe pice RR cPERaGC nA We Rd TOTT 591 DeSenptloll 2o eR RE Ite DEER deed EO Pei RETR 591 Manual GODDUP ADDE
424. ower the IP Phone 1120E Note During the reboot sequence of a previously configured IP Phone the IP Phone 1120E displays the existing node number for approximately 5 seconds 2 Ifthe node password is enabled and NULL choose one of the following a Disable the password b Setthe password as non NULL 3 Press OK when the node number displays If Then the node password is enabled and a password screen displays Go to is not NULL step 4 the node password is disabled a TN screen displays Go to step 5 4 Enterthe password at the password screen and press OK A TN screen displays Note To obtain the password enter the nodePwdShow command in Element Manager For further information see Communication Server 1000 Element Manager System Administration B5b3 3001 332 5 Select the Clear soft key to clear the existing TN 6 Enter the new TN End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 385 of 630 Replacing an IP Phone 1120E IMPORTANT Two IP Phones cannot share the same TN You must remove the IP Phone 1120E that is currently using the TN Procedure 70 Replacing an IP Phone 1120E 1 Obtain the node and TN information of the phone you want to replace 2 Disconnect the IP Phone 1120E that you want to replace 3 Follow Procedure 65 on page 365 to install and configure the IP Phone 1120E 4 Enter the same TN and Node Number as the IP Phone 1120E you replaced The Ca
425. oxy Server TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When the download is complete the IP Phone 1110 resets The current Call Server date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Soft key labels also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN on the display End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 340 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Full Duplex mode In the Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch will result There is no intervention required under normal operation Note Changing the speed and or duplex mode on the phone changes both the LAN Ethernet port and PC Ethernet Port interfaces IMPORTANT It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch will result If the IP Phone is connected to a network configured for Full Duplex mode only the IP Phone cannot automatically negotiate the proper configuration Therefore in this instance to allow the IP Phone to work at the optimum speed and duplex mode Full Duplex
426. parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration you are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access 2 Local Diagnostics or 3 Network Configuration menu items from the Local Tools menu You are always prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access the 4 Lock Menu sub menu Two ways to control the menu lock are as follows e DHCP Secure Menu option the IP Phone processes the secure menu setting retrieved from the Full DHCP response e Lock Menu option double press the Services key to access the Local Tools menu Press 4 on the dialpad to access the Lock Menu items or use the up down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following Lock Menu options 1 Manual Secure Local Menu 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 360 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E 4 DHCP Secure Menu 5 Lock Now The settings configured in the Lock Menu sub menu override the settings received from the DHCP string For more information about 4 Lock Menu manual user settings see Appendix Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Configuring Secure Local Menu through Full DHCP Password protection is enabled during Full DHCP configuration if the SECUREMENU parameter or the PARTSECURE parameter are present at the end of the S4 part of the Full DHCP string If neither the SECUREMENU parameter nor
427. peaker Multi field LCD Dialpad display screen Handsfree LED wi f Soft keys self labeled Handsfree key 599953 T s2 Expand to PC key Copy key ED Services key S L Volume Headset Key Navigation keys control bar Mute Key Outbox Shift key Directory key Message inbox key Quit key Components and functions This section describes the following components and functions of the IP Phone 2004 e Keys and functions e Services menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 76 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Keys and functions Table 6 shows the IP Phone 2004 keys and functions Table 6 IP Phone 2004 keys and functions Part 1 of 2 Hold Goodbye Message waiting light Incoming call indicator Programmable line DN feature keys self labeled Soft keys self labeled Fixed feature keys Expand to PC Copy Navigation keys Shift Inbox Message Function Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the line DN key beside the flashing LCD to return to the caller on hold Press the Goodbye key to terminate an active call The Message waiting indicator turns ON to indicate that a message has been left for the user This indicator also flashes when the set ringer is ON Programmable line DN feature keys self labeled are configured for various features on the IP Phones A steady LCD light beside a line DN key indicates the feature or
428. pecialized feature keys Quit Directory Message Inbox Shift Outbox Services Copy six call processing fixed keys Mute IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 120 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Handsfree Goodbye Expand to PC Headset Hold e Call Duration Timer e ability to change the user defined feature key labels e Corporate Directory Personal Directory e Redial List e Callers List e Password Administration e Virtual Office e Branch Office e Active Call Failover Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download The IP Phone 2002 supports the following data network features e integrated switch for shared PC access the LAN Ethernet port supports 10 100BT Mbps Full Duplex mode the PC Ethernet port supports 10 100BT Mbps Full Duplex mode e automatic network configuration through DHCP For more information about automatic network configuration see Table 13 IP Phone 2002 IP parameters on page 131 e 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 121 of 630 Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP media encryption For more information about SRTP media encryption see Features overview on page 493 802 1Q VLAN and 802 1p priority support industry standards for
429. peration 553 3001 365 and Automatic Call Distribution Description 553 3001 351 Virtual Office The Virtual Office feature enables end users to log into any IP Phone using their own user ID and password This redirects the end user s telephone calls and other features to the Virtual Office logged in IP Phone For information about using Virtual Office on an IP Phone see the appropriate user guide For more information about the Virtual Office feature see Features and Services 553 3001 306 Emergency Services for Virtual Office The E911 for Virtual Office feature allows Virtual Office users to place an emergency call to the correct Public Safety Answering Point PSAP for their geographic location For more information about the E911 for Virtual Office feature see Emergency Services Access Description and Administration 553 3001 313 Active Call Failover The Active Call Failover ACF feature enables an IP Phone to reregister in the ACF mode during a Signaling Server failure The ACF mode preserves the following active media stream 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Features overview Page 497 of 630 LED status of the Mute Handsfree and Headset keys DRAM content Note All other elements feature keys soft keys and text areas are retained until the user presses a key or the connection with the Signaling Server is resumed If the user presses a key during the failover the display is cleared and a localiz
430. pply 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 279 of 630 Table 31 Components list for EMEA IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 charcoal 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Power over Ethernet PoE module with 25 ft console cable IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card 2 Extension microphones charcoal with cables Universal Power Supply NTEX11FA70E6 Accessories Universal Power Supply order power cord separately NTEX11CAE6 Power over Ethernet module NTEX11GAE6 Extension microphones charcoal with cables Table 32 Power cords IP Phone IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Power cords NA NEMA 5 15P 125V 13A 10ft NTTK14AB NTEX11DA70E6 Euro CEE 7 VII 250V 10A 2 5m NTTK16AB ANZ AS3112 250V 10A 2 5m NTTK15AA Swiss SEV 1011 250V 10A 8ft NTTK17AB UK Ireland BS1363 240V 10A 8ft NTTK18AB Denmark AFSNIT 250V 10A 2 5m NTTK22AB Argentina IRAM 2073 250V 104A 8ft A0814961 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 280 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Installation and Configuration The following sections provide a step by step guide through the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 installation and configuration process Before you begin First time installation Configuring the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033
431. prompted to supply the original Windows CD ROM so Windows can locate the required drivers 6 Install the IP Softphone 2050 7 Configure the IP Softphone 2050 parameters Click the Server tab in the Settings window and choose one of the following e To manually configure the IP Softphone 2050 parameters enter the IP address of the Call Server Server type port number and retries e For DHCP select the check box beside Automatic DHCP The IP address Server type port number and retries are automatically retrieved from the DHCP Server Note For more information about using partial DHCP see Procedure 11 Installing an IP Phone 2004 for the first time using DHCP on page 100 8 Click Apply End of Procedure Installing or upgrading the IP Softphone 2050 Use the following options to obtain the latest version of the IP Softphone 2050 new installation installing the IP Softphone 2050 for the first time e upgrade upgrading the IP Softphone 2050 to the latest version IP Softphone Version 1 and IP Softphone Version 2 can coexist on a PC although both versions cannot run at the same time 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 229 of 630 Note Before performing a new installation or an upgrade check the version of IP Softphone 2050 software IMPORTANT Before you upgrade an IP Softphone 2050 record the information found in the Server window This information may required
432. pt window to reaccess the Local Tools menu If you enter an incorrect password the Local Tools menu will not open Double press the Services key to open the password prompt window Only three incorrect password entries are allowed Any entry after the three attempts is ignored for 5 minutes The password prompt window is visible and you can reenter the password but the password is not processed until the 5 minute time expires Note Some text appears dimmed depending on the current state of the menu lock and the configuration of the IP Phone Only configuration options which are enabled from the current state appear active Menu options that are not available appear dimmed For more information about configuring the Local Tools menu for the IP Phone 1120E see Appendix Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Key number assignments You can assign a maximum of nine functions to the four soft labeled predefined soft keys Because the soft keys are predefined the user cannot change the key number assignment Functions are assigned to the soft keys in layers in LD 11 The Message Waiting key is numbered 16 Functions mapped to key numbers 17 to 26 are assigned to the four soft keys Labels for the soft keys appear in the display area For further information see Soft key label display on page 358 Figure 31 on page 357 shows the IP Phone 1120E display area IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page
433. ption double press the Services key to access the Local Tools menu Use the up down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following Lock Menu options 1 Manual Secure Local Menu You are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever the Services key is double pressed 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu You are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access the Local Diagnostics and the Network Configuration sub menus 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu When this option is selected the Lock Menu is disabled 4 DHCP Secure Menu The IP Phone follows the menu lock configuration received from the Full DHCP string If SECUREMENU is present you are prompted to enter a password after you double press the Services key If PARTSECURE is present you are prompted to enter a password whenever you select Local Diagnostics and Network Configuration 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 169 of 630 Ifneither SECUREMENU nor PARTSECURE is present then the menu is not locked 5 Lock Now The Lock Now item immediately exits the Tools menu closes any open Tools menu pages and locks the Tools menu The settings configured in the Lock Menu sub menu override the settings received from the DHCP string Configuring Secure Local Menu through Full DHCP Password protection is enabled during Full DHCP configuration if the SECUREMENU parameter or the PARTSECUR
434. ption Installation and Operation Page 134 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 5 Enter the information for the primary Connect Server 81 and the secondary Connect Server S2 Screen prompt S1 IP S1 Port 81 action S1 retry count 1 PK 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Description The primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2002 This is a fixed value 4100 Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if S1 Action is set to 1 The number of times the IP Phone 2002 attempts to connect to the server Enter 10 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto6or 1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 135 of 630 S2 IP S2 Port S2 action S2 retry count S2 PK Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes XAS IP VLAN Cfg 0 No 1 Yes VLAN Cfg 0 Auto 1 Man IP Phones The secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2002 Same as S1 Same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if S2 Action is set to 1 Same as S1 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media
435. quires a headset to operate properly disable Automatic Gain Control Refer to your PDA documentation to disable Automatic Gain Control IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 240 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 When the PDA is used in handsfree mode without a headset the PDA microphone picks up sounds from the speaker which creates a feedback loop Automatic Gain Control is used in this instance to avoid feedback Note When the PDA is used in handsfree mode without a headset the PDA microphone picks up sounds from the speaker creating a feedback loop Audio quality MVC 2050 provides a high quality audio environment which includes e NetEQ software included with the software package e interworking with G 711 codec providing high audio quality without compression MVC 2050 supports G 711 64 A law and U law e Audio selection tab providing a user selectable quality slider e Advanced Audio tab for expert users MVC 2050 Call Handling screen You can access and operate most MVC 2050 features from the Call Handling screen Select Answer from the Keys menu or use the Headset Answer icon to answer calls or obtain a dial tone The Call Handling screen contains the telephone dialpad The appearance of the Call Handling screen differs with each available skin Use the Settings gt Skin dialog box to determine the current skin All skins share common components Note You can use the up down left an
436. r Display characteristics An IP Phone 1110 has two major display areas context sensitive soft key label information line Figure 25 on page 312 shows the two display areas IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 312 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Figure 25 IP Phone 1110 display area NORTEL Upper display area 2333 98 29 8 80am information display Trans Conf Fud More Lower display area context sensitive soft key labels Cleaning the IP Phone display screen Gently wipe the IP Phone display screen with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not use any liquids or powders on the IP Phone Using anything other than a soft dry cloth can contaminate IP Phone components and cause premature failure Context sensitive soft key label display The context sensitive soft key label has a maximum of seven characters Each soft key includes the soft key label and an icon When a soft key is in use a triangle icon displays at the beginning of the soft key label and the label shifts one character to the right If the label is six characters long the last or rightmost character is truncated If a feature is enabled the icon state turns to On It remains in the on state until the feature key is pressed again This cancels the enabled feature and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state Use the More soft key to navigate through the layers of functions If only four functions
437. r A VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received in the VLAN NAME TLV This prompt is not displayed if Data VLAN or LLDP is not enabled Data VLAN ID This prompt is displayed if Data VLAN is enabled but LLDP is not enabled Duplex 0 Auto 1 Full Default O for Auto PSK SRTP 0 No 1 Yes Default O for No GARP Ignore 0 No 1 Yes Default 0 for No Note You are prompted to enter the TFTP Server IP address if you are using a TFTP Server to download the current firmware For CS 1000 Release 4 5 accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 enter the TFTP Server IP address The IP Phone searches for the TFTP Server for firmware upgrade If the file name specified in configuration file is not the same as the current firmware the IP Phone downloads the file and upgrades the firmware This takes several minutes When the upgrade is complete the IP Phone reboots For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 The IP Phone 2004 can support a primary S1 and secondary S2 connect server If you require IP Phones to register on multiple nodes see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes in IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone 2004 searches for the connect server When the connection is complete proceed with step 7 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 No
438. r Full DHCP a If you select Full DHCP then the following parameters are retrieved from the DHCP server avalid IP Phone 2001 IP address asubnet mask the default Gateway for the IP Phone 2001 on the LAN segment to which it is connected IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 64 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 the S1 IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S1 action the S1 retry count This is the number of times the IP Phone 2001 attempts to connect to the server the S2 IP The secondary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S2 action the S2 retry count b If you select Partial DHCP then you must enter the following parameters Screen prompt S1 IP 81 Port S1 action S1 retry count Description The primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2001 This is a fixed value 4100 Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if the S1 action is set to 1 The number of times the IP Phone 2001 attempts to connect to the server Enter 10 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 1 PK S2 IP S2 Port S2 action S2 retry count 2 PK Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes XAS IP Nortel IP Phone
439. r key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Choose one of the following e for TPS only enter 1 e for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Retry Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Retry the number of times the IP Phone 1120E attempts to connect to the server Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 PK S1 PK the Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information You must enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The default is ffffffffffffffff Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S2 IP Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 376 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 S2 IP the secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1120E Note The IP Phone 1120E can support
440. r of voice frames the application should have in its jitter buffer IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 258 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Table 26 Advanced Audio screen Part 2 of 2 Selection Description Highwater Mark Highwater Mark indicates the maximum number of voice frames the application should have in its jitter buffer before it starts discarding packets This value should be at least 2 5 times the value of jitter If a smaller value is assigned MVC 2050 regards it as an error and corrects it Early Packet and Late Packet Early Packet Resync and Late Resync Packet Resync indicate the points at which MVC 2050 discards and restarts the jitter buffer contents This value should be at least five times the Highwater Mark Echo cancellation MVC 2050 can use the Voice Gateway Media Card for echo cancellation Jitter Buffer Global IP Sound NetEQ bundled with MVC 2050 software provides loss concealment and compensation for up to 30 packet loss NetEQ is an advanced jitter buffer and packet loss concealment unit that delivers improvements in sound quality while minimizing latency for IP telephone systems It is a one sided embedded solution that enables high quality voice over networks NetEQ reduces jitter buffer delay 30 80 ms and automatically provides a solution to clock drift present in VoIP hardware NetEQ is codec independent The jitter buffer is used
441. rd starts a Wait until the Welcome to the Install Shield Wizard for the Nortel IP Softphone 2050 screen appears b Press Tab to select Cancel Press Return d Click Yes to confirm that you want to cancel the installation e Click Finish From Windows Explorer select your CD ROM Select Accessibility bat The file Accessibility bat executes the command line setup s vqb vUI508 1 This installs the application and sets the user interface to the Accessibility Interface End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 232 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Windows QoS Packet Scheduler For Windows XP the Windows QoS Packet Scheduler is installed and selected by default For Windows 2000 you must install the Windows QoS Packet Scheduler Use Procedure 40 to install the Windows QoS Packet Scheduler for Windows 2000 Procedure 40 Installing the Windows QoS Packet Scheduler for Windows 2000 1 Select Start gt Control Panel 2 Select Network and Dialup Connections 3 Right click Local Area Connection 4 Select Properties 5 Click Install The Select Network Component Type window opens 6 Click Add The Select Network Service window opens Select QoS Packet Scheduler Click OK End of Procedure To verify Windows QoS Packet Scheduler is installed go to Control Panel gt Network Connections Windows XP or Network and Dialup Connections Windows 2000 gt Local Area Connection gt Pr
442. re configured on keys 32 to 85 calls can be directed to those keys which the user cannot access This means that the IP Phone rings but the call cannot be answered In such cases the incoming call receives Call Forward No Answer CENA treatment IP Phone 1120E Note The IP Phone 1120E does not support Shift key functionality If only one Expansion Module is configured in LD 11 but two or three Expansion Modules are detected on an IP Phone1120E the second and third Expansion Modules are ignored An error message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration If two Expansion Modules are configured in LD 11 but only one Expansion Module responds the keys on the second Expansion Module are available for call processing but are not accessible to the user This means that lines and features on keys 32 to 67 can cause the IP Phone 1120E to ring but there is no way to answer it An error message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration If three Expansion Modules are configured in LD 11 but only one or two Expansion Modules respond the keys on the third Expansion Module are available for call processing but are not accessible to the user This means that lines and features on keys 68 to 85 can cause the IP Phone 1120E to ring but there is no way to answer it An error message displays to alert the ad
443. red To use local AC power the optional AC adapter can be ordered separately 8 Use Procedure 2 on page 56 to install the IP Phone 2001 for the first time using manual configuration or use Procedure 3 on page 62 to install the IP Phone 2001 for the first time using DHCP End of Procedure Startup sequence When an IP Phone 2001 is connected to the network it must perform a startup sequence The elements of the startup sequence include e obtaining VLAN ID if supported by the network infrastructure obtaining the IP parameters connecting to the Call Server obtaining a User ID See Table 5 for a summary of the IP parameters and how they are obtained Table 5 IP Phone 2001 IP parameters Part 1 of 2 Parameter Method of Acquisition VLAN ID Manually entered or automatically obtained through DHCP and LLDP IP Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 55 of 630 Table 5 IP Phone 2001 IP parameters Part 2 of 2 Parameter Method of Acquisition Net Mask Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Default Gateway Address Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Partial or Full DHCP Connect Server IP address port Manually entered or automatically retrieved through Full action and retry count primary DHCP and secondary User ID Node ID Node Password Ma
444. rence Phone 2033 from service on page 300 Note After an IP Phone has been installed and configured if power to the phone is interrupted re entry of the IP parameters Node Number TN or re acquisition of firmware is not required The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 uses the customer IP data network to communicate with the Communication Server 1000 The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 translates voice into data packets for transport using Internet Protocol A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide information that enables the IP Audio Conference 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 267 of 630 Phone 2033 network connection and connection to the Communication Server 1000 Figure 18 shows the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Figure 18 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Microphone hidden Status indicator LEDs Speaker LCD display screen AS Navigation keys Services key Message Inbox key Hold key p i S 7 Microphone D Microphone Soft keys self labeled seid ss Volume control keys Line key Mute key Goodbye ke Dialpad IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 268 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Extension microphones The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 supports up to two extension microphones that extend the microphone range in large rooms Each extension microphone has a Mute button and
445. ressed again This cancels the enabled feature and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state System Tray The System Tray provides fast access to most of the IP Softphone 2050 functionality The user can make answer and manage a call as well as access macros and features from the System Tray without opening the Call Control window Nortel USB Audio Kit The USB Audio Kit enables the user to speak and hear callers To ensure proper IP Softphone 2050 operation use only Nortel supported USB audio kits The USB Audio Kit includes the following e USB Headset Adapter desktop or mobile e Installation Guide e USB cord The following USB adapters are supported on the IP Softphone 2050 e Nortel Enhanced USB Adapter desktop e Nortel Mobile USB Adapter mobile The Algo Analog Terminal Adapter ATA is a USB adapter that lets you use analog terminals instead of headsets With an Algo ATA users can for example use a cordless headset with their IP Softphone 2050 The IP Softphone 2050 is compatible with the Algo ATA For support see www algosolutions com IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 216 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 USB Headset Adapter The USB Headset Adapter provides a controlled high quality audio environment including e absolute and predictable loss and level plan implementation that is necessary to meet TIA 810 FCC part 68 and its international equivalents
446. rk For more information about GARP see Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection on page 187 If an External Application Server XAS is available in the network use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the XAS IP combo box Use the dialpad to enter the XAS IP address The XAS delivers business applications to the IP Phone For more information about XAS see Nortel Application Gateway 1000 documentation Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the Graphical XAS check box Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the Port combo box Use the dialpad to fill in the information Upgrade the IP Phone 2007 firmware The IP Phone 2007 supports remote firmware upgrades through a TFTP process and an automated UFTP process The method to upgrade the firmware depends on the following Call Server software e For Succession Release 3 0 or CS 1000 Release 4 0 the TFTP Server is required to download the current firmware Enter the TFTP Server IP address at the prompt e For CS 1000 Release 4 5 and later use either a TFTP Server to upgrade the firmware at the prompt accept the default entry of 0 0 0 0 or UFTP to download the current firmware For further information about TFTP Server configuration see Appendix Appendix H TFTP Server on page 605 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 184 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 41 42 43 44 45 For Succession
447. rmation see IP Phone 2001 User Guide End of Procedure Full Duplex mode In the Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup Typically the IP Phone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate and it selects the best speed and duplex mode available There is no intervention required under normal operation Note Changing the speed and or duplex mode on the phone changes both the LAN Ethernet port and PC Ethernet Port interfaces IMPORTANT It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch will result If the IP Phone is connected to a network configured for Full Duplex mode only the IP Phone cannot automatically negotiate the proper configuration Therefore in this instance to allow the IP Phone to work at the optimum speed and duplex mode Full Duplex mode must be enabled 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 69 of 630 Use Procedure 4 on page 69 to enable Full Duplex mode Procedure 4 Enabling Full Duplex mode 1 2 Reset the phone by disconnecting and re connecting power When the Nortel logo appears press each of the soft keys in sequence See Procedure 2 on page 56 If no other configuration changes are required press OK repeatedly until the Duplex network option appears
448. rmation about supported operating systems see the IP Softphone 2050 User Guide Perform the software version upgrade for IP Softphone 2050 manually The technician must do this at the PC The Voice Gateway Media Card does not download any software to the IP Softphone 2050 The isetShow command on the Voice Gateway Media Card displays the current version of any registered IP Softphone 2050 The IP Softphone 2050 does not have an ACD Supervisor headset jack Agent walkaway is supported with the Enhanced USB Keypad Adapter An IP Softphone 2050 does not register against a TN configured for any other type of IP Phone Soundcard audio is supported only for incoming call notification Nortel supports USB Headset Adapter for the speech path 5 menu options available on the IP Phone 2004 not required on the IP Softphone 2050 are Volume adjustment Contrast adjustment Display diagnostics 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 225 of 630 Key click On hook default path System components The IP Softphone 2050 is comprised of an external Universal Serial Bus headset adapter Nortel Enhanced USB Adapter desktop and a software application installed on the user PC The IP Softphone 2050 also supports a mobile adapter Nortel Mobile USB Adapter IMPORTANT Use your IP Softphone 2050 with the approved Nortel Enhanced USB adapter desktop or Nortel Mobile USB Adapter only T
449. rocedure 116 Using Network Diagnostic Tools 567 Procedure 117 Using Ethernet Statistics tool 569 Procedure 118 Using the IP Network Statistics tool 572 Procedure 119 Using the USB Devices tool 575 Procedure 120 Locking the Tools menu sels 583 Procedure 121 Unlocking the Tools menu esee 583 Procedure 122 Locking the Tools menu 587 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 List of procedures Page 29 of 630 Procedure 123 Unlocking the Tools menu e 587 Procedure 124 Configure the Bluetooth wireless technology administration setting 00 eee eee eee 591 Procedure 125 Enabling Bluetooth wireless technology on the IP Phone 1140E nnn 592 Procedure 126 Pairing the Bluetooth wireless technology headset with your IP PHONG 2uiosuosaiire ko ces RR ene 596 Procedure 127 Switching between a wired headset and wireless headset 601 Procedure 128 Unpairing a wireless headset 601 Procedure 129 Updating the IP Phones firmware 606 Procedure 130 Downloading the firmware for the IP Phone 2007 608 Procedure 131 Upgrading the firmware for IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E using automatic TFTP download GUDOOIUD culaacisaskaeesna cake ea
450. roduct codes Table 56 IP Phone 1150E component list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 1150E package contents includes P Phone 1150E 2 1 m 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Getting Started Card Note f you are using local power the approved Nortel global power supply and a standard local power cord must be ordered separately IP Phone 1150E with Agent icon keycaps NTYSO6AA IP Phone 1150E with English keycaps NTYSO6BA IP Phone 1150E with Supervisor icon key caps NTYS15AAE6 Replacement parts Footstand kit Charcoal NTYS11BA70 2 1 m 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable NTYS13AA Accessories Key cap removal tool NTNM19AA IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 452 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Table 56 IP Phone 1150E component list Part 2 of 2 Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series NTYSO8AA Power adapter Global power supply N0089601 IEC cable RoHS Non RoHS 1 8 m 5 9 ft 10 amp IEC320 C13 NTYS14AAE6 NTYS14AA North America 2 4 m 8 ft 240 VAC 10 amp ANZ power cord AS 3 N A NTTK15AA Australia New Zealand 250 VAC Option 11C Standard European power NTTK16ABE6 NTTK16AB cord Other EMEA Kenya Korea Thailand Indonesia Vietnam India Pakistan 3 m 9 9 ft 125 VAC Option 11C Swiss power cord NTTK17ABE6 NTTK17AB Switzerland 240 VAC Option 11C UK power cord NTTK18ABE6 NTTK18AB Hong Kong Ireland United Kingdom Singapore Malaysia
451. roll and highlight Gateway Use the dialpad to fill in the information Gateway the default gateway for the IP Phone 2007 on the LAN segment to which it is connected Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 IP Use the dialpad to fill in the information S1 IP the primary CS 1000 node IP address for IP Phone 2007 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port Use the dialpad to fill in the information S1 Port a fixed value of 4100 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 Action Use the dialpad to fill in the information Choose one of the following e for TPS only enter 1 e for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Retry Use the dialpad to fill in the information IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 180 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Retry the number of times the IP Phone 2007 attempts to connect to the server Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 PK Use the dialpad to fill in the information S1 PK the Private key of the Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Enter 6 or 1 This value depends on the S
452. ronized to the transmitting clock The buffer overruns and underruns are corrected by two mechanisms both of which apply to the IP Phones and the DSPs on the Voice Gateway Media Card IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 218 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Jitter buffer Use the default value sent from the TPS the value configured in TM Nortel recommends that you use the default value to configure the IP Softphone 2050 jitter buffer The jitter buffer has a desired size and a maximum allowable size If the jitter buffer exceeds its maximum allowable size sufficient frames are discarded to reduce the contents of the jitter buffer to the desired setting If the jitter buffer underruns frames are held in the jitter buffer until it fills to the desired level Both underrun and overrun result in a discontinuity in the audio For codecs that support silence suppression the jitter buffer is resynchronized at the beginning of each talk spurt Quality of Service A combination of codec selection jitter buffer and packet time and the use of the DiffServ Code Point DSCP of the network contributes to the end to end Quality of Service QoS However the IP Softphone 2050 is an application within the context of the PC operating system so the operating system has an effect on the end to end QoS for the IP Softphone 2050 Functionality which is commonly handled in DSP hardware such as the codec packetization implem
453. rrently using the TN Procedure 23 Replacing an IP Phone 2002 1 Obtain the node and TN information of the phone you want to replace 2 Disconnect the IP Phone 2002 that you want to replace IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 150 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 3 Follow either Procedure 17 on page 128 or Procedure 19 on page 139 to install and configure the IP Phone 2002 4 Enterthe same TN and Node Number as the IP Phone 2002 you replaced The Call Server associates the new IP Phone 2002 with the existing TN End of Procedure Removing an IP Phone 2002 from service Procedure 24 Removing an IP Phone 2002 from service 1 Disconnect the IP Phone 2002 from the network or turn off the power Note The service to the PC is disconnected as well if the PC is connected to the IP Phone 2002 If the IP Phone 2002 was automatically configured the DHCP lease expires and the IP address returns to the available pool 2 InLD 11 enter OUT at the TN prompt End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 151 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Contents This section contains information on the following topics IntrOdBCUol secueedize sp EbreiQqLseweree32hesiX RESP pides 152 b cogi M P TEE EET 152 Components and T nctiofls esce ee eR mn 153 Supported CAMES eii on Ga ced irpeeszeeb dms reu iren duds 159 Features not curently supported iso cceosdA dard PE A EET 162 TOUCH panel lieet rt Re RR
454. rt Handset jack PC Ethernet port SEMENE Headset jack IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 130 of 630 5 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Connect the AC power adapter optional Leaving the AC adapter unplugged from the power outlet connect the adapter to the AC adapter jack in the bottom of the phone Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the adapter cord through the channels in the stand Secure the IP Phone footstand to the base of the IP Phone Use the angle adjustment grip on the top back of the IP Phone to adjust the position Power the IP Phone 2002 using either the Power over Ethernet or an AC power transformer local power If you are using local power plug the AC power transformer into the nearest power outlet Make sure you use the correct AC power transformer is used The voltage rating of the transformer must match the wall outlet voltage See Table 12 IP Phone 2002 components list on page 125 Note The IP Phone 2004 supports both AC power and Power over LAN options including IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 2 To use Power over Ethernet where power is delivered over the CAT5 cable the LAN must support Power over Ethernet and an AC adapter is not required To use local AC power the optional AC adapter can be ordered separately Use Procedure 18 on page 132 to install the IP Phone 2002 for the first time using manual configuration or use Procedure 19 on page 139 to install the IP
455. rtel IP Phone 2004 Page 99 of 630 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description Password IP Phone Installer Password You are not prompted to enter the IP Phone Installer Password if it has not been configured in your Call Server Node The node ID TN The TN or VTN The IP Phone 2004 registers with the TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When registration is complete the IP Phone 2004 resets Note The Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see IP Line Description Installation and Operation b53 3001 365 The current Call Server date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more information see IP Phone 2004 User Guide End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 100 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Procedure 11 Installing an IP Phone 2004 for the first time using DHCP IMPORTANT Timing information There are only four seconds s between plugging in the IP Phone 2004 power transformer and the appearance of the Nortel logo in the middle of the display When you see the logo you have one s to respond by
456. rts both AC power and Power over LAN options including IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 3 To use Power over Ethernet where power is delivered over the CAT5 cable the LAN must support Power over Ethernet and an AC adapter is not required To use local AC power the optional AC adapter can be ordered separately Note 2 You must use CAT5e or later cables if you want to use gigabit Ethernet Figure 34 shows the IP Phone 1120E connections Figure 34 IP Phone 1120E connections Accessory Expansion Module port PC Ethernet port LAN Ethernet port Tilt lever Link lamp AC adapter jack Headset jack USB connector Handset jack 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Figure 35 Cable routing tracks Method A Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 369 of 630 Install the handset Connect the end of the handset cable with the short straight section into the handset Connect the end of the handset cable with the long straight section to the back of the phone using the RJ 9 handset jack marked with the symbol Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the handset cord through the channels in the stand so that it exits behind the handset on the right side in the channel exit in the stand base marked with the symbol See Figure 35 Method B Install the Ethernet cable Connect one end of the supplied Ethernet cable to the back of your phone using the RJ 45 connect marked with
457. rver Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 or IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug your IP Phone 1150E into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 454 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Configuring the IP Phone 1150E You must configure the IP Phone 1150E before you can use it Use Procedure 79 to configure the IP Phone 1150E for the first time Procedure 79 Configuring an IP Phone 1150E 1 Configure a virtual loop on the Call Server using LD 97 For more information about configuring a virtual loop see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 and Software Input Output Administration B53 3001 31 1 2 Configure the IP Phone 1150E in LD 11 LD 11 Configure the IP Phone 1150E on the Call Server Response Description Add new For the IP Phone 1150E 99 9 Enter acd Enter 0 if no Expansion Modules for IP Phones 1100 Series are added 1 to 3 correspond to the number of Expansion Modules for IP Phones 1100 Series attached to the IP Phone Same as IP Phone 2004 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 455 of 630 LD 11 Configure the IP Phone 1150E on the Call Server Response Description Enter 0 if no Expansion Modules for IP Phones 1100 Series are added 1 to 3 correspond to the number of Expansion Modules for IP Pho
458. s and functions for Supervisor key configuration Function Display Agents Press the Dsply Agents key to obtain a summary of the current status of all agent positions Interflow Press the Interflow key to forward calls to a predefined target queue when the call backlog or the waiting time in the queue exceeds a set threshold Answer Emergency Press the Ans Emerg key to join the agent in an emergency situation call Answer Agent The Ans Agent key corresponds to the agent Supervisor key Press the Ans Agent key to open the direct line between the Supervisor and the agent Call Agent Press the Call Agent key to connect to an agent position Observe Agent Press the Obv Agent key to monitor activity on the agent phone 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 437 of 630 Services menu Table 52 shows the Services menu Table 52 Services menu Press the Services key to access the following items Telephone Options see Notes 1 and 2 Volume Adjustment Contrast Adjustment Language Date Time Display diagnostics Local Dialpad Tone Set Info Diagnostics Headset Type Call Log Options Ring type Call Timer Call Indicator Light Change Feature Key Label Name Display Format IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 438 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Table 52 Services menu Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test
459. s and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are presented the configuration is saved and the IP Phone reboots with the saved changes e BkSpace backspace a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 Atthe prompt EAP Enable enter 1 Yes 1 for Yes if the network infrastructure supports 802 1x port based network access control Enter DevicelD and Password If you select 0 No 0 for No you are not prompted to enter Device ID and Password For more information about EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 2 Atthe prompt LLDP Enable enter 1 Y 1 for Yes default or O N 0 for No For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 3 Atthe prompt DHCP Yes No enter 1 Y 1 for Yes default By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Phone 1110 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Phone 1110 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be ins
460. s enabled and a password screen displays Go to is not NULL step 4 the node password is disabled a TN screen displays Go to step 5 4 Enterthe password at the password screen and press OK A TN screen displays Note To obtain the password enter the nodePwdShow command in Element Manager For further information see Communication Server 1000 Element Manager System Administration 553 3001 332 5 Select the Clear soft key to clear the existing TN 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 189 of 630 6 Enter the new TN End of Procedure Replacing an IP Phone 2007 IMPORTANT Two IP Phones cannot share the same TN You must remove the IP Phone 2007 that is currently using the TN Procedure 30 Replacing an IP Phone 2007 1 Obtain the node and TN information of the phone you want to replace 2 Disconnect the IP Phone 2007 that you want to replace 3 Follow Procedure 25 on page 173 to install and configure the IP Phone 2007 Enter the same TN and Node Number as the IP Phone 2007 you replaced The system associates the new IP Phone 2007 with the existing TN End of Procedure Removing an IP Phone 2007 from service Procedure 31 Removing an IP Phone 2007 from service 1 Disconnect the IP Phone 2007 from the network or turn the power off Note The service to the PC is disconnected as well if the PC is connected to the IP Phone 2007 If the IP Phone 2007 was automatically conf
461. s the status of the configured DN Key labels are left aligned for keys on the left side of the screen and right aligned for keys on the right side of the screen To change the feature key label press the Services key to access Telephone Options gt Change Feature key label option For more information about changing the feature key label see the IP Phone 1120E User Guide Note If a label is longer than ten characters the last ten characters are displayed and the excess characters are deleted from the beginning of the string Information line display An IP Phone 1120E has a single line information display area with the following information e Caller number e Caller name e Feature prompt strings IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 358 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E e User entered digits e Date and time information if the IP Phone is in an idle state or Call Timer if provisioned in the Telephone options menu The information in the display area changes according to the call processing state and active features Because the IP Phone 1120E only has a single line information display area you are prompted to scroll through any additional lines of information For example during an incoming call only the Directory Number DN appears if the caller name is greater than 10 characters Press the flashing arrow to display the caller name Soft key label display The soft key label has a maximum of s
462. s to 0 IMPORTANT With Full DHCP the vendor specific or site specific options must be configured depending on the customers DHCP server configuration For further information on configuring Full DHCP see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 315 of 630 Accessing the Local Tools menu Once the password is entered the Local Tools menu remains active for 5 minutes You can freely navigate exit and reenter the Local Tools menu without being prompted to reenter the password To reset the timer before the 5 minute time expires double press the Services key You can also press the 5 key to select the Lock Now item from the Lock Menu The Lock Now item immediately exits the Local Tools menu closes any open Local Tools menu pages and locks the Local Tools menu Alternatively when time expires the Local Tools menu and any open submenus are closed Double press the Services key to open the password prompt window to reaccess the Local Tools menu If you enter an incorrect password the Local Tools menu will not open Double press the Services key to open the password prompt window Only three incorrect password entries are allowed Any entry after the three attempts is ignored for 5 minutes The password prompt window is visible and you can reenter the password but the password is not processed until the 5 minute time expires Note Depending on the curre
463. ser ends an active call before performing firmware upgrade otherwise results may be unpredictable 1 Download the latest IP Phones firmware from the Nortel web site 2 Load the latest version of the IP Phones firmware and place it on the TFTP Server Ensure the TFTP Server is started 3 Select the TFTP Upgrade option in the Service gt Option gt Tools menu See Figure 74 on page 610 Figure 74 TFTP Upgrade menu option 12 03 12 35pm Connecting to S1 Network Configuration Local Diagnostics Touch Panel Setup mo Contrast and Brightness USB Devices E Preferences 4 Enter the IP address for the TFTP Server in the TFTP IP edit box The dialpad can be used to enter the IP address by substituting star as dot See Figure 75 on page 611 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Figure 75 Appendix H TFTP Server Page 611 of 630 TFTP Server IP address screen TFTP DOWNLOADING TFTP Configuration TFTP IP 192 168 249 10 Read Configuration Config File Content not read yet TFTP Address DownLoad Mode Version Type File Name 5 Tap on the Read Configuration button The IP Phone reads the configuration file information from the TFTP Server and displays the image information in the dialog box Check your network connection if the phone cannot read the configuration file See Figure 76 on page 612 IP Phones Description Installation
464. space a configuration entry to change it e Clear clear an entire configuration entry e Cancel cancels out of network configuration The IP Phone reboots without saving changes 1 Atthe prompt EAP Enable enter 1 Yes 1 for Yes if the network infrastructure supports 802 1x port based network access control Enter DevicelD and Password If you select 0 No 0 for No you will not be prompted to enter Device ID and Password For more information about EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 2 Atthe prompt LLDP Enable enter 1 Y 1 for Yes default or O N 0 for No For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 57 of 630 At the prompt DHCP Yes No enter 0 N 0 for No You are prompted to enter all parameters By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Phone 2001 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Phone 2001 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments e Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server Note A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Ful
465. st first install an IP Telephony Node with the Communication Server For information about installing an IP Telephony Node see Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 or IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug your IP Phone 2007 into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result Configuring the IP Phone 2007 Procedure 25 Configuring the IP Phone 2007 1 Configure a virtual loop on the system using LD 97 For more information about configuring a virtual loop see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 and Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 Configure the IP Phone 2007 on the system using LD 11 For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 Connect the IP Phone 2007 components IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 174 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 a Connect one end of the handset cord to the handset jack on the back of the IP Phone identified with a handset icon b Connect the other end of the handset cord to the handset 4 Choose one of the following connections For an IP Phone not sharing a LAN access with a PC Connect one end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable to the LAN Ethernet port located on the back of the IP Phone identified with a LAN icon Plug the other end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable into the IP network For a
466. stics Do one of the following e Press the Cancel soft key to quit the Diagnostics submenu and return to the Telephone Options menu e Use the Navigation keys to scroll through the Diagnostics submenu e Press Select to select one of the diagnostics 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 533 of 630 The following items are available on the Diagnostics submenu e Diag Tools Diagnostic Tools Ping and TraceRoute HRtherStats Ethernet Statistics P Stats IP Statistics e RUDP Stats RUDP Statistics e QoS Stats Quality of Service Statistics End of Procedure Procedure 94 Accessing Diagnostic Tools in Remote mode 1 Select Diagnostic Tools from the Diagnostics submenu 2 Do one ofthe following e Press the Cancel soft key to return to the Diagnostics submenu e Use the Navigation keys to scroll to the DiagnosticTools selection 3 Press the Select soft key to choose one of the following e Ping see Figure 60 on page 548 e TraceRoute see Figure 61 on page 549 End of Procedure Ping The following items are available on the Ping submenu in Remote mode e IP Addr e Nr of Pings Ping e Last ping IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 534 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Procedure 95 Entering an IP address 1 Scroll through the Ping submenu to the IP Addr menu item An IP address appears if previously entered Exa
467. sword If you select No you are not prompted to enter Device ID and Password For more information on EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 2 Atthe prompt LLDP Enable enter 1 Y 1 for Yes default or O N 0 for No For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 133 of 630 At the prompt DHCP Yes No enter 0 N 0 for No By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Phone 2002 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Phone 2002 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments e Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server Note A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Enter the following information Screen prompt Description set IP A valid IP Phone 2002 IP address net msk A subnet mask def gw The default Gateway for the IP Phone 2002 on the LAN segment to which it is connected IP Phones Descri
468. t MVC 2050 identifies the MVC 2050 application Select About MVC 2050 to view configuration information for your MVC 2050 such as system product name version number copyright indication manufacturer name and logo and Global IP Sound name and logo MVC 2050 uses packet loss concealment provided by Global IP Sound NetEQ software 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 245 of 630 MVC 2050 graphical interface skins components Icons MVC 2050 provides alternative graphical images known as skins The dialpad menu and icon buttons are located on the skin Skins are available in several colors and arrangements All skins share the following common components e programmable line feature keys e soft keys self labeled e dialpad e display e Call Handling icons e Toolbar icons e Menu Bar icons e retractable toolbar e Message Waiting light e System Input Panel icon The MVC 2050 Call Handling screen presents icon equivalents for menu items Icons are divided into three types e Call Handling icons e Toolbar icons e Menu Bar icons Call Handling icons The following three Call Handling icons appear across the top of the Call Handling screen e Hold IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 246 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 e Headset Answer Release Menu Bar icons MVC 2050 provides the following icons which can be used instead of t
469. t key controls the headset even if a wired headset is attached If a Bluetooth wireless technology headset moves out of connecting range a special beep sounds in the headset indicating the connection was lost When you do not want to use Bluetooth wireless technology If a Bluetooth wireless technology headset is connected and you want to use the wired headset you can switch between the wireless headset and the wired headset It is not necessary to unpair or disable Bluetooth wireless technology You can switch between a wired headset and back again either with the phone is idle or during an active call Use Procedure 127 to switch between a wired headset and a wireless headset Procedure 127 Switching between a wired headset and wireless headset 1 Double press the Headset key to open the 3 Bluetooth Setup dialog box 2 Press the Left Right navigation key to select the Use BT headset item A check mark indicates that the wireless headset is used This option is on o by default 3 Toswitch between a wired headset and a wireless headset do one of the following e Press the Enter key to clear the check box and to use the wired headset e Press the Enter key to select the check box and to use the wireless headset 4 Press the Exit soft key to exit to the main display End of Procedure Use Procedure 128 to unpair the Bluetooth wireless technology headset IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 604
470. t manual entry Note A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Press the Enter key Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight SET IP Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Set IP a valid IP Phone 1120E IP address Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight NET MASK Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Net Mask a subnet mask 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 375 of 630 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Gateway Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Gateway the default gateway for the IP Phone 1120E on the LAN segment to which it is connected Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 IP Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information 1 IP the primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1120E Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port 1 Port a fixed value of 4100 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight S1 Action Press the Ente
471. t subnet l 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix I IP Phone soft keys Page 619 of 630 Appendix IP Phone soft keys Table 77 describes the IP Phone function assignment for each of the context sensitive soft keys Use LD 11 to program keys 16 to 26 on the IP Phones Note If you attempt to configure anything other than the permitted response the Call Server generates an error code Table 77 IP Phone context sensitive soft key functions Part 1 of 2 Key number Response Description Message Waiting key Removes function or feature from key Call Transfer key Removes function or feature from key Three party conference key Six party conference key Removes function or feature from key Call Forward key Removes function or feature from key Ring Again key Removes function or feature from key Call Park key Removes function or feature from key Ringing Number Pickup key Removes function or feature from key IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 620 of 630 Appendix I IP Phone soft keys Table 77 IP Phone context sensitive soft key functions Part 2 of 2 Key number Response 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Description Speed Call User System Speed Call User Speed Call Controller System Speed Call Controller Removes function or feature from key Privacy Release key Removes function or feature from key Charge Account key Removes function or feat
472. t to which the PC is connected An IP Phone can receive Broadcast frames from a PC s data VLAN Any data network broadcast storm packets from the network are seen by the IP Phone Significant broadcast storms occurring on the DATA VLAN can impact IP Phone performance See Enhanced VLAN Tagging on page 516 for configuration information to filter network activity from impacting IP Phone performance Enhanced 802 1P and 802 1Q support on the IP Phones improves voice quality by taking advantage of the VLAN filtering available on the three port switch on the BCM 1100 1101 1103 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 VLAN IDs Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description Page 515 of 630 The following functions are available on the three port switch e hardware VLAN filter e two TX out queues on each port High Priority Queue HPQ and Low Priority Queue LPQ Therefore traffic other than Voice VLAN can be filtered by enabling the VLAN filtering feature and taking advantage of the hardware VLAN filter Voice traffic is always queued to the HPQ thereby providing a higher quality of service The VOICE and DATA VLAN ID fields can be specified on a per interface basis There is only one network interface on the IP Phone however the IP Phone has two internal IDs one for voice and one for data traffic The IP Phone firmware can detect and route the voice and data traffic The VLAN ID fields are global settings That is all voice pac
473. tag stripping see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Duplex combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box e Auto Link speed is auto negotiated with the network device and attached PC e 10BT Full Link speed is available for up to 10 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port e 100BT Full Link speed is available for up to 100 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port e 1000BT Full Link speed is available for up to 1000 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port For more information about Full Duplex see Full Duplex mode on page 471 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Enable PSK SRTP check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off The SRTP media encryption feature provides encrypted media A preshared secret is embedded in the Nortel IP Phone to generate and to exchange encryption parameters without any Call Server involvement 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 469 of 630 For further information about the SRTP media encryption feature SRTP media encryption on page 498 and System Security Management NN43001 604 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Ignore GARP check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off The GARP feat
474. taining the IP parameters connecting to the Call Server e obtaining a User ID See Table 48 for a summary of the IP parameters and how they are obtained I Table 48 IP Phone 1140E IP parameters Part 1 of 2 Parameter Method of acquisition VLAN ID Manually entered or automatically obtained through DHCP and LLDP IP Address Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP Net Mask Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 415 of 630 Table 48 IP Phone 1140E IP parameters Part 2 of 2 Parameter Method of acquisition Default Gateway address Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP Connect Server IP address port Manually entered or automatically obtained through Full action and retry count primary DHCP and secondary User ID Node ID Node Password Manually entered for first time configuration Obtained and TN from local storage on subsequent power cycles Installing the IP Phone 1140E To install the IP Phone 1140E use Procedure 72 Configuring the IP Phone 1140E on page 408 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 416 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Procedure 73 Installing the IP Phone 1140E IMPORTANT Timing information There are approximately 45 seconds s between plugging in the IP Phone 1140E power adapter and the
475. tallation and Operation Page 248 of 630 Operation Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Use Procedure 47 to start MVC 2050 Procedure 43 Starting MVC 2050 1 From the Main Application screen select Programs 2 Select Start 3 Select Mobile Voice Client 2050 The Call Handling screen appears End of Procedure CAUTION PDA processor models speed and amount of memory vary To maintain audio quality do not overload the processor with intensive tasks while using MVC 2050 For example Nortel does not recommend using your PDA version of Internet Explorer while using MVC 2050 PDA processor speed can have adverse effects on MVC 2050 performance IMPORTANT Set the PDA processor speed to the highest setting or to auto which changes the processor speed according to system status To set the PDA processor speed Refer to the PDA user guide IMPORTANT If the Wireless Fidelity WiFi application goes down while your PDA is set to Standby mode you cannot receive incoming calls on your device To keep the WiFi application running and receive incoming calls disable the power settings for Standby mode Go to the Settings option on your PDA 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 249 of 630 PDA battery life can affect the MVC 2050 call duration and the call volume IMPORTANT PDA vendors offer two types of rechargeable battery standard and extended life The extended life
476. talled configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 335 of 630 For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 At the prompt Cached IP select 0 0 No default to conform to the DHCP standard and to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server Only select 1 1 for Yes to force the IP Phone to start with a cached IP address in the event that the IP Phone cannot connect to the DHCP server and obtain an IP address Select Partial or Full DHCP a If you select Full DHCP then the following parameters are obtained from the DHCP server a valid IP Phone 1110 IP address a subnet mask the default Gateway for the IP Phone 1110 on the LAN segment to which it is connected the S1 IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S1 action the S1 retry count This is the number of times the IP Phone 1110 attempts to connect to the server the S2 IP The secondary CS 1000 node IP address of the IP Phone the S2 action the S2 retry count the External Application Server XAS IP address b If you select Partial DHCP then you must enter the following parameters S1 IP The primary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 1110 81 Port This is a fixed value 4100 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 336 of 630
477. tandard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Page 53 of 630 5 Connect the AC power adapter optional Leaving the AC adapter unplugged from the power outlet connect the adapter to the AC adapter jack in the bottom of the phone Form a small bend in the cable and then thread the adapter cord through the channels in the stand 6 Securethe IP Phone footstand to the base of the IP Phone Use the angle adjustment grip on the top back of the IP Phone to adjust the position CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug any device into your IP Phone 2001 Ethernet port other than one PC Figure 3 IP Phone 2001 Ethernet network interface connections LAN Ethernet port Handset jack AC Adapter jack IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 54 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 7 Powerthe IP Phone 2001 using either the Power over Ethernet or an AC power transformer local power If you are using local power plug the AC power transformer into the nearest power outlet Make sure you use the correct AC power transformer is used The voltage rating of the transformer must match the wall outlet voltage See Table 4 IP Phone 2001 components list on page 49 Note The IP Phone 2001 supports both AC power and Power over LAN options including IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 2 To use Power over Ethernet where power is delivered over the CAT5 cable the LAN must support Power over Ethernet and an AC adapter is not requi
478. te You can press the Apply amp Reset soft key at any time to apply the current configuration and reset the phone You can press the Exit soft key to exit the menu without saving any changes and return to the Network Configuration menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 178 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2007 When the Network Configuration menu opens Enable 802 1x Auth EAP is the first option in the list 1 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the Enable 802 1x Auth EAP list box 2 Pressthe Down navigation key to open list box 3 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight Yes to enable 802 1x Authentication or No to disable 802 1x Authentication 4 If 802 1x Authentication is enabled use the dialpad to fill in the following information e Device ID e Password e Retype the password Note Use the dialpad to enter digits only To enter alpha characters use either the IP Phone 2007 pop up keyboard or a USB keyboard For further information about EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Note f you do not enable 802 1x Authentication you are not prompted to enter Device ID and Password 5 Usethe Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Enable 802 1x LLDP Enable For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 6 Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll
479. ted e Port VLAN Priority e Port VLAN ID e Packet Collision e CRC Error count e Frame Error count e Unicast Packets Sent e Unicast Packets Received e Broadcast Packets Received e Multicast Packets Received Figure 69 on page 574 shows Ethernet Statistics display screen IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 574 of 630 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Figure 69 Ethernet Statistics display screen NORTEL 6 To reset the PCPort statistics to 0 tap the Reset soft key End of Procedure 4 IP Network Statistics Use Procedure 118 to use the Network Statistics tool Procedure 118 Using the IP Network Statistics tool 1 Press the Services key twice 2 Press24 onthe dialpad to access the IP Network Statistics menu or use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the IP Network Statistics option 3 Press the Select soft key 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 575 of 630 You can press the Return soft key exit the menu to return to the Local Diagnostics submenu The screen displays Reset Refresh and Return soft keys The Refresh soft key second soft key on the display refreshes the counts on the display This display shows the Network statistics for the IP Phone s port of the 3 port switch The following statistics are displayed Packets sent Packets received Incoming Packet errors Outgoing Packet errors Inco
480. ted LED Supervisor Talk Listen Display Agents Interflow Answer Emergency Answer Agent Call Agent Observe Agent In Calls e five call processing fixed keys 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 441 of 630 Mute Release Expand Hold Volume increase decrease e Call Duration Timer e ability to change self labeled line programmable feature key labels e Corporate Directory e Personal Directory e Redial List e Callers List e Password Administration e Virtual Office e Branch Office e Active Call Failover Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download The IP Phone 1150E supports the following Data network features integrated gigabit Ethernet switch for shared PC access LAN Ethernet port supports 10 100 1000 Mbps Full Duplex mode PC Ethernet port supports 10 100 1000 Mbps Full Duplex mode e automatic network configuration through DHCP For more information about automatic network configuration see Table 57 IP Phone 1150E IP parameters on page 461 e 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP For more information about LLDP Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 442 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP media encryption For more information about SRTP media encryption Features overview on pag
481. tel IP Phone 2007 Page 181 of 630 S2 PK the Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Set the S2 PK to 6 or 1 This value depends on the S2 Action configuration Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information You must enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number The default is ffffffffffffffff Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight VoiceVLAN combo box Press the Down navigation key to open the list box Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e No VLAN e DHCP VLAN ID is configured automatically to one of the values received from the DHCP server e LLDP MED VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received from 802 1ab LLDP e LLDP VLAN Name VLAN ID is configured automatically to the value received from 802 1ab LLDP e Manual Note If LLDP is disabled LLDP MED and LLDP VLAN Name modes do not appear in the list If DHCP is disabled DHCP does not appear in the list Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight VLAN Filter check box If the VLAN Filter is enabled packets destined for the IP Phone port are filtered on their MAC address and their VLAN tag Untagged VLAN packets and tagged VLAN packets that differ from the Telephony VLAN ID are prevented from reaching the IP Phon
482. ters with the Terminal Proxy Server TPS and if needed begins the firmware download This takes several minutes When the download is complete the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 resets Note The Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download feature for IP Phones provides an improved method of delivering new firmware to IP Phones For further information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The current system date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear 6 Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 291 of 630 7 Optional Customize the soft keys as required For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 and IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide End of Procedure Procedure 50 Installing an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 for the first time using DHCP You will hear a tone shortly before the IP Phone is ready to start the Nortel IP Phone application Once the application has loaded and started you will see the Nortel logo and Starting DHCP will appear at the bottom of the screen To edit network configuration the following soft keys are available e OK accept current settings and proceed to the next configuration option If all configuration options are prese
483. the subsequent IP Phone KEM to work This is because the second IP Phone KEM receives its power and communicates with the IP Phone through the first IP Phone KEM Operating parameters General If an IP Phone KEM is not responding and lines or features are configured on keys 32 79 calls can be directed to those keys which the user cannot access This means the IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 rings but the call cannot be answered In such cases the incoming call receives Call Forward No Answer CFNA treatment IP Phone 2002 If only one IP Phone KEM is configured in LD 11 but two IP Phone KEMs are detected on an IP Phone 2002 the second IP Phone KEM is ignored An IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 202 of 630 IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM error message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration If two IP Phone KEMs are configured in LD 11 but only one IP Phone KEM is responding the keys on the second IP Phone KEM are available for call processing but are not accessible to the user This means that lines and features on keys 56 79 can cause the IP Phone 2002 to ring but there is no way to answer it An error message displays to alert the administrator that the hardware configuration does not match the administered configuration IP Phone 2004 If only one IP Phone KEM is configured in LD 11 but two IP Phone KEMs are detected o
484. the symbol and thread the network cable through the channel marked with the symbol IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 370 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E 7 If you are connecting your PC through the phone you will require a second CAT5 cable Only one cable is included with the IP Phone 1120E package Install the Ethernet cable connecting the PC to the phone optional Connect one end of the PC Ethernet cable to your phone using the RJ 45 connector marked with the symbol and thread it through the channel marked with the symbol Connect the other end to the LAN connector on the back of your PC CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not plug any device into your IP Phone 1120E PC Ethernet port other than a PC Install additional cables If applicable plug in optional USB devices Connect the Ethernet cable to the LAN Ethernet connection If you are using an AC power adapter plug the adapter into an AC outlet Note Complete steps 1 9 as needed before wall mounting the IP Phone Wall mount your phone optional Use Method A or Method B to wall mount the IP Phone See Method A using the mounting holes on the bottom of the phone stand or Method B using the traditional style wall mount box with a RJ 45 connector and a 15 cm 6 inch RJ 45 cord not provided e Method A Press the wall mount lever and pull away from the stand Using the stand cover see step 3 on page 366 mark the wall mount
485. the Message Inbox key to access your voicemail box Shift Outbox Press the Shift Outbox key to toggle between two feature key pages or any Expansion Modules for IP Phones 1100 Series attached to the phone Copy Press the Copy Key to copy entries to your Personal Directory from other lists such as the Caller List Redial List and Corporate Directory Quit Stop Press the Quit Stop key to end an active application Pressing the Quit Stop key does not affect the status of the calls currently on your IP Phone Directory Press the Directory key to access Directory services Mute Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to a two way conversation The Mute key applies to Headset microphones The Mute LED flashes when the Mute option is in use Volume control Use the Volume control keys to adjust the volume of the headset ringer keys and alerter pager Press the volume key with the plus sign icon to increase volume press the volume key with the minus sign icon to decrease volume 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 435 of 630 Table 49 IP Phone 1150E keys and functions Part 3 of 3 Function Supervisor Talk For Supervisor use Press the Supervisor Talk Listen key to participate in Listen key an active conversation The LED lights to indicate talk listen mode is on If the LED is off the Supervisor can only listen to an active c
486. the PARTSECURE parameter is present password protection is not enabled The SECUREMENU PARTSECURE item is an optional parameter If it is present then the full S4 string needs to be present including the action and retries The S4 string will already be present if the XAS support has been configured through the DHCP If XAS is not configured you can still enable password protection by setting the S4 IP address to 0 0 0 0 and by setting the other fields to 0 IMPORTANT With Full DHCP the vendor specific or site specific options must be configured depending on the customers DHCP server configuration For further information on configuring Full DHCP see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Accessing the Local Tools menu Once the password is entered the Local Tools menu remains active for 5 minutes You can freely navigate exit and reenter the Local Tools menu 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 361 of 630 without being prompted to reenter the password To reset the timer before the 5 minute time expires double press the Services key You can also press the 5 key to select the Lock Now item from the Lock Menu The Lock Now item immediately exits the Local Tools menu closes any open Local Tools menu pages and locks the Local Tools menu Alternatively when time expires the Local Tools menu and any open submenus are closed Double press the Services key to open the password prom
487. the display area Send Enter i Press the Send Enter key at the center of the Navigation key cluster to confirm menu selections Note The Send Enter key is only available on the 1140E Call Control window Click numbers on the dialpad to dial a number 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Page 213 of 630 Table 22 Call Control window elements and functions Part 3 of 3 Speaker Click the Speaker key to answer and make calls using the handsfree speaker The Expand key is reserved for future implementation Services Press the Services key access the following items Language Date Time Set Info Call Log Options Ring type Call Timer Change Feature Key Label Name Display Format Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Branch Office is configured Password Admin Station Control Password IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 214 of 630 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Operation Display characteristics The IP Softphone 2050 has the following display areas e information display e soft key label display e keypad dialing keys display e feature keys display Information display area The information display area can contain four lines of text up to a maximum of twenty four characters for each line The display area consists of 2 areas Info line and Info window Info
488. the firmware for the IP Phone 2007 see Updating the IP Phone 2007 firmware on page 608 For information about updating the firmware for the IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E see Updating the firmware for IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E on page 613 Procedure 129 Updating the IP Phones firmware Note Nortel recommends that the user ends an active call before performing firmware upgrade Otherwise results may be unpredictable 1 Download the latest IP Phones firmware from the Nortel web site 2 Loadthe latest version of the IP Phones firmware place it on the TFTP Server and unzip the files Ensure the TFTP Server is started The files required are configuration file i2033 cfg for example firmware binary file 2310S10 bin for example 3 Ifyou statically assign IP addresses ensure that the IP address TFTP Server IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway information are accurate If you are using a DHCP Server ensure the DHCP options are configured 4 Enterthe TFTP Server IP address in the configuration menu and reboot the IP Phone End of Procedure Updating the IP Phone 2007 firmware 553 3001 368 The IP Phone 2007 can perform TFTP firmware upgrade from within the Tools menu This method requires the TFTP Server to store the following files in the root directory e i12007 cfg downloading script file Standard 26 00 August 200
489. the following choices e 1 Manual Secure Lock Menu e 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu e 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu e 4 DHCP Secure Menu e 5 LockNow IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 584 of 630 Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu When options are inactive the text appears dimmed 1 Manual Secure Local Menu When this option is selected you are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever the Services key is double pressed 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu When this option is selected you are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access the Local Diagnostics and the Network Configuration sub menus 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu When this option is selected the Lock Menu is disabled 4 DHCP Secure Mode The IP Phone follows the menu lock configuration received from the Full DHCP string e if SECUREMENU is present you are prompted to enter a password after you double press the Services key if PARTSECUREis present you are prompted to enter a password whenever you select Local Diagnostics and Network Configuration e if neither SECUREMENU nor PARTSECURE is present then the menu is not locked For information about Password Protection of the Local Tools menu in the applicable IP Phone section 5 Lock Now The Lock Now item immediately exits the Tools menu closes any open Tools menu pages and locks the Tools menu 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix
490. the mode Once cleared the normal display for the current state of the IP Phone is displayed Press the Services key to access the following menu items e Display diagnostics Set Info Display diagnostics Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll the Display diagnostics menu to access the following screens diagnostic operations initial screen Full Contrast LED Test e Character Test Initial screen Instructions are displayed on the display area of the IP Phone and the Expansion Module The DN feature key display areas are blank Full Contrast The IP Phone and the Expansion Module display areas are set to maximum dark contrast including the DN feature key areas All LEDs are off LED Test The IP Phone and the Expansion Module LEDs are set to on The display area is cleared including the DN feature key display areas Character Test The IP Phone and the Expansion Module LEDs are set to off The available character set is displayed across all writable areas of the display including the 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 series Page 491 of 630 DN feature key display areas The telephone on hook icon is displayed for all DN feature keys Table 60 shows the display diagnostic operation on the IP Phones and the Expansion Module for IP Phones 1100 Series Table 60 Display diagnostic operation on the IP Phone and the Expansion Module IP Phone DN feature key Expansio
491. the node number displays If Then the node password is enabled and a password screen displays Go to is not NULL step 4 the node password is disabled a TN screen displays Go to step 5 Enter password at the password screen and press OK A TN screen displays Note To obtain the password enter the nodePwdShow command in Element Manager For further information see Communication Server 1000 Element Manager System Administration b53 3001 332 Select the Clear soft key to clear the existing TN Enter the new TN End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 72 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2001 Replacing an IP Phone 2001 IMPORTANT Two IP Phones cannot share the same TN You must remove the IP Phone 2001 that is currently using the TN Procedure 7 Replacing an IP Phone 2001 1 Obtain the node and TN information of the phone you want to replace 2 Disconnect the IP Phone 2001 that you want to replace 3 Follow Procedure 1 on page 52 and Procedure 1 on page 52 or Procedure 3 on page 62 to install and configure the IP Phone 2001 4 Enter the same TN and Node Number as the IP Phone 2001 you replaced The system associates the new IP Phone 2001 with the existing TN End of Procedure Removing an IP Phone 2001 from service Procedure 8 Removing an IP Phone 2001 from service 1 Disconnect the IP Phone 2001 from the network or turn off the power If the IP Phone 2001 was automatical
492. thenticator the network entry point to which the supplicant physically connects typically a Layer 2 3 switch The authenticator acts as the proxy between the supplicant and the authentication server The authenticator controls access to the network based on the authentication status of the supplicant e Authentication server performs authentication of the supplicant Authorization If 802 1x is configured and the IP Phone is physically connected to the network the IP Phone supplicant initiates 802 1x authentication by contacting the Layer 2 3 switch authenticator The IP Phone also initiates 802 1x authentication after the Ethernet connection network interface only is restored following a network link failure However if the phone resets the IP Phone assumes the Layer 2 link has remained in service and is authenticated The IP Phone fails to authorize if the DeviceID and the IP Phone passwords do not match the DeviceID and IP Phone password provisioned on the RADIUS Server The Layer 2 switch authenticator locks out the IP Phone and network access is denied If this happens during reauthorization all phone services are lost The connected PC operates as normal For information about configuring EAP see the applicable IP Phone section in this document 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 523 of 630 Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol Contents This section contains information on the followi
493. ther information on Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download see IP Line Description Installation and Operation b53 3001 365 The current Call Server date and time appear on the top line of the display when the configuration is complete Self labeling keys also appear Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 107 of 630 10 Optional Customize the feature keys as required For more information see IP Phone 2004 User Guide End of Procedure Full Duplex mode In the Configuration menu Auto Negotiate mode is the default setting for initial startup Typically the IP Phone is connected to a network that supports Auto Negotiate and it selects the best speed and duplex mode available There is no intervention required under normal operation Note Changing the speed and or duplex mode on the phone changes both the LAN Ethernet port and PC Ethernet Port interfaces IMPORTANT It is recommended that Auto Negotiate mode is used on the network and the IP Phone Use Full Duplex mode only when the network is forced Full Duplex for 100BT Full Duplex mode otherwise a duplex mismatch will result If the IP Phone is connected to a network configured for Full Duplex mode only the IP Phone cannot automatically negotiate the proper configuration Therefore in this instance to allow the IP Phone to work at the optimum speed and duplex mode Full Duplex
494. ther sources or deleted For information about using Personal Directory on IP Phones see the appropriate user guide For more information about the Personal Directory feature see Features and Services 553 3001 306 Personal Directory uses a separate central database called the Application Server to store directory data and end user profile options Note Personal Directory is not supported on the IP Phone 2001 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 and IP Phone 1110 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Redial List Callers List Features overview Page 495 of 630 Redial List is a call log feature whose content is generated by the system during call processing The list resides on the Application Server An end user can scroll through a list of up to 20 entries of the most recent calls dialed from the IP Phone and redial a selected telephone number For more information about using Redial List with IP Phones see the appropriate user guide For more information about the Redial List feature see Features and Services 553 3001 306 Note Redial List is not supported on the IP Phone 2001 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 and IP Phone 1110 Callers List is a call log feature whose content is generated by the system during call processing The list resides in the Application Server An end user can scroll through a list of up to 100 entries of the most recent calls received by the IP Phone and call a selected telephone number For more
495. tically configured the DHCP lease expires and the IP address returns to the available pool 2 InLD 11 enter OUT at the TN prompt End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 301 of 630 Connecting an extension microphone Procedure 56 Connecting an extension microphone to the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 1 Thread the microphone cord through the channels on the bottom of the IP Phone Note A maximum of two microphone jacks are supported on the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 2 Connectthe microphone cord to one of the microphone jacks on the bottom of the IP Phone End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 302 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 303 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Contents This section contains information on the following topics InttOdBCUol aecueedisresPbreiqrsewaresi2Q eqsi Re CRORE ROS 304 WESTIN 2 44 525 05 eb bo eR FER EPOR E REOR PIS KO PES 304 Components and MWNCHONS eese ee e eme en 305 Features Dot SUpPPONEd MET dn ghke aga deaw se eas ened 311 Display characteristics seiret a bo peo dd bbb ebd ei be mi eds 311 Local Tools menu password protection 00 000 313 Key number assignments 4 56 scsc4siednisedesbedadseneions 315 Package componens s Liao E ead Ve RF E OE qu E RE Td depu dn 316 Installation and Configuration s
496. ting Key No Hold Conference Notification Key Lamp Not Ready ACD Night Service ACD Observe Agent Onsite Notification Overflow position Busy Override Call Park Privacy Release Priority ACD Agent Call Ringing Change Key Redial Stored Number Ring Again IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 624 of 630 Appendix J Call features Table 78 IP Phone supported call features Feature Description Release Room Status Key Remote Message Waiting Key Ringing Number Pickup Radio Page Speed Call Controller Speed Call User Signal Speed System Call Controller System Speed call User Centrex Switch Hook Flash Malicious Call Trace Call Transfer User Selectable Call Redirection User Status Voice Call Wake Up Key Multiple DN Message Waiting 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Index Numerics 3 port switch and 802 1Q header 512 802 1Q 509 Ethernet frame 510 p bits 510 802 1Q support 510 802 3af 499 A AC adapter 499 Accessory Expansion Module AEM 197 Ack message 514 Active Call Failover 494 Application menu language selection 207 Auto discovery VLAN ID 513 C Callers List 493 call features 236 Call forward key IP Phone 2004 617 IP Softphone 2050 221 Call Handling screen 246 Page 625 of 630 Call park key IP Phone 2004 617 IP Softphone 2050 221 Call transfer key IP Phone 2004 617 IP Softphone 2050 220 Charge accou
497. ting of the transformer must match the wall outlet voltage See Table 8 IP Phone 2004 component list on page 86 First time installation You must first install an IP Telephony Node with the Communication Server For information about installing an IP Telephony Node see Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 or IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 CAUTION Do not plug your IP Phone 2004 into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 89 of 630 Configuring the IP Phone 2004 Procedure 9 to configure the IP Phone 2002 for the first time Procedure 9 Configuring the IP Phone 2004 1 Configure a virtual loop on the Call Server using LD 97 For more information about configuring a virtual loop see P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 and Software Input Output Administration B53 3001 31 1 Configure the IP Phone 2004 on the Call Server using LD 11 For more information see Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 Connect the IP Phone 2004 components a Connect one end of the handset cord to the handset jack on the back of the IP Phone identified with a handset icon b Connectthe other end of the handset cord to the handset Choose one of the following connections e Foran IP Phone not sharing a LAN access with a PC Connect one end of the
498. tistics appear on the display 2 Do one ofthe following e Press the OK soft key to return to the Diagnostics submenu e Use the Navigation keys to scroll through the data display results See Figure 64 on page 552 e Press the Cancel soft key to return to the Diagnostics submenu End of Procedure QoS Statistics Use Procedure 110 to access the QoS Stats submenu item in Remote mode Procedure 110 Browsing Quality of Service Statistics 1 Select QoS Stats from the Diagnostics submenu The Quality of Service statistics appear on the display 2 Do one ofthe following e Press the OK soft key to return to the Diagnostics submenu e Usethe Navigation keys to scroll through the results See Figure 65 on page 552 e Press the Cancel soft key to return to the Diagnostics submenu Note The IP Phone screen display returns to an idle state after 5 minutes if the user does not interact with menu items End of Procedure Network Diagnostic Utilities data display pages Data from the diagnostic utilities is displayed on the IP Phone screen display One line of data at a time is displayed on IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 2002 and 3 lines of data are displayed at a time on IP Phone 2004 Each line of data 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 541 of 630 is up to 24 characters long Use the Navigation keys to scroll through the lines of data Local Mode data display pages The fol
499. to Create Auto Create fabricates a MAC address with a random value that is unlikely to be repeated by another device Use Procedure 47 to enable Auto Create Procedure 47 Enabling Auto Create 1 Select Settings 2 Select Hardware ID 3 Select Auto Create End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 254 of 630 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Table 25 provides information about the Hardware ID screen Table 25 Hardware ID screen Selection Description Hardware ID This box contains the MAC address for the Ethernet hardware installed in your device MVC 2050 uses the MAC address of the Ethernet hardware as its hardware ID You may have to change this value if there is more than one MAC address or if the device is using an extranet client that hides the true MAC address For example the Nortel Contivity Extranet Switch uses a single MAC address for all clients This might cause connection problems with your communication server Auto create This changes the MAC address that appears in the Hardware ID box If your device has more than one MAC address tap the Auto Create button to cycle through the set of MAC addresses on your computer Auto Create also provides random hardware IDs in case the Ethernet hardware addresses are not unique to the communication server Firmware Version Shows the build number of MVC 2050 installed on your device This value is th
500. to On It remains in the on state until the feature key is pressed again This cancels the enabled feature and turns the icon off returning the soft key label to its original state Use the More soft key to navigate through the layers of functions If only four functions are assigned to the soft keys the More key does not appear and all four functions are displayed IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 402 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Cleaning the IP Phone display screen Gently wipe the IP Phone display screen with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not use any liquids or powders on the IP Phone Using anything other than a soft dry cloth can contaminate IP Phone components and cause premature failure Local Tools menu password protection If the SECUREMENU parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration the Local Tools menu is locked to prevent accidental or unwanted changes You are prompted to enter the fixed password 26567 738 color set whenever the Services key is double pressed or whenever the Local Diagnostics and Network Configuration sub menus are accessed If the PARTSECURE parameter was set during Full DHCP configuration you are prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access 2 Local Diagnostics or 3 Network Configuration menu items from the Local Tools menu You are always prompted to enter the fixed password whenever you access the 4 Lock Menu sub menu Two ways to control the me
501. to enter a password when you double press the Services key password protection is enabled For more information about password protection see Local Tools menu password protection on page 359 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Table 41 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Page 353 of 630 Local Tools menu Part 2 of 2 To make a selection press the number associated with the menu item or use the navigation keys to scroll through the menu items Press the Enter key to select the highlighted menu item Press the Quit Stop key to exit from any menu or menu item For information on configuring IP Phone 1120E Local Tools menu see Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Supported features The IP Phone 1120E supports the following telephony features four user defined feature keys with labels and indicators four soft keys providing access to a maximum of nine features Note Functions for the soft keys are configured in LD 11 high quality speaker phone volume control keys for adjusting ringer speaker handset and headset volume six specialized feature keys Quit Directory Message Inbox Shift Outbox Services Copy six call processing fixed keys Mute Handsfree Goodbye Expand to PC IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 354 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Headset Hold e Call Duration Timer e ability to change the user defined feature
502. to indicate there is more information to be displayed Soft keys self labeled are located below the LCD screen display The LCD screen display above the key changes based on the active feature See Soft key label display on page 275 for further information Press the Shift soft key labelled gt gt to access the second row of soft keys Note When a triangle appears before a key label the feature is active IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 270 of 630 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Services menu Table 29 shows the Services menu Table 29 Services menu Part 1 of 2 Services key Press the Services key to access the following items Telephone Options see Notes 1and 2 Volume adjustment Contrast adjustment Language Date Time Local DialPad Tone Set Info Diagnostics Ring type Call Timer Password Admin Station Control Password Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Media Gateway 1000B is configured Press the Services key to exit from any menu or menu item 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 271 of 630 Table 29 Services menu Part 2 of 2 Double press the Services key to access Network diagnostic utilities For more information on Network diagnostic utilities see Appendix Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities o
503. to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the following information Device ID e Password e Retype password 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 o 0 n 10 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 417 of 630 For further information about 802 1x Authentication Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Note f you do not enable 802 1x Authentication you will not be prompted to enter Device ID and Password Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Enable 802 1x LLDP Enable check box For information about 802 1x Authentication see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight DHCP combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open list box Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following DHCP options e No 4disable DHCP support and enter IP network information manually e Partial IP network information IP address network mask and gateway address are provided by the DHCP server Enter Server 1 IP address Server 2 IP address Port Action Retry and PK numbers manually e Full IP network information Server 1 IP address Server 2 IP address and XAS information are provided by the DHCP server All items are dimmed to prevent manual entry Note A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and
504. to your desktop and double click My Computer The PC files and folders menu appears Select the CD Drive Select Setup Follow the instructions on the screen until the Install Wizard asks you if you want to modify install or remove MVC 2050 Select Install The Install Wizard installs MVC 2050 When installation finishes Attend to your device PDA message displays on the PC and Do you want to perform a soft restart message displays on the PDA Select Yes to restart your PDA End of Procedure 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 251 of 630 MVC 2050 removal Use the following procedure to remove MVC 2050 from your PDA Procedure 46 Removing MVC 2050 from your PDA 1 Select Start A drop down menu appears 2 Select Settings A Windows folder opens The Windows folder contains programs usually shown as icons with names and a row of tabs across the bottom Select the System tab Another Windows program folder opens Select Remove Programs A list of programs opens Select Nortel MVC 2050 Select Remove A confirmation dialog box opens o 0 fF Q Select Yes There is a brief pause during removal of MVC 2050 After the pause a confirmation dialog box opens 8 Select Yes Your PDA restarts and MVC 2050 is removed End of Procedure Configuration MVC 2050 supports a flexible interface which enables users to customize configurations for various connections Settings For
505. trative control it is recommended that the Partial Menu Lock feature be activated to prevent users from changing the administration setting For further information about the Partial Menu Lock feature see Appendix Appendix F Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 TFTP configuration Use Procedure 125 on page 594 to enable Bluetooth wireless technology on the IP Phone The IP Phone 1140E is used as an example Procedure 125 Enabling Bluetooth wireless technology on the IP Phone 1140E Note If the TFTP server is configured and is running skip to step 5 on page 596 to configure the IP Phone 1140E with the TFTP Server IP address 1 Add the DEVICE CONFIG section to the 1140e cfg file 2 Create the device configuration file This file must have the same name as that specified for the FILENAME parameter in the DEVICE CONFIG section of the 1140e cfg file See Figure 71 Figure 71 Sample of the 1140eDEV cfg file ENABLE BT 1 3 The device configuration file 1140eDEV cfg enables Bluetooth wireless technology if ENABLE BT 1 is present If ENABLE BT 0 is present Bluetooth wireless technology is disabled Figure 72 shows an example of the 1140e cfg file with the FW and the ENABLE BT line It is also possible to use the 1140e cfg file with only the DEVICE CONFIG section for the control of Bluetooth wireless technology Figure 73 on page 595 shows an example of the 1140e cfg file with only the DEVICE CONFIG section
506. ts the following data network features e integrated switch for shared PC access the LAN Ethernet port supports 10 100BT Mbps Full Duplex mode the PC Ethernet port supports 10 100BT Mbps Full Duplex mode e automatic network configuration through DHCP For more information about automatic network configuration see Table 9 IP Phone 2004 IP parameters on page 92 e 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 81 of 630 Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP media encryption For more information about SRTP media encryption see Features overview on page 493 802 1Q VLAN and 802 1p priority support industry standards for managing bandwidth usage full VLAN capability including a manageable integrated switch in the IP Phone allows VLAN and priority tagging for the IP Phone traffic and VLAN tagging for PC traffic VLAN filtering which allows the IP Phone to only see Voice VLAN traffic The integrated switch will pass DATA VLAN traffic to the PC Ethernet port This prevents the Data VLAN broadcast traffic from reaching the IP Phone For more information see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 and Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 802 1x Port based network access control industry standard
507. tures are not supported on the IP Phone 2002 e Live Dialpad e Group Listening e Set to Set messaging e Context sensitive soft keys Display characteristics An IP Phone 2002 has three major display areas e user defined feature key label information line e soft key label Figure 8 on page 122 shows these three display areas Figure 8 IP Phone 2002 display areas Upper display area NORTEL programmable line DN feature keys Middle display area information display Lower display area soft key labels 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 123 of 630 Cleaning the IP Phone display screen Gently wipe the IP Phone display screen with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not use any liquids or powders on the IP Phone Using anything other than a soft dry cloth can contaminate IP Phone components and cause premature failure Programmable line DN feature keys label display The feature key label area displays a ten character string for each of the four feature keys Each feature key includes the key label and an icon The icon state can be on off or flashing A telephone icon displays the status of the configured DN Key labels are left aligned for keys on the left side of the screen and right aligned for keys on the right side of the screen Note If a label is longer than ten characters the last ten characters are displayed and the excess characters are deleted from the b
508. type Call Timer OnHook Default Path Change Feature Key Label Name Display Format Virtual Office Login and Virtual Office Logout if Virtual Office is configured Test Local Mode and Resume Local Mode if Branch Office is configured Password Admin Note f a call is presented while the user is manipulating an option the IP Phone 1120E rings and the DN key flashes However the screen display is not updated with Caller ID information The programming text is not disturbed Note If a call is presented while the user is manipulating an option the IP Phone 1120E rings and the DN key flashes However the screen display is not updated with Caller ID information The programming text is not disturbed IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 352 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1120E Local Tools menu Table 41 Local Tools menu on page 352 shows the Local Tools menu Table 41 Local Tools menu Part 1 of 2 Press the Services key twice to access the Local Tools menu The following items appear in the Local Tools menu 1 Preferences 1 Display Settings 2 Languages 2 Local Diagnostics 1 IP Set amp DHCP Information 2 Network Diagnostic Tools 3 Ethernet Statistics 4 IP Network Statistics 5 USB Devices 3 Network Configuration 4 Lock Menu 1 Manual Secure Local Menu 2 Manual Partial Secure Menu 3 Manual Disable Secure Menu 4 DHCP Secure Menu 5 Lock Now Note f you are prompted
509. u PRESE D x ERU SPP AS 504 IP Phone power requirements Phase II IP Phones have integrated hardware to support power over Ethernet for 802 3af standard power Nortel recommends Power over Ethernet deployment since it allows for power backup in case of power failures Note that with Phase II IP Phones power splitters are no longer needed to support Power over Ethernet Phase II IP Phones IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E also support connection to AC local power using the appropriate adapter If local power using the AC adapter is required the AC adapter must be ordered separately If the network LAN infrastructure supports Power over Ethernet an AC adapter may not be required Note 1 You must order a country specific power adapter See the IP Phone components list table in the applicable IP Phone chapter for AC adapter descriptions and product codes Note 2 If you are using local power with the IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120E IP Phone 1140E or IP Phone 1150E you must use the AC adapter model N0089601 only IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 502 of 630 Appendix A Specifications Nortel does not advise connecting a local power adapter in addition to power over Ethernet Table 61 and Table 62 provide power requirements for the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 using Power over Ethernet Classification 0 Table 61 Power requirements for IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 US CA
510. u select 0 No 0 for No you will not be prompted to enter Device ID and Password For more information about EAP see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 At the prompt LLDP Enable enter 1 Y 1 for Yes default or 0 N 0 for No For more information about LLDP see Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 At the prompt DHCP Yes No select 1 Y 1 for Yes By default Full DHCP is configured on the IP Phone 2001 Depending on the configuration requirements you can change the IP Phone 2001 configuration to allow the following IP address assignments Static enter all parameters e Partial DHCP IP Phone address subnet mask and default Gateway are obtained from the DHCP server e Full DHCP default all parameters are obtained from the DHCP server A DHCP server and DHCP relay agents must also be installed configured and running if you choose Partial DHCP or Full DHCP configuration For more information on how to set up DHCP servers for use with the IP Phones see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 At the prompt Cached IP select 0 0 No default to conform to the DHCP standard and to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server Only select 1 1 for Yes to force the IP Phone to start with a cached IP address in the event that the IP Phone cannot connect to the DHCP server and obtain an IP address Select Partial o
511. ugust 2007 Page 429 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Contents luis oui PT E N A A T EAA ETSE E EE TE 430 DescHptiol ia wi caw ke ironiei n ae A A PAREA 430 Components amd TUNCHONS i o eio e ERR etree Ru EA V tpe 432 Me MCHC Le sache gpboe bee qeaioep qup E a d ds 437 Features not currently suppomted iii iseceoassesae asc daikid 443 Display characteristics eai ede eri pd ebd ut Shea d pd ud 443 Headset SUPPO cus diego eo ORE ERR ERU p C E Rr dup Eb praod 446 Local Tools menu password protection 00 0000 446 Key number assames css cost 4 pre hpERE T EP SEP ER MEER 449 Package compie aereo gaps pua bui equi qp 451 Installation and Configuration 0 0 0 cece ee eee eee 452 Full Duplex mode cuu bo dost EA RF RR DRFe RH RR EEYXOTEESS 471 TFTP firmware upetede aocesasetkx ek eee here S Ya een 473 Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection 473 Extensible Authentication Protecol iios bbb e ben 473 Bluetooth wireless technology 2 sos esee e n 473 Reinstalling an IP Phone 1150B 2 6 24sicnesiedasewdersedei vas 474 Beplacina an IF Phone 1199E osea e het os eer EPOR EHE V pP 475 Removing an IP Phone 1150E from service 475 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 430 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Introduction This section explains how to install and maintain the IP Phone 1150E For information on using the IP Phone 1150E see the IP Phone 1150E User
512. ulfills the protocol requirements defined by 802 1x For further information on 802 1x see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 Bluetooth wireless technology The IP Phone 1140E supports Bluetooth wireless technology Bluetooth For information about configuring Bluetooth wireless technology on the IP Phone 1140E see Appendix Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology on page 591 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 427 of 630 Reinstalling an IP Phone 1140E You can reinstall an existing previously configured IP Phone 1140E on the same Call Server For example the IP Phone 1140E can be assigned to a new user new TN or to an existing user who moved to a new subnet by changing the TN of the IP Phone 1140E Procedure 76 Changing the TN of an existing IP Phone 1140E 1 Repower the IP Phone 1140E Note During the reboot sequence of a previously configured IP Phone the IP Phone 1140E displays the existing node number for approximately five seconds If the node password is enabled and NULL choose one of the following a Disable the password b Setthe password as non NULL Press OK when the node number displays If Then the node password is enabled and a password screen displays Go to is not NULL step 4 the node password is disabled a TN screen displays Go to step 5 Enter the password at the password screen and press OK A T
513. umber into your PDA from another application rather than entering an existing telephone number through your Call Handling screen dialpad Contacts Select Contacts to launch the Contacts dialog box The Contacts application reads a list of contacts from the PDA Contacts list or from a list which you synchronized onto your PDA from Microsoft Outlook Settings Select Settings to provide access to the Settings submenu The Settings menu provides windows for Personal settings System settings and Connections settings The System settings window provides access to settings for memory power remove programs screen and regional settings iTask settings and self test Note You must restart MVC 2050 for changes to Profiles Hardware ID Sounds Servers and Listener IP to take effect Exit Select Exit to close MVC 2050 Calls cannot be received until the application restarts Select Exit to free up PDA processing resources Keys The Keys menu provides the following items e Headset Answer e Goodbye 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel Mobile Voice Client 2050 Page 243 of 630 Hold Features Macros Headset Select Headset to answer an incoming call or to obtain a dial tone You can also use the Headset Answer icon located at the top center of the Call Handling screen Answer Select Answer to answer an incoming call or to obtain dial tone to place a call You can also use the Headset Answer icon l
514. upted re entry of the IP parameters Node Number TN or re acquisition of firmware is not required The IP Phone 2002 uses the customer IP data network to communicate with the Communication Server 1000 The IP Phone 2002 translates voice into data packets for transport using Internet Protocol A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide information that enables the IP Phone 2002 network connection and connection to the Communication Server 1000 Figure 7 on page 115 shows the IP Phone 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 115 of 630 Figure 7 IP Phone 2002 Programmable line DN feature keys Messaqe waiting indicator Incoming call indicator Multi field LCD display screen Handset Z MX Navigation keys Speaker Message inbox key Softkeys Rt RR self labeled Outbox Shift key Dialpad Directory key F Q E zx Expand to PC key EI 9 L Quit key Services key Goodbye key Volume control bar Hold key Mute LED Headset Key Mute Key Headset LED Components and functions This section describes the following components and functions of the IP Phone 2002 e Keys and functions e Services menu IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 116 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Keys and functions Table 10 describes the IP Phone 2002 keys and functions Table 10 IP Phone 2002 keys and functions Part 1 of 2 Speak
515. ure Procedure 100 Changing the number of Hops 1 Fromthe TraceRoute submenu use the Navigation keys to scroll to the Max Nr of Hops submenu item 2 Press the Select soft key Tip Use the dialpad and the Delete and Clear soft keys to enter the number of Hops 3 Doone ofthe following e Press the Select soft key to accept the change and return to the TraceRoute submenu e Press the Cancel soft key to return to the TraceRoute submenu End of Procedure Procedure 101 Tracing a route 1 Fromthe TraceRoute submenu use the Navigation keys to scroll to the TraceRoute submenu item 2 Pressthe Select soft key Route tracing starts Tip Press the Stop soft key to stop the trace 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 3 Appendix E IP Phone diagnostic utilities Page 537 of 630 Press the OK soft key to return to the TraceRoute submenu End of Procedure Procedure 102 Reviewing the results of the trace 1 Fromthe TraceRoute submenu use the Navigation keys to scroll to the Last TraceRt submenu item 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Usethe Navigation keys to scroll through the results 4 Pressthe Cancel soft key to return to the TraceRoute submenu End of Procedure Ethernet Statistics Use Procedure 103 to access the EtherStats submenu item in Remote mode Procedure 103 Browsing Ethernet Statistics 1 Select EtherStats from the Diagnostics submenu The Ethernet statistics appear on the display Do one
516. ure from key Calling Party Number key Removes function or feature from key Page 621 of 630 Appendix J Call features Table 78 shows a list of supported call features for the IP Phones Table 78 IP Phone supported call features Feature Description ACD Answer Agent ACD Account Autodial ACD Agent ACD Answer Emergency Three party conference Six party conference Attendant recall ACD Call Supervisor ACD Call Waiting Time ACD Calls Waiting Busy Forward Status No hold conference autodial Controlled Class of Service Call Forward IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 622 of 630 Appendix J Call features Table 78 IP Phone supported call features Feature Description Charge Account Caller ID and called ID Calling Party Number No hold conference speed call Conferee Selectable Display Call Waiting ACD Display Agents Display Display Intercom Group Directed Call Pickup DID Route Control ACD Display Call Waiting Calls Enhanced Override ACD Emergency ACD Enable Inflow BCS Flash Flash Override Group Hunt Deactivate Group Call Group Pickup Hotline Internal Call Forward 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix J Call features Page 623 of 630 Table 78 IP Phone supported call features Feature Description BCS Immediate Last Number Redial Message Cancellation Key Message Indication Key Message Registration Key Make Set Busy Message Wai
517. ure protects the IP Phone from a Gratuitous ARP Spoof attack from the network For more information about GARP see Gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol Protection on page 473 If an External Application Server XAS is available in the network use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight the XAS IP combo box Use the dialpad to enter the XAS IP address The XAS delivers business applications to the IP Phone For more information about XAS see Nortel Application Gateway 1000 documentation If the XAS supports graphical displays use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Graphical XAS check box Press the Enter key to toggle this item on and off Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Port combo box Press the Enter key to start the edit mode Use the dialpad to fill in the information Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Enable Bluetooth combo box Press the Enter key Press the Down navigation key to open the list box Note Only the Agent port supports Bluetooth wireless technology Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e Auto default Bluetooth wireless technology setting received through TFTP configuration e Yes Bluetooth wireless technology is enabled on the IP Phone e No Bluetooth wireless technology is disabled on the IP Phone For further information about Bluetooth wireless technology Appendix Appendix G
518. uring the Local Tools menu Preferences The Preferences submenu offers the following choices e 1 Display Settings e 2 Languages e 3 Bluetooth Setup IP Phone 1140E and IP Phone 1150E 1 Display Settings The Display Settings menu provides access to the Contrast and Screen Saver tools Contrast adjusts the viewing angle of the display Screen Saver controls how long the display remains lit if the phone is inactive Note Nortel recommends you use the Telephone Options menu to adjust the contrast 2 Languages This item is used to select the language in the local menus of the IP Phone 3 Bluetooth Setup You can access the Bluetooth Setup options using either of the following two methods Double press the Headset key to open the 3 Bluetooth Setup dialog box e Double press the Services key to open the Local Tools menu press 1 on the dialpad to select 1 Preferences and press 3 on the dialpad to open the 3 Bluetooth Setup dialog box The 3 Bluetooth Setup item is not available on all phones If the 3 Bluetooth Setup menu item appears dimmed or fails to open when you double press the Headset key Bluetooth wireless technology is not enabled on your phone To configure the administration setting for Bluetooth wireless technology see Bluetooth wireless technology on page 426 Local Diagnostics For information about Local Diagnostics for the IP Phone 1120E the IP Phone 1140E and the IP Phone 1150E see Lo
519. ver e Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download The IP Phone 1140E supports the following Data network features e integrated gigabit Ethernet switch for shared PC access 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Page 397 of 630 LAN Ethernet port supports 10 100 1000 Mbps Full Duplex mode PC Ethernet port supports 10 100 1000 Mbps Full Duplex mode IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 398 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E automatic network configuration through DHCP For more information about automatic network configuration see Table 48 IP Phone 1140E IP parameters on page 414 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP For more information about LLDP Appendix Appendix D 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 523 Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP media encryption For more information about SRTP media encryption Features overview on page 493 802 1Q VLAN and 802 1p priority support industry standards for managing bandwidth usage full VLAN capability including a manageable integrated switch in the IP Phone allows VLAN and priority tagging for the IP Phone traffic and VLAN tagging for PC traffic VLAN filtering which allows the IP Phone to only see Voice VLAN traffic The integrated switch will pass DATA VLAN traffic to the PC Ethernet port This prevents the Data VLAN broadcast traffic from reaching the IP Phone For more information s
520. vigation keys Supervisor 7 Goodbye key Talk Listen key Feature key Mute key Ans Emergency key Speaker S Interflow key Ans Agent key D Call Agent key Obv Agent key Volume control 7 In Calls key Hold key Expand key Dialpad Note You can program the keys indicated with asterisks for different functions Components and functions This section describes the following components of the IP Phone 1150E e Keys and functions e Services menu e Local Tools menu 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Page 433 of 630 Table 49 shows the keys and functions for the IP Phone 1150E Table 49 IP Phone 1150E keys and functions Part 1 of 3 Function Hold Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the line DN key beside the flashing LCD to return to the caller on hold Goodbye Press the Goodbye key to terminate an active call Visual Alerter When a message is waiting the red Visual Alerter Message waiting Message waiting indicator lights Also when the ringer sounds this indicator flashes indicator Feature Status When the firmware is updating the blue Feature Status Lamp indicator Lamp indicator flashes Note This function requires server support and therefore is not available on all phones Self labeled line Self labeled line programmable feature key labels are configured for programmable various features on the IP Phones feature keys
521. w retired Internet Terminals Description 553 3001 217 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 6 of 630 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Page 7 of 630 Contents List of procedures cosooevuor yr ron me 19 How to gel Help ioasuesei a rh RR RR ARR 31 Getae help from the Nortel web sit c s 4025 ceecisudasdussens 31 Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center 3l Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 32 Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 32 About this document 33 Subj Loud equi bue Rr EROR DERE IQ ERE d ERR TH dA REA RR 33 Applicable apse iuoodbxpsdbrrdr pado pb ped prx peres 34 Intended mudieriQe ios ROC ake b CR er ed Parere d 25 rar capu ET 33 Belgted MOAN ener ebore PR Jo p be pep e 36 Nortel IP Phone 2001 seeesres 39 ODE oo ROS Wade be quere deem Marea s M E dd died 39 lina esi TEES 39 Deseriplolu dd LaadQhedakbesdtbseisRb dekselcbbs iced yaks 40 Components and MOCHONS 644164 no CREE RE EP RU RETE ed 41 Supported Teal eS cios dae a Eee Rey A RE RR P hl 44 Features not currently supported is 222sisaio i cenis RR r 46 Display CDBeterisubB 3o ice ep ERES ERE OE pb pex E uh de 46 Key number assisnments 0045s eet RR eoe CR ea 48 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 8 of 630 Contents Package components a adecpepierbr aequa d ga bia EE aces
522. wards the base until you hare an audible click Ensure the phone is securely locked in to position End of Procedure Startup sequence Table 57 When an IP Phone 1150E is connected to the network it must perform a startup sequence The elements of the startup sequence include e obtaining VLAN ID if supported by the network infrastructure obtaining the IP parameters connecting to the Call Server e obtaining a User ID See Table 57 for a summary of the IP parameters and how they are obtained IP Phone 1150E IP parameters Part 1 of 2 Parameter VLAN ID IP Address Method of acquisition Manually entered or automatically obtained through DHCP and LLDP Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 462 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1150E Table 57 IP Phone 1150E IP parameters Part 2 of 2 Parameter Method of acquisition Net Mask Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP Default Gateway address Manually entered or automatically obtained through Partial or Full DHCP Connect Server IP address port Manually entered or automatically obtained through Full action and retry count primary DHCP and secondary User ID Node ID Node Password Manually entered for first time configuration Obtained and TN from local storage on subsequent power cycles Installing the IP Phone 1150E To inst
523. will result If the IP Phone is connected to a network configured for Full Duplex mode only the IP Phone cannot automatically negotiate the proper configuration Therefore in this instance to allow the IP Phone to work at the optimum speed and duplex mode Full Duplex mode must be enabled Use Procedure 20 on page 146 to enable Full Duplex mode Procedure 20 Enabling Full Duplex mode 1 Resetthe phone by disconnecting and reconnecting power 2 When the Nortel logo appears in the middle of the display press each of the soft keys in sequence See Procedure 17 on page 128 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Page 147 of 630 3 If no other configuration changes are required press the OK soft key repeatedly until the Duplex network option appears 4 Select 1 to enable Full Duplex mode 5 When the Speed option appears select one of the following e Ofor10 Mbps e 1for 100 Mbps default 6 Select OK to confirm the change Restart the IP Phone The firmware settings are read and are applied to UPLINK and the PC Ethernet Port End of Procedure When the IP Phone is restarted the firmware reads the setting for Full Duplex mode and sets the LAN Ethernet port PC Ethernet port duplex and speed accordingly Use Procedure 21 to confirm activation of Full Duplex mode Procedure 21 Checking Ethernet Statistics 1 Double click the Services key The Network Diagnostics menu appears 2 Select Ethernet Statisti
524. word protection on page 402 To make a selection press the number associated with the menu item or use the navigation keys to scroll through the menu items Press the Enter key to select the highlighted menu item Press the Quit Stop key to exit from any menu or menu item For information on configuring IP Phone 1140E Local Tools menu see Configuring the Local Tools menu on page 579 Supported features The IP Phone 1140E supports the following telephony features e six user defined feature keys with labels and indicators Note Supports up to twelve DNs or features on 2 pages Use the Shift Outbox key to access the second page of DNs or features e four soft keys providing access to a maximum of nine features Note Functions for the soft keys are configured in LD 11 e high quality speaker phone e volume control keys for adjusting ringer speaker handset and headset volume e six specialized feature keys IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 396 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 1140E Quit Stop Directory Message Inbox Shift Outbox Services Copy e sixcall processing fixed keys Mute Handsfree Goodbye Expand to PC Headset Hold e Call Duration Timer e ability to change user defined feature key labels e Corporate Directory e Personal Directory e Redial List e Callers List e Password Administration e Virtual Office e Branch Office e Active Call Failo
525. ws the Local Tools menu Table 36 Local Tools menu Press the Services key twice to access the Local Tools menu The following items appear in the Local Tools menu e 1 Preferences e 2 Local Diagnostics e 3 Network Configuration e 4 Lock Menu Note f you are prompted to enter a password when you double press the Services key password protection is enabled For more information about password protection see Local Tools menu password protection on page 313 To make a selection press the number associated with the menu item or use the navigation keys to scroll through the menu items Press the Services key to exit from any menu or menu item 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 1110 Page 309 of 630 Supported features The IP Phone 1110 supports the following telephony features four context sensitive soft keys Note Functions for the context sensitive soft keys are configured in LD 11 volume control keys for adjusting ringer listen only speaker and handset volume two specialized feature keys Message Inbox Services four call processing fixed keys Line key Goodbye Expand reserved for future feature development Hold Call Duration Timer Virtual Office Branch Office Active Call Failover Enhanced UNIStim Firmware Download The IP Phone 1110 supports the following data network features integrated 10 100BT Ethernet switch for shared PC access
526. x Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 Use the Right navigation key to scroll and highlight Duplex combo box Press the Down navigation key to open the list box Use the Up Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight one of the following options e Auto Link speed is auto negotiated with the network device and attached PC e 1OBT Full Link speed is available for up to 10 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port e 100BT Full Link speed is available for up to 100 Megabit Full Duplex on the network and the PC port For more information about Full Duplex see Full Duplex mode on page 185 Use the Right navigation key to scroll to Enable PSK SRTP Select Yes to enable SRTP media encryption or select No to disable SRTP media encryption 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 36 37 38 39 40 Nortel IP Phone 2007 Page 183 of 630 The SRTP media encryption feature provides encrypted media A preshared secret is embedded in the Nortel IP Phone to generate and to exchange encryption parameters without any Call Server involvement For further information about SRTP media encryption feature see Features overview on page 493 and System Security Management NN43001 604 Use the Right navigation key to scroll to Ignore GARP Select Yes to enable GARP protection or No to disable GARP protection The GARP feature protects the IP Phone from a Gratuitous ARP Spoof attack from the netwo
527. xed value 4100 1 action Choose one of the following for TPS only enter 1 for TPS and Secure Media Controller enter 6 or 1 For more information about Secure Media Controller see Secure Media Controller Implementation Guide 553 3001 225 Note You are not prompted for S1 PK if S1 Action is set to 1 1 retry count The number of times the IP Phone 2004 attempts to connect to the server Enter 10 1 PK Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the SMC to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following e Setto6or1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number S2 IP The secondary CS 1000 node IP address for the IP Phone 2004 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 96 of 630 Nortel IP Phone 2004 S2 Port S2 action S2 retry count S2 PK Cfg XAS 0 No 1 Yes XAS IP VLAN Cfg 0 No 1 Yes VLAN Cfg 0 Auto 1 Man 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Same as S1 Same as S1 Note You are not prompted for S2 PK if S2 Action is set to 1 Same as S1 Default is ffffffffffffffff The Private key of the alternate Secure Media Controller to which the IP Phone is connected If you are using a Secure Media Controller do the following Setto6or1 Enter a 16 digit hexadecimal number Default O for No Note lf there is no External Application Server XAS enter O for No You are not prompted to e
528. y Part 1 General requirements IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 508 of 630 Regulatory and safety information Other compliancies US Canada Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC as per FCC Part 68 This equipment complies with the CE Marking requirements C EU Countries This device complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC A copy of the Declaration may be obtained from http www nortel com corporate community environment life cycle delcarations html or Nortel Networks GmbH address Ingolstaedter Strasse 14 18 80807 Munich Germany Australia AS ACIF S004 Voice Frequency Performance Requirements for Customer Equipment For those devices equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology Bluetooth wireless technology This portable device with its antenna complies with FCC s RF radiation exposure limits for an uncontrolled environment To maintain compliance this transmitter must not be colocated or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Regulatory and safety information Page 509 of 630 DenAn regulatory notice for Japan N Warning Please be careful of the following while installing the equipment Please only use the Connecting cables power cord AC adaptors shipped with the equipment or specified by Nortel to be used with the equipment If you use any other equipment it may cause f
529. y and you hear a single tone the headset is active for a call from the desktop telephone base To use the headset with the IP Phone press and hold the headset s telephone key for 1 second You will hear a double beep The headset is active with the IP Phone If the base is powered off then the headset is only paired to the IP Phone Press the headset s telephone key to connect to the IP Phone Note Unless there is a need to dual pair a headset operating the headset with the IP Phone is simpler if the headset is only used with its charging only base The desktop IP Phone base should be powered off if it is not in use Using a wired headset If you connect a Bluetooth wireless technology headset and a wired handset to the same IP Phone the two interact as follows e fno wireless headset is paired the wired headset works as normal Likewise if a wireless headset is paired with an IP Phone but is not in range the wired headset works as normal e Ifthe Use BT Headset check box is selected the Bluetooth wireless technology headset is used as the phone headset 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Page 603 of 630 The Bluetooth wireless technology headset can work only within range of the IP Phone as a wireless headset approaches the edge of its radio range the audio quality degrades and radio interference noise increases When the wireless headset is in connecting range the Headse
530. y pressing soft key 1 BKSpace When the address is correct press soft key 1 OK The phone reads the configuration file from the TFTP server extracts the Server IP and Filename fields and attempts to download the file The display shows the message FW reading The display shows FW writing and the blue LED starts to flash After the FW image is written to the phone the message FW finished is displayed the blue LED stops flashing and the phone resets The phone registers to the TPS with the new FW version Note If the TFTP Server specified by the TFTP IP address entered during configuration is unreachable or down the IP Phone attempts to register to the TPS to perform a firmware download If the IP Phone does not register to the TPS the IP Phone will not work Check the TFTP IP address and the state of the TFTP Server then reboot the IP Phone If the IP Phone remains in this condition because no TPS FW download occurs check the TFTP IP address and the state of the TFTP Server then restart the IP Phone End of Procedure IP Phones Description Installation and Operation Page 618 of 630 Appendix H TFTP Server Figure 77 TFTP Server on a network Call Server SSC Card gt ELAN subnet Signaling Server i ig DaS i Media Card Calibiiot 1 Ba cA TLAN subnet Nortel Server subnet Firmware E TFTP Server Ld 2 E Layer 3 Routing Switch Clien
531. y see Voice VLAN traffic The integrated switch will pass DATA VLAN traffic to the PC Ethernet port This prevents the Data VLAN broadcast traffic from reaching the IP Phone For more information see Appendix Appendix B 802 1Q VLAN description on page 511 and Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 802 1x Port based network access control industry standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP over a LAN For more information about 802 1x port based network access control see Appendix Appendix C 802 1x Port based network access control on page 521 integrated hardware to support Power over Ethernet PoE for IEEE 802 3af Power Classification 0 The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 supports the following languages English French Swedish Danish Norwegian German Dutch Portuguese Czech Finnish Hungarian Italian Polish Spanish Japanese Russian Latvian Turkish Features not currently supported External three port switch to support sharing LAN access with a PC or other data device is not provided However the IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 does provide 100 Mbps full duplex support 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Page 273 of 630 Integrated switch e Personal Directory Call Log and Redial List are not supported However if the primary DN on an IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 is an MADN of an IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004
532. ycaps NTDU92AA16 A0533408 IP Phone 2004 Ethergray with English text label keycaps NTDU92BA16 A0533409 IP Phone 2004 Charcoal with Icon keycaps NTDU92AA70 A0533410 IP Phone 2004 Charcoal with English text label keycaps NTDU92BA70 A0533411 IP Phone 2004 Charcoal with English text label keycaps NTDU91BA70 A0533407 IP Phone 2004 Charcoal with Bezell with Icon keycaps NTDU92AB70 IP Phone 2004 Charcoal with Bezell with Icon keycaps NTDU92AC70E6 RoHS IP Phone 2004 Charcoal with Bezell with English text NTDU92BB70 label keycaps IP Phone 2004 Charcoal with Bezell with English text NTDU92BC70E6 label keycaps RoHS IP Phone 2004 wall mount kit Charcoal used with NTMN15BA70 A0503076 Ethergray and Charcoal models Replacement parts 7 ft Ethernet Cat5 cable A0648375 Handset Ethergray A0788874 553 3001 368 Standard 26 00 August 2007 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Page 87 of 630 Table 8 IP Phone 2004 component list Part 2 of 2 Handset Charcoal A0758634 Handset cord Ethergray A0788682 Handset cord Charcoal N0000764 Footstand Charcoal used for Ethergray and Charcoal A0538587 models IP Phone 2004 Power Adaptors Power transformer 117 120 VAC 50 60 Hz North A0619627 America Power transformer 3 prong AC to AC direct plug in 8W A0656598 240 VAC 50Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Ireland and UK Power transformer AC to AC direct plug

Avaya IP Phones User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents